JP7114543B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine capable of playing games.

In a pachinko game machine, which is an example of a game machine, a storage unit capable of storing game media supplied from a game island installed in a game hall, a payout device (payout unit) capable of paying out game media, and a guide passage forming portion that forms a guide passage for guiding the game media supplied to the storage portion to the payout portion, and the storage portion and the guide passage forming portion are attached to the game frame by screw members. (See Patent Document 1, for example).

JP-A-2003-96050

In the game machine described in Patent Document 1, the screw member for attaching the storage portion and the guide passage forming portion to the game frame, the screw member attached inside the game island, etc. come off, and the storage portion and the guide passage forming portion are removed. If the game medium falls into the part, the screw member will be mixed into the payout device together with the game medium, making it impossible to pay out the game medium normally, or the payout device will break down, or the screw member will fall into the player together with the game medium. There was a problem that it may be paid out to

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of preventing a screw member from being mixed into a payout portion.

The game machine of means A is
A game machine capable of playing,
a starting region;
a sound output means capable of outputting a production sound;
a display means capable of displaying a production moving image;
an effect executing means capable of executing an effect using the effect moving image and the effect sound;
a storage section capable of storing game media;
a payout unit capable of paying out game media;
a guide passage forming portion having an open upper surface and forming a guide passage for guiding the game media in the storage portion to the payout portion;
a screw drop limiting portion provided to cover the upper side of the guide passage forming portion;
with
A game using the effect sound and the effect moving image can be executed based on entry of the game medium paid out from the payout unit into the start area,
The screw drop-limiting portion prevents game media that have fallen on the screw drop-limiting portion from accumulating and the screw member that has dropped on the screw drop-limiting portion to fall to the guide passage forming portion. configured to be able to stay on the restriction part ,
The production executing means is
A game can be played using the game medium paid out from the payout unit, and an effect using the effect sound and the effect animation can be executed based on the entry of the game medium into the start area,
In a second period of the predetermined effect after the first period, the display means can display a effect moving image in which the progress speed of the effect is a second speed slower than the first speed, and
The effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect can be output by the sound output means at the same speed in both the first period and the second period.
It is characterized by
The game machine of means 1 is
A game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to a player,
a storage section (eg, ball tank forming section 201) capable of storing game media (eg, game ball P);
a payout unit (for example, payout device 200) capable of paying out game media;
A guide passage forming portion (for example, a first guide passage forming portion 202) that has an open top surface and forms a guide passage (for example, a first guide passage or a second guide passage) that guides game media in the storage portion to the payout portion. and second guide passage forming portion 204),
a cover part (eg, first cover body 310, second cover body 320, third cover body 330) provided to cover a part of the upper surface of the guide passage forming part;
with
A predetermined limiting portion (for example, long hole 316A 316C, recessed grooves 326A to 326C, recessed portion 336) are provided (see FIGS. 22 and 24),
A plurality of specific restricting portions (for example, holes 271A to 271H) are provided in the guiding passage forming portion for restricting the movement of the screw member that has fallen into the guiding passage forming portion to the dispensing portion (see FIG. 11). , FIGS. 12 and 27),
The predetermined restricting portion has a first retention portion (eg, long hole 316A) capable of retaining the screw members (eg, screw members N1 to N6, N11 to N16) dropped on the cover portion. ~ 316C) and a second retention portion (eg, grooves 326A to 326C),
The second retention section is provided at a position closer to the dispensing section (for example, dispensing device 200) than the first retention section, and is larger than the first retention section (L22B>L21),
moreover,
movable bodies (for example, first movable body 109SG401, second movable body 109SG402L, and third movable body 109SG402R);
A specific effect (for example, a movable body motion effect A or a movable body motion effect B) for announcing the effect result by moving the movable body, and repeatedly moving the movable body before the specific effect is executed. Effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is capable of executing a suggestive effect (for example, a movable body action suggestive effect A or a movable body action suggestive effect B) that suggests that the specific effect will be executed by 40-19 for executing the effect processing during variable display);
with
The production executing means is
While the effect image for the movable body is not displayed when the suggestive effect is executed, the effect image for the movable body is displayed when the specific effect is executed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 40-32 to 40-35). Thus, while the movable body motion suggestive effect B is being executed, the image display device 5 does not display the explosion effect image 109SG005B, while the movable body motion effect B is being executed, the explosion effect image 109SG005B is displayed on the image display device 5. is displayed),
A specific image is displayed while the suggestion effect is being executed, and the specific image is gradually enlarged and displayed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 40-32 and 40-34, during the reach effect of super reach β1 If so, ally character B and enemy character A are displayed, and ally character B and enemy character A are displayed in an enlarged manner. (the part where the ally character B and the enemy character B are displayed in an enlarged manner),
When the specific image is gradually enlarged and displayed, an effect image for the specific image can be displayed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 40-32 and 40-34, the image display device 5 where the effect image 109SG005X is displayed),
The specific images include a first specific image and a second specific image different from the first specific image, and an advantageous state is obtained when the first specific image is displayed and when the second specific image is displayed. (For example, as shown in FIG. 40-9, the variable display of super reach β2, in which friendly character B and enemy character B are displayed during the ready-to-win effect, is controlled by friendly character B and A portion where the ratio of control to the jackpot game state is higher than the variable display of super reach β1 where the enemy character A is displayed),
The control cycle of the movable body by the effect executing means is different from the update cycle of the specific image and the effect image (for example, the movement control cycle of the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R is 1 ms, whereas the update period of the effect image displayed on the image display device 5 is 33 ms)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen on the cover portion from falling into the guide passage forming portion. Moreover, it is possible to prevent the threaded member that has entered the guide passage forming portion from entering the delivery portion. In addition, since the screw member tends to be retained in the retaining portion as it approaches the dispensing portion, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen on the cover portion from moving and falling into the guide passage forming portion. Moreover, since the effect image can make the enlarged display of the specific image and the performance action of the movable body more conspicuous, the amusement of the game can be improved.

Further, the embodiments for carrying out the invention described later include an invention relating to a game machine of means 2 below. Conventionally, in game machines, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2017-99801, it is possible to execute a battle effect and a timer effect at the same time as a ready-to-win effect, and during the battle effect, the battle effect is reproduced. There were some that made it possible to further execute a slow motion effect that slows down the speed. However, in such a game machine, if the playback speed of the battle effect is slowed down as a slow motion effect, the progress speed of the timer effect is also slowed down, which makes the player feel uncomfortable. There is a problem, and in view of this point, there is a demand for providing a gaming machine that can prevent players from feeling uncomfortable.

The game machine of means 2 is
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of playing,
Sound output means capable of outputting dramatic sound (for example, IC079SG132 for voice synthesis mounted on speakers 8L and 8R and voice control board 13, voice data ROM079SG133, amplifier circuit 079SG134);
Display means (for example, image display device 5) capable of displaying effect moving images;
Effect executing means (for example, Production control CPU 120),
with
The production executing means is
In the first period of the predetermined effect, the effect moving image whose progress speed of the effect is the first speed can be displayed on the display means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 40-19 to 40-25, the first reach During the execution period of the first half of each of the production, the second ready-to-reach production, the third ready-to-reach production, and the fourth ready-to-reach production, the animation of each ready-to-reach production is displayed on the image display device 5 at the progress speed V1),
In the second period of the predetermined effect after the first period, the effect moving image in which the progress speed of the effect is a second speed slower than the first speed can be displayed on the display means (for example, FIG. 40 -19 to FIG. 40-25, during the second half execution period of each of the first reach effect, the second reach effect, the third reach effect, and the fourth reach effect, the animation of each reach effect moves to the progress speed V2 the part displayed on the image display device 5),
Regarding the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect, the speed of the effect sound can be output by the sound output means at the same speed in both the first period and the second period (for example, FIG. 40- 19 to FIG. 40-25, during the first half execution period and the second half execution period of the first reach effect, the second reach effect, the third reach effect, and the fourth reach effect, the speakers 8L and 8R (The part where BGM and production sounds are output at V4, which is the normal playback speed)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the progress speed of the effect animation of the predetermined effect changes between the first period and the second period, but the speed of the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect does not change between the first period and the second period. , it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

The present invention may include only the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention, or may include the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention and the configuration other than the matters specifying the invention. It may have.

It is a front view showing a pachinko game machine. It is a block diagram showing the configuration of the pachinko game machine. It is a rear view showing a pachinko game machine. It is a left side view showing the pachinko game machine. FIG. 4 is a plan view showing a frame for a game machine to which a game board is attached; It is a perspective view showing a state in which the pachinko game machine is seen from diagonally behind. It is a perspective view showing a state in which the game board is removed from the game machine frame. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view showing a mounting structure of the passage forming body to the game machine frame; It is an enlarged rear view showing the rear upper part of the frame for gaming machines. (A) is a plan view showing the first passage forming body, and (B) is a rear view showing the first passage forming body. (A) is a sectional view taken along line AA of FIG. 10A, (B) is a sectional view taken along line BB of FIG. 10A, and (C) is a sectional view taken along line CC of FIG. 10A. (A) is a plan view showing a first guide passage forming portion, and (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along line DD of (A). (A) is a plan view showing the first cover body, (B) is an EE cross-sectional view of (A), and (C) is an FF cross-sectional view of (A). (A) is a plan view showing the second cover body, (B) is a GG sectional view of (A), and (C) is a HH sectional view of (A). (A) is a plan view showing the third cover body, (B) is a cross-sectional view along II of (A), (C) is a cross-sectional view along JJ of (A), and (D) is a third cover body. and (E) is a perspective view showing a ball stopper member. (A) is a vertical cross-sectional view showing the first guide passage forming portion showing the ball stopper member in the first state, and (B) is the first guide passage forming portion showing the ball stopper member in the second state. It is a vertical cross-sectional view showing the. (A) is a perspective view showing a board mounting frame to which a terminal board is mounted, (B) is a KK section of (A), and (C) is a LL section of (B). It is the perspective view which shows the state which looked at the circumference|surroundings of the ball|bowl tank part in the back surface of the game frame from diagonally behind. (A) is a plan view showing the periphery of the ball tank portion on the back of the game frame, and (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along line MM of (A). It is the perspective view which shows the state which looked at the periphery of the 1st guide passage formation part in the back surface of a game frame from diagonally behind. It is a top view which shows the periphery of the 1st guide passage formation part in the back surface of a game frame. 21. (A) is a sectional view taken along line NN of FIG. 21, (B) is a view showing a rotating state of the screw member, and (C) is a sectional view taken along line OO of FIG. (A) is a cross-sectional view along PP in FIG. 21, and (B) is a cross-sectional view along QQ in FIG. FIG. 22 is a cross-sectional view taken along line RR of FIG. 21; FIG. 22 is a cross-sectional view taken along line SS of FIG. 21; (A) is the retention state of the screw member when the ball stopper is in the first state, (B) is a TT sectional view of (A), and (C) is the ball stopper when the ball stopper is in the second state. FIG. 10D is a UU cross-sectional view of FIG. 1C, showing a retained state of the screw member; It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view of the 1st guide passage formation part which shows the movement condition of a screw member. It is a vertical cross-sectional view of the first guide path forming portion showing the movement state of the game ball on the cover portion. (A) is a schematic rear view showing a cover portion as a modification, and (B) is a schematic rear view showing a state in which cables are wired so as to intersect the cover portion. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of the gaming machine in the characteristic part 053SG. It is a figure which shows the mounting surface of the game control board in Example 1. FIG. It is a figure which shows the soldering surface of the game control board in Example 1. FIG. It is a figure which shows the mounting surface of the state by which the input circuit and the output circuit were mounted in the game control board in Example 1. FIG. It is a figure which shows the structure of the data bus formed in the soldering surface of the game control board in Example 1. FIG. It is a figure which shows the wiring pattern branched from the data bus in the mounting surface of the game control board in Example 1. FIG. It is a figure which shows the structure of the ground area|region formed in the mounting surface of the game control board in Example 1. FIG. It is a figure which shows the structure of the ground area|region formed in the soldering surface of the game control board in Example 1. FIG. It is a circuit diagram showing a connection mode of low-voltage components and high-voltage components mounted on the game control board in the first embodiment. It is a figure which shows the structure of the connector mounted in the mounting surface of the game control board in Example 1. FIG. It is a diagram showing a wiring pattern around the connector formed on the solder surface of the game control board in the first embodiment. It is a figure which shows the state where the game control board in Example 1 was accommodated in the board case. It is a circuit diagram related to the supply of backup power to the game control microcomputer mounted on the game control board in the first embodiment. It is a figure which shows the wiring pattern for the power supply formed in the soldering surface of the game control board in Example 1. FIG. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the wiring pattern formed in the mounting surface of the game control board in Example 1, and the wiring pattern for power supply formed in the soldering surface. It is a figure which shows an example of the situation where the game control board in Example 1 was attached to the game machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the situation where the game control board in Example 1 was attached to the game machine. It is a figure which shows the mounting surface of the game control board in Example 2. FIG. It is a figure which shows the soldering surface of the game control board in Example 2. FIG. It is a figure which shows the wiring pattern formed in connection with the connection of the microcomputer for game control, an input circuit, and an output circuit in the soldering surface of the game control board in Example 2. FIG. It is a figure which shows the wiring pattern formed in connection with the connection of the microcomputer for game control, an input circuit, and an output circuit in the mounting surface of the game control board in Example 2. FIG. It is a circuit diagram related to the connection between the game control microcomputer and the input circuit and the output circuit in the game control board in the second embodiment. It is a perspective view showing the structure of the specific electronic component mounted on the game control board in Example 3, (A) is a perspective view from above the specific electronic component, (B) is a lower side of the specific electronic component 1 is a perspective view from . It is a cross-sectional view showing a state in which a specific electronic component is soldered to the game control board in Example 3. It is a front view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a rear perspective view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. It is a flow chart showing an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design process processing. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table; It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted in the pachinko game machine. (A) is a diagram showing an image display device, (B) is a diagram showing a rotating display of a pending display in each pending display area, and (C) is a diagram showing moving display of a telop in a telop display area. , (D) are diagrams showing the flashing mode of the fourth symbol. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram of image data that constitutes display on an image display device; (A) and (B) are diagrams illustrating an effect control command. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number; (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table 1, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table 2. FIG. (A) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a jackpot type determination table, and (B) is a diagram showing the contents of various jackpots. It is a figure which illustrates a fluctuation pattern. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between variable display results and variation patterns; It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the data holding area for game control. (A) is a block diagram showing a configuration example of an effect control data holding area, and (B) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a reception command buffer at the time of start winning. It is a flow chart which shows an example of start winning a prize judging processing. It is a part of the flowchart which shows an example of production|presentation control process processing. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of variable display start setting processing; It is a figure which shows the execution determination ratio of a chance up production|presentation. (A) is a diagram showing the decision ratio of the effect pattern of the still image display effect, and (B) is a diagram showing the effect contents of each effect pattern. (A) is a diagram showing the decision ratio of the effect pattern of the operation promotion effect, and (B) is a diagram showing the effect contents of each effect pattern. It is a timing chart showing variable display of super reach α1. It is a timing chart showing variable display of super reach α2. It is a timing chart showing variable display of super reach α3. It is a timing chart showing variable display of super reach α3. FIG. 11 is a timing chart showing variable display of super reach β1; FIG. It is a timing chart showing variable display of super reach β2. It is a timing chart showing variable display of super reach β3. It is a timing chart showing variable display of super reach β3. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of a 1st ready-to-win production. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of a 1st ready-to-win production. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of a 2nd ready-to-win production. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of a 2nd ready-to-win production. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of a 2nd ready-to-win production. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of a 3rd ready-to-win production. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of a 3rd ready-to-win production. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of a 4th ready-to-win production. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of a 4th ready-to-win production. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of a 4th ready-to-win production. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of the 2nd reach production|presentation in a modification. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of the 4th reach production|presentation in a modification. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of the 4th reach production|presentation in a modification.

A mode for carrying out the gaming machine according to the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings.

(form)
The game machine of form 1 is
a storage section (eg, ball tank forming section 201) capable of storing game media (eg, game ball P);
a payout unit (for example, payout device 200) capable of paying out game media;
A guide passage forming portion (for example, a first guide passage forming portion 202) that has an open upper surface and forms a guide passage (for example, a first guide passage or a second guide passage) that guides game media in the storage portion to the payout portion. and second guide passage forming portion 204),
It is characterized by having

The gaming machine of form 2 is the gaming machine according to form 1,
A cover portion (for example, the cover portion 314 of the first cover body 310, the cover portion 324 of the second cover body 320, the cover portion of the third cover body 330) provided to partially cover the upper surface of the guide passage forming portion 334),
The cover restricts screw members (for example, screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16) that have fallen on the cover from falling onto the guide passage forming portion (for example, the first guide passage forming portion 202). Predetermined restricting portions (for example, long holes 316A to 316C, grooves 326A to 326C, and recesses 336) are provided (see FIGS. 22 and 24).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen on the cover portion from falling into the guide passage forming portion.

The gaming machine of form 3 is the gaming machine according to form 2,
The predetermined restricting portions (for example, long holes 316A to 316C, grooves 326A to 326C, and recess 336) are provided so that game media that have fallen on the cover portion can fall from the cover portion without staying there. It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the game medium does not stay in the predetermined restricting portion and the screw member can always be kept in a state of being able to stay, the screw member dropped onto the cover portion falls into the guide passage forming portion. can be prevented.

The gaming machine of form 4 is the gaming machine according to form 2 or 3,
The predetermined restricting portion has a first retention portion (eg, long hole 316A) capable of retaining the screw members (eg, screw members N1 to N6, N11 to N16) dropped onto the cover portion. ~ 316C) and a second retention portion (eg, grooves 326A to 326C),
The second retention section is provided at a position closer to the dispensing section (for example, dispensing device 200) than the first retention section, and is larger than the first retention section (L22B>L21).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the screw member is more likely to be retained in the retaining portion as the dispensing portion is approached, so that it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen on the cover portion from moving and falling into the guide passage forming portion.

The gaming machine of form 5 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 4,
The dispensing portion (eg, dispensing device) of the screw members (eg, screw members N1 to N6, N11 to N16) dropped into the guiding passage forming portion (eg, the first guiding passage forming portion 202) 200) are provided with a plurality of specific restriction portions (for example, holes 271A to 271H) (see FIGS. 12 and 27).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has entered the guide passage forming portion from entering the delivery portion.

The gaming machine of form 6 is the gaming machine according to form 5,
The specific restriction portion is a plurality of holes (for example, holes 271A to 271H),
At least two or more of the plurality of holes have a size that allows the screw member mixed in the guide passage forming portion to drop outside the guide passage forming portion before reaching the dispensing portion. have (L11>L2, see FIG. 11)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, even if a screw member is mixed in the guide passage forming portion, it can be dropped out of the guide passage forming portion from the hole, so that the screw member mixed in the guide passage forming portion will not be mixed in the delivery portion. can be prevented. In addition, it is possible to prevent the screw member from entering the guide passage forming portion from obstructing the flow of the game medium.

The gaming machine of form 7 is the gaming machine according to form 6,
The plurality of holes have different sizes,
A predetermined largest hole among the plurality of holes is provided at a position closest to the dispensing portion (for example, the lateral dimension L12 of the hole 271H is larger than the lateral dimension of the other holes 271A to 271G. See Figure 12)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the screw member can be suitably dropped from the predetermined hole to the outside of the guide passage forming portion, so that the screw member dropped into the guide passage forming portion can be prevented from being mixed into the dispensing portion. .

The gaming machine of form 8 is the gaming machine according to form 6 or 7,
The cover portion (for example, the cover portion 314 of the first cover body 310, the cover portion 324 of the second cover body 320, the third cover body 330, and There is an uncovered area (e.g., uncovered area 350) that is not covered by the cover portion 334 of
At least some of the plurality of specific restricting portions (for example, holes 271B to 271H) are provided at positions corresponding to the uncovered regions in the guide passage forming portion (see FIG. 27).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, even if the screw member enters the guide passage-forming portion from the uncovered region, it can be dropped out of the guide passage-forming portion through the hole.

The gaming machine of form 9 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 8,
A game frame (for example, a game machine frame 3) provided with the storage portion (for example, a ball tank forming portion 201),
The reservoir is
Arranged on the upper surface side of a predetermined portion (for example, the first projecting portion 224) of the game frame,
It is close to or in contact with the upper surface of the predetermined portion so that the screw member does not enter between it and the upper surface of the predetermined portion (L30<L1, see FIG. 19B).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member from entering between the predetermined portion of the game frame and the storage portion and damaging the member.

The gaming machine of form 10 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 9,
A first board (e.g., main board 11, effect control board 12, etc.) attached to a lower position than the guide path forming portion (e.g., first guide path forming portion 202);
a second substrate (for example, a terminal substrate 210) attached at a position above the guide passage forming portion;
with
The first board is mounted by a mounting method using screw members, while the second board is mounted by a mounting method different from the mounting method using screw members (for example, the board cases 11A and 12A are mounted using screw members). The terminal board 210 is attached to the board mounting frame 211 by using locking means consisting of a plurality of regulating parts 235 and locking parts 236 as mounting means different from screw members. See Figure 17)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the guide passage forming portion from being mixed into the delivery portion.

The gaming machine of form 11 is the gaming machine according to form 10,
The second board is an external output board (e.g., terminal board 210) to which a wiring (e.g., cable C) for outputting a predetermined signal to the outside of the gaming machine is connected,
The first substrate has a smaller number of wirings to be connected than the external output substrate (for example, the plurality of connection holes 231 of the terminal substrate 210 as the first substrate provided above the first guide path forming portion 202). While the number of cables C that can be connected to is set to the first number (for example, 20), the second Each signal line is also connected to the substrate, but the second number (for example, 10) is smaller than the first number.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the second board, which has a large number of wires to be connected and is likely to be subjected to an external force during the wiring connection work, cannot be attached with a screw member. It is possible to prevent it from falling into the guide passage forming portion.

The gaming machine of form 12 is the gaming machine according to form 10 or 11,
a game frame (for example, the game machine frame 3) provided with the storage portion (for example, the ball tank forming portion 201);
a mounting frame (for example, a board mounting frame 211) for mounting the external output board to the game frame;
with
The mounting frame is characterized by having a mounting frame restricting portion (for example, recessed portion 242) for restricting the movement of the screw member that has fallen onto the mounting frame to the guide passage forming portion.
According to this feature, the mounting frame of the external output board can be utilized to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the guide passage forming portion from being mixed into the dispensing portion.

The gaming machine of form 13 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 12,
The guide passages of the screw members (for example, screw members N1 to N6, N11 to N16) moved toward the guide passage forming portion (for example, the first guide passage forming portion 202) around the guide passage forming portion (for example, the first guide passage forming portion 202) Special restricting portions (for example, recessed portions 280, 290, 214, 242, 243) are provided to restrict dropping into the forming portion (Fig. 22(C), Figs. 23(A), (B), Fig. 24 reference)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member from falling into the guide passage forming portion.

The gaming machine of form 14 is the gaming machine according to form 13,
The special restricting portion moves the screw members (for example, screw members N1 to N6, N11 to N16) that have moved toward the guide passage forming portion (for example, the first guide passage forming portion 202) to the guide passage forming portion. A special retention portion (for example, recesses 280, 290, 214, 242, 243) that can be retained before reaching, and is provided below the screw member attached to the attached portion,
A threaded member that has been detached from the attached portion but has not been retained in the special retaining portion can move toward the cover portion (see FIGS. 22(C), 23(A), (B), and 24).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member detached from the attached portion from falling into the guide passage forming portion.

The gaming machine of form 15 is the gaming machine according to form 13 or 14,
The special retention portion is a recess (for example, recesses 280, 290, 214, 242, 243) capable of accommodating at least a portion of the screw member,
The depth of the recess is the depth to which part of the screw member protrudes when the screw member is accommodated (see FIGS. 22(C), 23(A), (B), and 24).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the screw member retained in the recess can be easily taken out.

The gaming machine of form 16 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 15,
A cover portion (for example, the cover portion 334 of the third cover body 330) provided to cover a part of the upper surface of the guide passage forming portion (for example, the first guide passage forming portion 202),
The cover portion is provided so as to incline downward toward the dispensing portion side,
A specific portion (for example, a ball stop member 340) capable of retaining a screw member dropped onto the cover portion is provided on the payout portion side of the cover portion in the inclined direction (Fig. 15, Figures 26 and 27)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the guide passage forming portion from being mixed into the delivery portion.

The gaming machine of form 17 is the gaming machine according to form 16,
The specific part (for example, the ball stopping member 340) allows the game medium (for example, the game ball P) to flow down from the guide path forming part (for example, the first guide path forming part 202); It can be changed to a second state in which the game medium in the guide passage forming portion is difficult to flow down or impossible to flow down (for example, the rotating portion 341 is positioned at the upright position and the front wall portion 341A deviates upward from the slit 344). A first state in which the game ball in the first guide path forming portion 202 can flow down to the second guide path forming portion 204, and the rotating portion 341 is positioned at the tilted position, and the front wall portion 341A is inserted into the slit 344. It is possible to change to a second state in which it is possible to contact the game ball and the game ball in the first guide path forming part 202 cannot flow down to the second guide path forming part 204 (or difficult to flow down).) ,
When the specific portion is in the second state, the screw member tends to stay more easily than when it is in the first state (see FIG. 26).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the guide passage forming portion from being mixed into the delivery portion.

The gaming machine of form 18 is the gaming machine according to form 16 or 17,
The cover part
A first cover portion (for example, long holes 316A to 316C, grooves 326A to 326C, recess 336) provided with a retention portion (for example, long holes 316A to 316C, recessed grooves 326A to 326C, recessed portion 336) capable of retaining screw members dropped onto the cover portion ( For example, the cover portion 324 of the first cover body 310, the cover portion 324 of the second cover body 320),
a second cover portion provided with the specific portion (for example, the cover portion 334 of the third cover body 330) different from the first cover portion;
It is characterized by including
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the guide passage forming portion from being mixed into the delivery portion.

The gaming machine of form 19 is the gaming machine according to form 18,
The second cover portion (for example, cover portion 334 of third cover body 330) is attached by a screw member (for example, screw member N16) having a locking portion (for example, flange portion F) (see FIG. 8). reference)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the guide passage forming portion from being mixed into the delivery portion.

The gaming machine of form 20 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 19,
A game frame (for example, a game machine frame 3) provided with the storage portion (for example, a ball tank forming portion 201),
The storage portion is attached to the game frame at a plurality of locations by screw members (for example, screw members N11 to N14) having locking portions,
A screw member for attaching the storage portion and the guiding passage forming portion (for example, the first guiding passage forming portion 202) to the game frame is designed to fall outside the guiding passage forming portion even if the screw member is disengaged from the game frame. Installed (see Figure 8)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the screw member that attaches the storage portion is made difficult to come off from the game frame, and the screw member that attaches the storage portion and the guide passage formation portion falls outside the guide passage formation portion even if it comes off. It is possible to prevent the threaded member that has fallen into the passage forming portion from being mixed into the delivery portion.

The gaming machine of form 21 is the gaming machine according to form 20,
A plurality of screw members for attaching the storage portion (for example, the ball tank forming portion 201) and the guide passage forming portion (for example, the first guide passage forming portion 202) to the game frame (for example, the game machine frame 3) Of these, a predetermined screw member (for example, screw member N12) near the periphery of the game machine is also used as a screw member for attaching a ground wire (for example, ground wire 226) (see FIG. 8).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the number of screw members can be reduced, it is possible to prevent the screw members that have fallen into the guide passage forming portion from being mixed into the delivery portion.

The gaming machine of form 22 is the gaming machine according to form 20 or 21,
The screw members (for example, screw members N11 to N14) for attaching the storage portion (for example, the ball tank forming portion 201) to the game frame (for example, the game machine frame 3) are provided to reinforce the game frame. Attached to a metal member (for example, a metal plate 222) (see FIG. 8)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the reservoir can be firmly attached.

The gaming machine of form 23 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 20 to 22,
Screw members (for example, screw members N3 to N6) attached to positions above the guide passage forming portion (for example, the first guide passage forming portion 202) in the game frame (for example, the game machine frame 3) are The screw member is different from the screw member having the locking portion.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the guide passage forming portion from being mixed into the delivery portion.

The gaming machine of form 24 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 20 to 23,
A game board (e.g., game board 2) detachable from the game frame (e.g., game machine frame 3) is provided,
In the area below the guiding passage forming portion (for example, the first guiding passage forming portion 202) in the game board, there is an inclined surface (for example, the upper portion of the cover body 220) that allows the falling screw member to flow down. wall portion 220H) is provided (see FIGS. 18 to 20 and 27)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has dropped from the guide passage forming portion onto the game board to rebound and be mixed into the guide passage forming portion again.

The gaming machine of form 25 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 24,
A cover portion (for example, the cover portion 360 of Modification 1) provided to cover a part of the upper surface of the guide passage forming portion (for example, the first guide passage forming portion 202),
The guide passage forming portion is
a first passage forming portion (e.g., first guide passage forming portion 202) extending downward toward one side (e.g., left side);
a second passage forming portion (for example, a second guiding passage forming portion 204) extending downward from the lower end of the first passage forming portion;
has
The cover portion is provided along the first passage forming portion so that the screw member dropped onto the cover portion moves and falls outside the guiding passage forming portion from the lower end (Fig. 29 ( A) See)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the guide passage forming portion from being mixed into the delivery portion.

The gaming machine of form 26 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 2 to 25,
A wiring (for example, a cable CH) is provided so as to cross the guide passage forming portion at a position near the predetermined restriction portion (for example, the concave portion 361) in the cover portion (for example, the cover portion 360 of Modification 1). (see FIG. 29(B))
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the screw member is likely to get caught on the wiring and remain in the predetermined restricting portion.

(Configuration of pachinko machine 1, etc.)
First, the configuration of the pachinko game machine 1 will be described. In the following description, the direction in which the player is positioned is the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the opposite direction is the rear. Also, the description will be made with reference to the up, down, left, and right directions when viewed from a player positioned in front of the pachinko gaming machine 1 .

FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko game machine 1, showing the arrangement layout of the main members. A pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly composed of a game board (gauge board) 2 forming a game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 supporting and fixing the game board 2 . A game area Y is formed in the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is shot and struck in the game area Y from a predetermined ball shooting device. In addition, a glass door frame 50 having a glass window 50a is provided in the game machine frame 3 so as to be rotatable around the left side, and the game area Y can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 50. When the glass door frame 50 is closed, the game area Y can be seen through the glass window 50a.

As shown in FIG. 1, the game board 2 is made of a translucent synthetic resin material such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, or methacrylic resin, and has a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front. (not shown), a guide rail 2b, etc., and a spacer member integrally attached to the back side of the board. The game board 2 is made of a non-translucent member such as a plywood board and has a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front. may be configured

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the bottom left of the game area Y), special symbols (also called special symbols) as special identification information of a plurality of types are variably displayed (also called a special symbol game). A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided. Each of these consists of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The special symbol may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off.

Incidentally, the "variable display" of the special symbols means, for example, that a plurality of types of special symbols are displayed in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). Variations include updating display of a plurality of patterns, scrolling display of a plurality of patterns, deformation of one or more patterns, enlargement/reduction of one or more patterns, and the like. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols, which will be described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative patterns, which will be described later, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. Incidentally, the variation includes a mode of blinking a certain symbol. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to variable display of other symbols to be described later). Variable display may be expressed as variable display or variation.

The special symbols variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A are also called "first special symbols", and the special symbols variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B are also called "second special symbols". Also, a special game using the first special game is called a "first special game", and a special game using the second special game is called a "second special game". In addition, the number of special symbol display devices that variably display the special symbols may be one.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area Y on the game board 2 . The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display) or an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5 . A frame-shaped center decorative frame 51 is provided in the opening 2c of the game board 2. As shown in FIG.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronism with the first special game and the second special game, a plurality of types of decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers) as decoration identification information different from the special patterns. variable display is performed. Here, in synchronism with the first special game or the second special game, decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, vertically direction scroll display and update display). In addition, the special game and the variable display of the decoration pattern which are executed in synchronization are collectively referred to simply as the variable display.

A display area may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5 for displaying suspended display corresponding to the variable display whose execution is suspended and active display corresponding to the variable display being executed. Suspended display and active display are also collectively referred to as variable display corresponding display corresponding to variable display.

The number of variable representations that are reserved is also referred to as the number of reserved memories. The reserved memory number corresponding to the first special game is also referred to as the first reserved memory number, and the reserved memory number corresponding to the second special game is also referred to as the second reserved memory number. The sum of the first reserved memory count and the second reserved memory count is also referred to as the total reserved memory count.

In addition, at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the bottom left of the game area), a first suspension display 25A and a second suspension display 25B each including a plurality of LEDs are provided. , the first reservation display 25A displays the first reservation storage number according to the number of lit LEDs, and the second reservation display 25B displays the second reservation storage number according to the number of lit LEDs.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

Winning ball device 6A, for example, forms a first starting winning opening that is kept in a constant open state in which game balls can enter, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the first special game can be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning hole that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). For example, the variable winning ball device 6B includes a starting winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 81, and when the solenoid 81 is in an OFF state, the starting winning opening door is in the closed position, thereby opening the second starting winning opening. It will be in a closed state in which the game ball does not enter (it is also said that the second start winning opening is in a closed state). On the other hand, in the variable winning ball device 6B, when the solenoid 81 is in the ON state, the starting winning opening door is in the open position, so that the game ball can enter the second starting winning opening (the second It is also said that the starting prize opening is in an open state.). When the game ball enters the second start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the second special game can be started. Note that the variable winning ball device 6B may be one that changes between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable winglets. Also, when a game ball enters the second start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the second special game can be started.

At predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four positions on the left and right sides of the game area), there are provided general winning holes 10 which are always kept open by predetermined ball receiving members. In this case, when the player enters one of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

A special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning hole is provided between the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7 is provided with a large winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2), and the special winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the large winning opening door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning door (for the special electric accessory) is in the OFF state, the big winning door closes the big winning door, and the game ball is pushed out. You will not be able to enter (pass through) the prize gate. On the other hand, in the special variable prize winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special prize winning port door is in the ON state, the special prize winning port door opens the big prize winning port, making it easier for the game ball to enter the big prize winning port. Become.

When game balls enter the big winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When the game balls enter the big winning hole, more prize balls are paid out than when the game balls enter the first starting winning hole, the second starting winning hole and the general winning hole 10, for example.

Entering a game ball into each winning hole including general winning holes is also called "winning". In particular, winning a prize to a starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening starting opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the bottom left of the game area Y). As an example, the normal symbol display device 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs variable display of normal symbols as a plurality of types of normal identification information different from special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9", lighting patterns such as "-", and the like. The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of normal patterns is also called a normal pattern game.

A passage gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided on the right side of the image display device 5 . Based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41, the normal game is executed.

Below the normal pattern display 20, a normal pattern holding display 25C is provided. The general pattern suspension display 25C includes, for example, four LEDs, and displays the normal pattern suspension storage number, which is the number of general pattern games whose execution is suspended, by the number of lit LEDs.

The surface of the game board 2 is provided with, in addition to the above structure, a windmill for changing the flowing direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area Y, there is provided an out port (not shown) into which game balls that have not entered any of the winning ports are taken in.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the left and right upper positions of the game machine frame 3, and a game effect lamp 9 for game effects is provided at the peripheral portion of the game area Y. It is The game effect lamp 9 includes an LED.

At a predetermined position (not shown in FIG. 1) of the game board 2, a movable body 32 that operates according to the performance is provided.

A ball hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like in order to shoot a game ball toward the game area Y by the ball shooting device is provided at the lower right portion of the game machine frame 3 .

At a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area Y, game balls paid out as prize balls and game balls lent from a predetermined ball lending machine are held so as to be supplied to the ball launching device ( A batted ball supply plate (upper plate) for storage is provided. Below the upper plate, there is provided a payout port through which prize balls are paid out when the upper plate is full. A hitting ball supply tray (lower tray) may be provided.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area Y, a stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by the player is attached. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. An operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by a controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area Y, there is provided a push button 31B that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation. An operation on the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

The pachinko game machine 1 is provided with a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B as detection means for detecting actions (operations, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Overview of Game Progress)
A game ball is shot toward the game area Y by a player's rotation operation of the ball hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko game machine 1 . When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the normal pattern display device 20 starts the normal pattern game. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the period during the execution of the previous normal game (when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 but the normal game based on the passage cannot be immediately executed) , the normal game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In this normal pattern game, if a specific normal pattern (normal pattern per pattern) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern per pattern". On the other hand, if a normal pattern (normal pattern losing pattern) other than the normal pattern per pattern is stop-displayed as the determined normal pattern, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern losing". When it comes to "normal game", the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period of time and the opening control is performed (the second start winning opening is opened).

When a game ball enters the first starting winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during execution of the special game or during the period when it is controlled to the big win game state or the small win game state described later (although the start winning has occurred) If the special game based on the starting prize cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special game based on the entry is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (a big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the type of the big hit described below) is stopped and displayed as a fixed special symbol, it becomes a "big win" and a big winning symbol. If a predetermined special symbol (a small winning symbol, for example, "2") different from the symbol is stop-displayed, it becomes a "small winning". Also, if a special symbol (losing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big-hit symbol or the small-hit symbol is stop-displayed, it becomes "losing".

After the display result in the special game becomes "big win", the game is controlled to a big win game state as an advantageous state for the player. After the display result in the special game becomes "minor win", it is controlled to the small win game state.

In the jackpot game state, the player can get a prize ball by entering the game ball into the big winning hole. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the upper limit period of opening, the more advantageous the player is.

In addition, a jackpot type is set in the "jackpot". For example, a plurality of types of opening modes (number of rounds and upper limit period of opening) of the big winning opening and game states after the jackpot game state (normal state, time saving state, variable probability state, etc. described later) are prepared, and the jackpot is obtained according to these. type is set. As the jackpot type, there may be provided a jackpot type in which a large number of prize balls can be obtained, and a jackpot type in which a small number of prize balls or almost no prize balls can be obtained.

In the small winning game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small winning game state, the same opening mode as the big winning game state when some jackpot types etc.), the big prize opening is opened. In addition, you may provide a small-hit classification also in a "small-hit" like a big-hit classification.

After the jackpot game state is finished, depending on the jackpot type, it may be controlled to a time-saving state or a variable probability state.

In the time saving state, the control (time saving control) that shortens the average special figure fluctuation time (period of varying the special figure) than the normal state is executed. In the time-saving state, by shortening the average normal figure fluctuation time (the period during which the normal figure is changed) than in the normal state, and by improving the probability of becoming a "normal figure hit" in the general figure game than in the normal state, etc. Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for game balls to enter the second start winning opening is also executed. Since the time-saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols (especially the second special symbols) is improved, it is an advantageous state for the player.

In the variable probability state (probability variable state), in addition to the time-saving control, the variable probability control in which the probability that the display result is a "jackpot" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The variable probability state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols is improved, and in addition, a "big hit" is likely to occur, so it is a further advantageous state for the player.

The time saving state and the variable probability state are continued until one of the end conditions such as execution of the special game for a predetermined number of times and start of the next big win game state is established first. The end condition that the special figure game of a predetermined number of times has been executed is also referred to as a number cut (number cut time reduction, number cut probability variable, etc.).

The normal state means a game state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, a time saving state, a variable probability state, etc., and the display result in the normal game is "normal game". The pachinko gaming machine 1, such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special game will be a "jackpot", returns to the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, when the system is reset, a predetermined return after power-on) It is the state controlled in the same way as when processing is not executed).

The state in which probability variable control is executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which probability variable control is not executed is also called a low probability state. A state in which time-saving control is performed is also referred to as a high-based state, and a state in which time-saving control is not performed is also referred to as a low-based state. Combining these, the short-time state is also called a low-probability-high base state, the probability-variable state is a high-probability-high base state, and the normal state is a low-probability-low base state. The high probability state and the low base state are also referred to as the high probability low base state.

After the small win game state is over, the game state is not changed, and the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes "small win" is continuously controlled (however, "small win" occurs). If the special game at the time is the special game for the predetermined number of times in the above cut, the game state is naturally changed). In addition, there may not be a "small hit" as a display result of a special figure game.

Incidentally, the game state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area within the big winning opening) during the jackpot game state. For example, when the game ball passes through the specific area, it may be controlled to the probability variable state after the big hit game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects such as notifying the progress of the game and exciting the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5. In addition to or instead of the display, sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and the game effect lamp 9 are provided. lighting or extinguishing, the movement of the movable body 32, or a performance using any performance device including a part or all of these.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, the first special game or the second In response to the start of the 2 special figure game, the variable display of the decoration pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also called fixed special pattern) is stopped and displayed in the first special game or the second special game, a fixed decorative pattern (combination of three decorative patterns), which is the display result of variable display of decorative patterns, is displayed. ) is also stopped (derived).

During the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative design to the end of the variable display, the variable display of the decorative design may be in a predetermined ready-to-win state (ready-to-win state is established). Here, the ready-to-win mode means that when the decorative symbols stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitute a part of the jackpot combination described later, the decorative symbols that are not stopped and displayed are displayed in a variable manner. It is the aspect that is continuing.

Further, a ready-to-win effect is executed in response to the above-described ready-to-win mode during the variable display of decorative symbols. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (the display result of the special game or the display result of the variable display of the decoration pattern) to the "big win" (also called the "big win reliability" or "big win expectation") depends on the performance mode. A plurality of different types of ready-to-win effects are executed. The ready-to-win performance includes, for example, a normal reach and a super-to-win with higher reliability than the normal reach.

When the display result of the special game is a "big hit", a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined big hit combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration The display result of the variable display of the pattern becomes a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decoration patterns (for example, "7" etc.) are stop-displayed together on predetermined effective lines in the "left", "middle" and "right" decoration pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. .

In the case of a ``variable probability big hit'' controlled to a variable probability state after the end of the big win game state, odd decorative patterns (for example, "7" etc.) are stopped and displayed together, and the variable probability state is entered after the end of the big win game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", even-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be stopped and displayed together. In this case, odd-numbered decorative patterns are also called probability variable patterns and even-numbered decorative patterns are also called non-probable variable patterns (normal patterns). After becoming a ready-to-win mode with non-probability variation symbols, a promotion performance may be executed to finally become a "probability variation big hit".

When the display result of the special figure game is "small hit", on the screen of the image display device 5, as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns, a fixed decorative pattern (for example, " 1, 3, 5", etc.) are derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a "minor hit"). As an example, decoration symbols constituting a chance eye are stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the “left”, “middle” and “right” decoration symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. In addition, when the display result of the special game is "big hit" of some jackpot types (jackpot type of jackpot game state in the same manner as the small win game state), and when it becomes "small hit" , a common fixed decoration pattern may be derived and displayed.

If the display result of the special game is "Loss", the variable display mode of the decorative pattern does not become the ready-to-win mode, and the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination (" Also referred to as "non-reach loss".) may be stopped (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes "non-reach loss"). In addition, when the display result is "losing", after the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern becomes the ready-to-win mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a predetermined ready-to-win combination ("reach losing") that is not a big hit combination. (Also called) fixed decorative pattern is displayed stop (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is "reach lost").

The effects that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 include displaying the variable display corresponding display (suspended display and active display). In addition, as other effects, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big hit is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols. The notice effect includes a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display during execution and a pre-reading notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is suspended). As the pre-reading advance notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the display corresponding to the variable display (suspended display or active display) to a mode different from normal may be executed.

Also, in the image display device 5, the decorative patterns are temporarily stopped during the variable display of the decorative patterns, and then the variable display is restarted, so that one variable display is simulated as a plurality of variable displays. A pseudo continuous effect may be executed.

During the big winning game state, the performance during the big winning is executed to report the big winning game state. As the effect during the big win, the effect of notifying the number of rounds or the promotion effect indicating that the value of the big win game state is improved may be executed. Also, during the small-hit game state, an effect during the small-hit game for notifying the small-hit game state is executed. In addition, during the small-hit game state, some big-hit types (jackpot types in the same manner as the small-hit game state, for example, the jackpot type in which the subsequent game state is a high probability state) By executing a common performance in both states, the player may not know whether the current state is a small win game state or a big win game state. In such a case, by executing a common performance after the end of the small winning game state and after the end of the big winning game state, it is made impossible to distinguish whether the state is a high probability state or a low probability state. may

Further, for example, when a special game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc., as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as payout control board 37 (see FIG. 3), information terminal board, launch control board, power supply board 91 (see FIG. 3), etc. are arranged on the back of pachinko game machine 1. there is

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of a special game (including management of suspension), execution of a general-purpose game (including management of suspension), jackpot game state, small hit game state, game state, etc.) has a function to control. The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , a random number circuit 104 and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105 .

The CPU 103 executes a program stored in the ROM 101 to perform processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the functions of the main substrate 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described later, effect control commands described later, data such as various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. . The RAM 102 is a backup RAM that retains stored contents for a predetermined period of time even if the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped in part or in its entirety. All or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be developed in the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102 .

In addition, the CPU 103 determines whether or not there is a first start prize or a second start prize, and if there is a prize, a random value for special figure display result determination, jackpot type determination, variation pattern determination, etc. , respectively, and stored (stored) at the top of the empty entry in the first special figure reservation storage section and the second special figure reservation storage section.

Further, the CPU 103 determines whether or not to start the special figure game based on the presence or absence of the reserved data stored in the first special figure reservation storage unit and the second special figure reservation storage unit, and the special figure display result Based on the numerical data indicating the random number value for judgment, whether or not the fluctuation display result of the special pattern and the production pattern is a "jackpot" is determined (predetermined) before the fluctuation display result is derived and displayed. Symbol normal processing is executed. In other words, when starting the variable display of the special game, the CPU 103 determines whether or not to derive and display the big win display result as the display result of the variable display based on the random number value stored when the start winning is generated. Execute the process of determining (lottery).

The random number circuit 104 counts updatably numerical data representing various random numbers (game random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. The game random numbers may be updated (updated by software) when the CPU 103 executes a predetermined computer program.

The I/O 105 includes, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals to be described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, normal symbol display device 20, first reservation It includes an output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the indicator 25A, the second hold indicator 25B, the normal figure hold indicator 25C, and a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 receives detection signals from various switches (gate switch 21, starting switch (first starting switch 22A and second starting switch 22B), count switch 23) for detecting game balls A detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on by entering) is captured and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

Solenoid circuit 111, a solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 100 (for example, a signal to turn on the solenoid 81 and the solenoid 82), to the solenoid 81 for normal electric accessories and the solenoid 82 for the big winning entrance door transmit.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100), as part of the control of the progress of the game, produces a production control command (a command to specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game. 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. - 特許庁The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, the display result of the special game (including the jackpot type), the variation pattern used when executing the special game (details will be described later). )), game status (for example, start and end of variable display, opening status of big winning slots, occurrence of winning, number of reserved memories, game status), commands specifying error occurrence, and the like.

The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives the effect control command, and produces effects based on the received effect control command (various effects according to the progress of the game, (including various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, power failure recovery notification, etc.).

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to execute a process for executing the effect together with the display control unit 123 (a process for realizing the above function of the effect control board 12, and the effect to be executed (including the decision, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as a main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by the player is detected and appropriately indicates the operation content). The controller 123 may also be instructed.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes an effect based on an effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120 .

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5 based on the performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120 . The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal designating the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on/off the game effect lamp 9 . Also, it supplies a lamp signal (a signal specifying the lighting/extinguishing mode of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14 . Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a driving circuit for driving the movable body 32 .

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on/off the game effect lamp 9 in a manner specified by the lamp signal. do. In this manner, the display control unit 123 controls sound output and lighting/extinguishing of the lamp.

The effect control CPU 120 executes voice output, lamp lighting/extinguishing control (supply of sound designation signals and lamp signals, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of signals for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 counts updatably numerical data indicating various random numbers (random numbers for effects) used for executing various effects. The effect random number may be updated by effect control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

I / O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 has an input port for taking in production control commands transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). and an output port of

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko game machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(Back structure of pachinko machine)
Next, the rear structure of the pachinko game machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 3 to 7. FIG. FIG. 3 is a rear view showing the pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 4 is a left side view showing the pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 5 is a plan view showing a game machine frame to which a game board is attached. FIG. 6 is a perspective view showing a state in which the pachinko gaming machine is seen obliquely from behind. FIG. 7 is a perspective view showing a state in which the game board is removed from the game machine frame. 5 to 7, illustration of the glass door frame 50 is omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 3 to 7, the pachinko game machine 1 includes a game board 2, a game machine frame 3 to which the game board 2 is detachably provided, and a left side of the game machine frame 3. A game hall having a glass door frame 50 provided so as to be able to open and close the front surface of the machine frame 3, and a square frame-shaped outer frame 60 supporting the game machine frame 3 so as to be openable and closable about the left side thereof. By fixing the outer frame 60 to a game island (not shown) installed in the game island, it can be installed on the game island.

At the upper back of the game machine frame 3, a replenishment device 150 (FIGS. 3 and 4) is provided from a circulation path of game balls (hereinafter also referred to as game balls P) provided inside game islands (not shown). ), forming a ball tank forming portion 201 that forms a storage portion capable of storing game balls supplied through the ball tank forming portion 201, and forming a first guide passage that guides the game balls stored in the ball tank forming portion 201 toward the left side. A first guide passage forming portion 202 and a first passage forming body 203 extending in the left-right direction along the upper side portion 3A of the frame 3 for a game machine. A terminal substrate 210, which will be described later, is provided above the first guide path forming portion 202. As shown in FIG.

The replenishing device 150 has a guiding member 150A composed of a nozzle or the like capable of guiding the game balls on the circulation route of the game island, and a predetermined number (for example, 10) of the game balls guided by the guiding member 150A. a sprocket (not shown) capable of driving the sprocket, a drive source (not shown) for driving the sprocket, and the game machine frame 3 when the opening of the outer frame 60 is closed by the game machine frame 3. When the lever switch (not shown) is pressed by the game machine frame 3 in the closed state, the game balls sent out by the sprocket enter the ball tank forming portion 201. When the lever switch (not shown) is not pressed by the game machine frame 3 in the open state, the game ball delivered by the sprocket is held so as not to fall. When the number of game balls stored in the ball tank forming part 201 decreases while the outer frame 60 is in the closed state, the drive source rotates the sprocket and the game balls are sent out by a predetermined number to the ball tank forming part 201. It is designed to be supplied to In the replenishment device 150, a case body 150B is constructed by assembling a plurality of members with a plurality of screw members (not shown). It is fixed at a predetermined location.

In addition, a second guide path forming portion 204 that forms a second guide path that guides the game ball guided to the left side by the first guide path forming portion 202 downward, and a game guided by the second guide path forming portion 204 A payout device 200 constituting a payout section capable of putting out balls, and a payout passage for guiding the game balls paid out by the payout device 200 to the upper tray, that is, forming a payout passage for paying out the game balls to the player. Pachinko game for discharging the game balls guided by the payout passage forming part 205 and the second guiding passage forming part 204 to the outside of the pachinko game machine 1 without paying out from the payout device 200 to the payout passage forming part 205 A second passage forming body 207 comprising a ball removing passage forming portion 206 that forms a ball removing passage leading to a discharge portion (not shown) provided on the lower back side of the machine 1 is provided in the gaming machine frame 3. It extends vertically along the left side of the back surface of the .

The payout device 200 is composed of a case body formed in a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape, and has therein a sprocket for paying out a predetermined number of game balls (for example, one ball) at a time, a payout motor for rotating the sprocket, and a game ball. A switching valve capable of switching the passage of the balls between the paying-out passage and the ball-removing passage, an operation lever for switching the switching valve, and the like are provided. Further, a board case 91A in which the power board 91 is housed, a board case 37A in which the payout control board 37 is housed, and the like are provided at the lower back of the gaming machine frame 3 .

In this embodiment, a ball break switch (not shown) capable of detecting a game ball is provided at a predetermined position of the second guide path, and the CPU 103 receives a detection signal from the ball break switch (not shown). Based on the input state, it is constantly monitored whether or not there are game balls to be paid out in the second guide passage on the upstream side of the payout device 200.例文帳に追加When the off state of the ball-out switch (not shown) continues for a predetermined time or longer, it is determined that game balls are not supplied to the payout device 200 for some reason such as ball clogging, that is, a replenishment error has occurred, and payout is performed. The payout operation by the device 200 is stopped. In addition, a predetermined display (not shown) connected to the main board 11 displays a replenishment error, and by outputting a replenishment error command to the effect control board 12, the effect control CPU 120 displays the glass door frame 50. A game effect lamp 9 provided at a predetermined place on the front face is illuminated in an error mode, so that notification processing to the effect that a replenishment error has occurred can be executed.

As shown in FIG. 7, the game board 2 is detachably arranged from the front side of the gaming machine frame 3 in an opening 221 formed substantially in the central portion of the gaming machine frame 3 . The game board 2 includes a plate-like body 2a made up of the above-described board plate and spacer members, various game parts (for example, obstacle nails, winning devices, etc.) provided on the front side of the plate-like body 2a, and the plate-like body 2a. Electronic components such as an image display device 5 provided on the back side, a production device having a movable body 32, a board case 12A in which the production control board 12 is stored, a board case 11A in which the main board 11 is stored, and a plate-shaped It is a structure including a cover body 220 that protects a part, a production device, electronic parts, and the like.

The substrate cases 11A, 12A, 91A, and 37A are configured so that each substrate can be housed therein by a base member and a cover member made of a transparent synthetic resin material. , are attached to the game machine frame 3 or the game board 2 by one or more screw members N20, N21 (see FIG. 3), respectively, and the board cases 91A, 37A are attached to the game machine frame 3 by locking means (not shown). Or it is attached to the game board 2 . The cover body 220 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin material in the shape of a box with an open front surface. part can be opened and closed.

As shown in FIGS. 4 to 6, a first passage formation body 203 and a second passage formation body 207 provided on the back surface of the game machine frame 3, and a cover body 220 constituting the back surface of the game board 2 are It protrudes rearward from the outer frame 60 when the outer frame 60 is closed by the machine frame 3 . In particular, the first passage forming body 203 is provided so that the upper surface opening of the ball tank forming portion 201 is arranged behind the upper plate of the outer frame 60 on the upper back surface of the frame 3 for a game machine, so that the pachinko machine can be used for pachinko games. In a state in which the outer frame 60 of the game machine 1 is fixed to a game island (not shown), game balls can be supplied to the ball tank forming section 201 through the supply device 150 from the circulation path above the game island. .

(Mounting Structure of First Passage Forming Body 203)
Next, a structure for attaching the first passage forming body 203 to the game machine frame 3 will be described with reference to FIGS. 8 and 9. FIG. FIG. 8 is an exploded perspective view showing the attachment structure of the passage forming body to the game machine frame. FIG. 9 is an enlarged rear view showing the upper rear portion of the frame for gaming machine.

As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the game machine frame 3 is a substantially rectangular frame when viewed from the front, and is provided with an opening 221 for mounting the game board 2 thereon. A reinforcing metal plate 222 is provided in the left-right direction on the rear surface of the upper side portion 3A. A mounting member 223 for mounting the first passage forming body 203 to the game machine frame 3 is mounted on the back surface of the metal plate 222 .

The mounting member 223 is formed of a synthetic resin material so as to be able to cover the metal plate 222 from the back side. It is attached to the metal plate 222 by screwing each into a plurality of formed screw holes. On the right side of the mounting member 223, a plate-shaped first projecting portion 224 protrudes rearward, and on the left side of the mounting member 223, an upper wall portion 225A, a rear wall portion 225B, and left and right side wall portions 225C. A three-dimensional second projecting portion 225 projects rearward.

The first projecting portion 224 projects rearward from a lower position than the upper wall portion 225A of the second projecting portion 225, and the sphere tank forming portion 201 is arranged on the upper side thereof. In addition, the first guide path forming portion 202 is arranged on the rear side of the rear wall portion 225B of the second projecting portion 225, and the board mounting frame 211 for mounting the terminal board 210 is mounted on the upper side thereof. ing. The substrate mounting frame 211 is mounted from the rear side to the mounting hole H6 formed in the upper portion while the locking piece 212 projecting downward from the lower side is inserted into the locking hole 213 formed in the rear wall portion 225B. It is attached to the mounting member 223 by screwing the threaded member N6 into a threaded hole formed in the mounting member 223 .

Thus, the mounting member 223 is formed to cover the upper side of the game board 2 by having the first projecting portion 224 and the second projecting portion 225 projecting backward. Therefore, game balls supplied to the ball tank forming portion 201 from above the game islands are prevented from entering the game board 2 . That is, the mounting member 223 functions as a protective cover for the game board 2. As shown in FIG.

The first passage forming body 203 includes a plurality of screw members N11 to N14 attached to the plurality of mounting holes H11 to H14 from the rear side and a screw member N15 attached to the mounting hole H15 from the upper side. They are attached to the attachment member 223 by screwing into the screw holes. The screw member N12 attached to the mounting hole H12 also serves as a screw member for attaching the ground wire 226 for removing the electricity charged in the first passage forming member 203 to the first passage forming member 203. A first cover body 310, a second cover body 320, and a third cover body 330, which will be described later, are attached to the upper portion of the first passage forming body 203. As shown in FIG. The third cover body 330 is attached to the first passage forming body 203 by screwing a screw member N16 attached to the mounting hole H16 from above into a screw hole formed in the rear wall of the first passage forming body 203. there is

As shown in the enlarged view of FIG. 8, the threaded members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16 include a male threaded portion NS and a head portion NH. It is a flanged screw in which a flange part F as a locking part is integrally formed on the bearing surface of the screw, and by increasing the contact area of the bearing surface and increasing the frictional force, it is difficult to loosen compared to the screw members N3 to N6. It is considered as a screw member.

For example, the diameter L1 of the male screw portion NS of each screw member N1 to N6, N11 to N16 is approximately 1 to 3 mm, the diameter L2 of the head NH is approximately 4 to 7 mm, and the diameter L3 of the flange portion F is approximately 4 to 7 mm. 8 to 10 mm longer than the diameter L2.

The sizes and types of the screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16 are arbitrary, and the dimensions of the diameters L1 to L3 are not limited to those described above. The screw members N1, N2, N11 to N16, which are flanged screws, are screw members integrally formed with a flange portion F (washer). may be attached to the screw member, and the flange portion F and the washer constitute the locking portion of the present invention. Further, the screw member includes a member such as a screw or a bolt that separates from the attached portion when loosened. In addition, the locking portion includes a locking portion for the head NH formed unevenly on the back surface of the head NH and the flange portion F (washer), an adhesive, and the like.

As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the first passage formation body 203 needs to receive and store the game balls supplied from above the game island in the ball tank formation portion 201, and the first guide passage It is formed in a concave shape with an open upper surface so that clogging of balls is unlikely to occur in the case of clogging of balls, and clogging of balls can be easily eliminated in the event that clogging occurs.

In addition, a first cover body 310 and a second cover body 320 cover the upper surface of the portion where the game balls accumulated in the ball tank forming portion 201 in the vertical direction flow into the first guide passage forming portion 202. In addition, the third cover body 330 is arranged so as to cover the upper surface of the portion where the ball flows from the first guide path forming portion 202 to the second guide path forming portion 204, so that the game ball is rectified. However, although a part of the top opening of the first passage forming body 203 is covered with the first cover body 310, the second cover body 320 and the third cover body 330, the sphere tank forming part 201 and the uncovered area 350 ( 27) is open.

On the other hand, in the vicinity of the periphery of the first passage forming body 203, a plurality of screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16 attached to the gaming machine frame 3 and the attachment member 223 are arranged. In addition, above the pachinko machine 1 fixed to the game island, screw members (not shown) for assembling the building blocks constituting the game island, and various devices (for example, A large number of screw members (not shown) for attaching the replenishing device 150, etc., to the frame or the like, and a plurality of screw members for assembling a plurality of members constituting the case bodies of various devices are arranged.

If these screw members are loosened and fall off due to vibration or shock generated in the game island or the pachinko game machine 1, they will roll due to the vibration or shock or the opening and closing of the game machine frame 3, and the ball tank forming part 201 or the first screw member will roll. There is a possibility that they fall inside from the non-covered area 350 of the guide passage forming part 202 and mix into the guide passage of the game ball. In particular, the replenishment device 150 and the like are arranged in the vicinity directly above the ball tank forming section 201 as shown in FIGS. , or when the game machine frame 3 is opened or closed, the replenishment device 150 is likely to vibrate, so a screw member ( (not shown), or when a plurality of screw members for assembling a plurality of members constituting the case body 150B of the replenishment device 150 are loosened due to vibration and fall off, the inside of the sphere tank forming portion 201 or the first guide passage forming portion 202 very likely to fall.

Then, when the screw member drops into the ball tank forming portion 201 or the first guide passage forming portion 202, it may move toward the payout device 200 side as the game ball flows down, and finally enter the payout device 200. When the screw member enters the payout device 200 in this way, the sprocket or the switching valve may be damaged by the screw member, or the payout motor may be damaged due to the load caused by the ball clogging, or the screw member may be damaged by the player along with the game ball. There is a risk that the player will be paid out immediately, giving the player a sense of discomfort or distrust.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, as described below, the screw member that has fallen into the first guide passage forming portion 202 mixes with the dispensing device 200 and damages or breaks down the dispensing device 200, or the screw member is broken together with the game ball. Various measures have been taken to suppress the payout to the player.

(First passage forming body 203)
Next, the first passage forming body 203 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 to 16. FIG. 10, (A) is a plan view showing the first passage forming body, and (B) is a rear view showing the first passage forming body. 11, (A) is a sectional view taken along line AA in FIG. 10A, (B) is a sectional view taken along line BB in FIG. 10A, and (C) is a sectional view taken along line CC in FIG. 10A. It is a diagram. 12, (A) is a plan view showing the first guide passage forming portion, and (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along line DD of (A). 13, (A) is a plan view showing the first cover body, (B) is a sectional view taken along line EE of (A), and (C) is a sectional view taken along line FF of (A). 14, (A) is a plan view showing the second cover body, (B) is a GG sectional view of (A), and (C) is a HH sectional view of (A). 15, (A) is a plan view showing the third cover body, (B) is a sectional view taken along line II in (A), (C) is a sectional view taken along line JJ in (A), and (D) is a third cover member. 3 is a perspective view showing a cover body, and (E) is a perspective view showing a ball stopper member. 16, (A) is a vertical cross-sectional view showing the first guide passage forming portion showing the state in which the ball stopper member is in the first state, and (B) is a first guide passage showing the state in which the ball stopper member is in the second state. It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view which shows a guidance passage formation part.

As shown in FIGS. 10 to 12, the first passage forming body 203 is made of a conductive synthetic resin material, and has a bottom wall portion 203A and a vertical wall portion 203B erected on the periphery of the bottom wall portion 203A. is formed in a concave shape or a concave groove shape with an opening, and has a ball tank forming portion 201 arranged on the right side and a first guiding passage forming portion 202 arranged on the left side. The sphere tank forming portion 201 is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape in a plan view, and the first guide passage forming portion 202 is formed by an upstream portion extending obliquely rearward from the left side of the sphere tank forming portion 201 and a downstream portion extending in the left-right direction. Become. The longitudinal dimension of the ball tank forming portion 201 is longer than the longitudinal dimension of the first guide passage forming portion 202, so that more game balls than the first guide passage forming portion 202 can be stored. It is Further, since the bottom wall portion 203A is formed so as to gradually incline downward from the left side of the sphere tank forming portion 201 toward the right side of the first guide passage forming portion 202, The game ball naturally flows down toward the ball tank formation part 201 and the first guide passage formation part 202 to the left.

A mounting piece 261 facing in the vertical direction is projected from the outer surface of the right standing wall portion 203B of the ball tank forming portion 201, and mounting holes H11 and H12 facing in the front-rear direction are formed in the upper and lower sides of the mounting piece 261. . A mounting piece 265 projects from the rear side of the mounting piece 261, and the mounting piece 265 is formed with a mounting hole H15 facing in the vertical direction. A mounting piece 262 facing in the vertical direction is projected from the outer surface of the left standing wall portion 203B of the first guiding passage forming portion 202, and a mounting hole H14 facing in the front-rear direction is formed in the mounting piece 262. A horizontal wall portion 264 protrudes forward from the outer surface of the front vertical wall portion 203B in the upstream portion of the first guiding passage forming portion 202 . A mounting piece 263 is erected on the front side of the horizontal wall portion 264, and the mounting piece 263 is formed with a mounting hole H13 facing in the front-rear direction.

The first passage forming body 203 is attached to the gaming machine frame 3 by screwing a plurality of screw members N11 to N15 attached to the attachment holes H11 to H15 into screw holes formed in the attachment member 223. As shown in FIG. A concave portion 280 having a substantially square shape in a plan view is formed on the upper surface of the horizontal wall portion 264 at a position near the rear of the mounting piece 263 .

As shown in FIGS. 11 and 12, hole portions 270A and 270B are formed at the corners of the bottom wall portion 203A in the upstream portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202 and the rear vertical wall portion 203B ( See FIG. 11(A)). A plurality of holes 271A to 271H are formed downstream of the holes 271A and 271B at approximately the central position in the front-rear direction of the bottom wall 203A on the downstream side (left side) of the holes 271A and 271B. In addition, a communication hole 272 is formed through the bottom wall portion 203A at the downstream end portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202 to drop the game ball into the second guide passage forming portion 204 below. .

A meandering portion 273 is formed in the middle of the first guide passage forming portion 202, and causes the game ball to meander in the front-rear direction and flow down toward the left side. is formed at a position corresponding to the meandering portion 273 . By providing such a meandering portion 273, the ball pressure due to the succeeding ball is prevented from increasing.

In addition, the distance L10 between the front and rear vertical wall portions 203B and 203B lower portions of the first guide passage forming portion 202 is longer than the diameter 2R (about 11 mm) of the game ball and twice the diameter 2R (about 22 mm). (11 mm<L10<22 mm). That is, the first guide path forming portion 202 is formed so as to be able to guide the game balls in one row toward the downstream side.

Since the longitudinal dimension L11 of the holes 271A to 271H excluding the holes 271A and 271B is slightly longer than the diameter L2 of the heads NH of the screw members N3 to N6 (L11>L2), as will be described later, the screw members N3 to Even if N6 enters the first guide passage forming portion 202, the screw members N3 to N6 can drop from the holes 271A to 271H. In addition, since the hole 271H formed on the most downstream side has the longest lateral dimension L12 (dimension in the downstream direction of the game ball) compared to the other holes 271A to 271G, the screw members N3 to N6 are connected to the communication hole 272. can be reliably dropped outside the first guide passage forming portion 202 before reaching the .

In other words, these holes 271A to 271H constitute specific restricting portions for restricting movement of the screw members N3 to N6 that have fallen into the first guiding passage forming portion 202 toward the dispensing device 200. As shown in FIG. It should be noted that dirt and dust other than the threaded member, or any other member can fall from these plurality of holes 271A to 271H.

(First cover body 310)
As shown in FIGS. 13A to 13C, the first cover body 310 extends along the upper edge of the standing wall portion 203B on the front side of the ball tank forming portion 201, and the upper end of the standing wall portion 203B extends. A mounting portion 311 having a downward U-shape in cross section that can be fitted from above, a vertical wall portion 312 extending from the right side of the mounting portion 311 toward the rear side, and a right side from the lower portion of the vertical wall portion 312 (forming a ball tank). 201 side), a cover portion 314 extending from the lower portion of the vertical wall portion 312 toward the left side (first guide passage forming portion 202 side), and an attachment A plurality of engaging portions 315A to 315D elastically deformable are mainly formed on the front side of the portion 311 and the front and rear sides of the cover portion 314. As shown in FIG.

The first cover body 310 configured in this manner is configured such that the mounting portion 311 is attached to the sphere tank forming portion 201 while the vertical wall portion 312 is arranged near the boundary between the sphere tank forming portion 201 and the first guide passage forming portion 202 . By fitting the upper end of the front standing wall portion 203B from above, the plurality of locking portions 315A to 315D are elastically locked to the locked portion 317 (see FIG. 18) formed on the outer surface of the standing wall portion 203B. By doing so, it is attached to the first passage forming body 203 . In the attached state, the ball holding portion 313 is arranged to cover a portion of the downstream side of the ball tank forming portion 201 from above, and the cover portion 314 is arranged to cover a portion of the upstream side of the first guide passage forming portion 202. The upper surface of the cover portion 314 is arranged so as to be slightly downward toward the first guide passage forming portion 202 (see FIG. 9).

When the first cover body 310 is attached to the first passage forming body 203, the ball holding part 313 is arranged on the ball tank forming part 201 side, so that the ball tank forming part 201 is moved from the game island (not shown). Even when the supplied game balls are stored so as to pile up in the vertical direction, the game balls are rectified by being pressed downward by the ball pressing portion 313 when flowing down to the first guide passage forming portion 202 side. It is designed to be

In the cover portion 314, long holes 316A to 316C extending in the left-right direction and having the shape of a horizontally long rectangle in a plan view are formed vertically through the cover portion 314 while being arranged in parallel rows. Each of the long holes 316A-316C has the same longitudinal dimension L21, and the longitudinal dimension L21 is shorter than the diameter 2R of the game ball, and the heads of the screw members N1-N6 and N11-N16 mentioned above. It is shorter than the diameter L2 of NH (L21<2R, L21<L2). In other words, the long holes 316A-316C are formed in a size that prevents the game balls and screw members N1-N6, N11-N16 from falling. Reinforcing ribs hang down from the peripheries of the long holes 316A to 316C on the lower surface of the cover portion 314. As shown in FIG.

In addition, since the long holes 316A to 316C are extended along the flowing direction of the game ball, as shown in FIGS. In this case, the game ball P can move in the downstream direction (left side).

(Second cover body 320)
As shown in FIGS. 14A to 14C, the second cover body 320 includes a plate-like cover portion 324 formed along the upstream portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202, and a cover portion 324 and a plurality of locking portions 325A and 325B which are elastically deformable. In the close state, the plurality of locking portions 325A and 325B are elastically locked to the locked portion 317 (see FIG. 20) formed on the outer surface of the standing wall portion 302B, so that the first passage forming body 203 Mounted on. In the attached state, the cover portion 324 covers a part of the upstream side of the first guide passage forming portion 202 from above, and is arranged so as to incline downward toward the flowing direction of the game ball (FIG. 9). reference).

On the upper surface of the cover portion 324, recessed grooves 326A to 326C extending in the left-right direction are formed in rows. The concave grooves 326A-326C have different front-to-rear dimensions L22A-L22C, but are each shorter than the diameter 2R of the game ball (L22A-L22C<2R). The longitudinal dimension L22B of the central groove 326B, which has the longest longitudinal dimension, is longer than the diameter L2 of the head NH of the screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16 (L22B>L2). In other words, the recessed groove 326B is formed in a size that cannot accommodate game balls and that can accommodate the screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16. Further, the front-rear dimension L22B of the groove 326B is longer than the front-rear dimension L21 of the long holes 316A to 316C of the cover portion 314 (L22B>L21).

In addition, since the front-rear dimension L22A of the recessed groove 326A and the front-rear dimension L22C of the recessed groove 326C are longer than the diameter L1 of the male screw portion NS of the screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16 (L22B>L1, L22C>L1 ), and is sized to accommodate at least the externally threaded portion NS.

In addition, since the concave grooves 326A to 326C extend along the flowing direction of the game ball and are arranged so as to incline downward toward the flowing direction of the game ball, FIGS. 2, when the game ball P falls to the upper part of the recessed grooves 326A to 326C, the game ball P is guided in the flowing direction (left side).

(Third cover body 330)
As shown in FIGS. 15A to 15C and 16, the third cover body 330 includes a plate-like cover portion 334 formed along the downstream portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202. A plurality of locking portions 335A to 335D elastically deformable formed on the front and rear sides of the left end of the cover portion 334 and a screw member N15 protruding between the locking portions 335C and 335D on the rear surface are attached from above. A mounting portion 331 having a hole H15 formed thereon and a ball stopper member 340 provided at the left end of the upper surface of the cover portion 334. It is elastically locked to a locked portion 317 (see FIG. 20) formed on the outer surface of the portion 302B, and the screw member N15 attached to the mounting hole H15 is screwed into the screw hole provided on the outer surface of the standing wall portion 203B. It is attached to the first passage forming body 203 by inserting it. In the attached state, the cover portion 334 covers the downstream portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202 from above, and is arranged so as to be inclined downward toward the downstream direction of the game ball (see FIG. 9).

The cover portion 334 extends obliquely upward from the left side to the right side, and a concave portion 336 having a predetermined depth extends from the right end portion of the upper surface toward the left side. Since the right part reaches the meandering part 273 , it is formed corresponding to the shape of the meandering part 273 . At a position corresponding to the concave portion 336, a horizontally long U-shaped slit 337 is formed in plan view, thereby forming a rectifying plate 338 whose left end side is elastically deformable so as to swing vertically. At the right end, an inclined plate portion 339 inclined downward toward the right side is formed, so that the game balls P stacked up and down are guided toward the bottom wall portion 203A and leveled. (See Fig. 16).

The front-rear dimension L23 of the recess 336 is longer than the diameter 2R of the game ball, and longer than the diameter L2 of the head NH of the screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16 (L23 >2R, L23>L2). That is, the recessed portion 336 is formed to have a size capable of accommodating the game ball P and the heads NH of the screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16. Further, the front-rear dimension L23 of the recess 336 is longer than the front-rear dimension L22B of the recessed groove 326B of the cover portion 324 (L23>L22B).

In addition, since the concave portion 336 extends along the flowing direction of the game ball and is arranged so as to incline downward toward the flowing direction of the game ball, as shown in FIG. When the game ball P falls on the upper part of 336, the game ball P is guided toward the flowing direction (left side).

In addition, since the longitudinal dimension L24 of the slit 337 is shorter than the diameter L2 of the head NH of the screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16 (L24<L2), the screw members N1 to N6 and N11 ˜N16 do not drop from the slit 337.

The ball stopper member 340 includes a plate-like front wall portion 341A having a substantially triangular shape when viewed from the rear, a rear wall portion 341B arranged on the rear side of the front wall portion 341A, and the front wall portion 341A and the rear wall portion 341B. It is composed of a rotating portion 341 having a connected left wall portion 341C, a projecting wall portion 341D projecting from the upper end of the left wall portion 341C, and a cylindrical shaft portion 342 facing in the front-rear direction. Bearing portions 343A and 343B are erected on the left side of the upper surface of the cover portion 334 to rotatably support the front and rear ends of the shaft portion 342 . A slit 344 is formed through the right side of the bearing portion 343A in the cover portion 334 so that the front wall portion 341A can be inserted therethrough.

As shown in FIG. 16 , when the third cover body 330 is attached to the first passage formation body 203 , the downstream portion of the first guide passage formation portion 202 is covered by the cover portion 324 . Since the cover portion 324 is arranged to be inclined downward toward the bottom wall portion 203A toward the downstream side (left side), the game balls P stacked up and down in the first guide passage forming portion 202 are covered with the cover portion 324. While flowing down, it is leveled, and finally it is made possible to flow out one by one from the communication hole 272. - 特許庁In particular, the straightening plate 338 is elastically deformable when a game ball comes into contact with it, so that it smoothes (rectifies) the game ball so as to press it downward to the extent that ball clogging does not occur.

(Ball stop member 340)
As shown in FIG. 16A, the ball stopper member 340 is rotatable between an upright position in which the rotating portion 341 stands up and a tilted position in which the rotating portion 341 tilts to the right. is located in the standing position, the front wall portion 341A deviates upward from the slit 344 to allow the game ball of the first guide passage forming portion 202 to flow down to the second guide passage forming portion 204; The portion 341 is positioned at the tilted position, the front wall portion 341A is inserted into the slit 344 and can come into contact with the game ball, and the game ball in the first guide passage formation portion 202 cannot flow down to the second guide passage formation portion 204 (or difficult), that is, the ball-stopped state.

By setting the ball stop member 340 to the second state in this way, it is possible to restrict the entry of the game ball into the second guide passage formation portion 204, so that the game inside the second guide passage formation portion 204 in this state It is possible to extract the ball and remove the dispensing device 200 for inspection or replacement.

Further, as shown in FIG. 16A, when the ball stopper member 340 is in the first state, the right side of the rotating portion 341 is opened and consists of a front wall portion 341A, a rear wall portion 341B, and a left wall portion 341C. The space surrounded by the substantially U-shaped wall in plan view functions as a retaining portion in which the screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16 can be retained as described later. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 16B, when the ball stop member 340 is in the second state, the rotating portion 341 is tilted, but the protruding wall portion 341D is positioned in an upright state so as to cross the passage. Therefore, as will be described later, the screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16 can be retained on the right side of the projecting wall portion 341D.

(Terminal board 210)
Next, the terminal board 210 will be described based on FIG. 17 with reference to FIG. 17, (A) is a perspective view showing a board mounting frame to which a terminal board is mounted, (B) is a KK section of (A), and (C) is a LL section of (B). .

As shown in FIGS. 8 and 17, the terminal board 210 has a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the rear, and has a cable connecting portion (not shown) to which a signal line cable (not shown) connected to the main board 11 or the like is detachable on the back. ) and a mounting member 232 provided with a plurality of connection holes 231 for connecting a plurality of cables C (see FIG. 3) connected to an external device such as a hall computer. Connection pinches (not shown) for pinching the ends of the cables C are provided inside the mounting member 232 at positions corresponding to the connection holes 231 . A spring (not shown) is provided for biasing the connection pinch in the direction of closing it, that is, in the direction of clamping the tip of the cable C. As shown in FIG. The mounting member 232 is provided with a plurality of operation portions 233 for opening each connection pinch (not shown) against the biasing force of a spring (not shown).

The number of cables C that can be connected to the plurality of connection holes 231 of the terminal board 210 as the first board provided above the first guide path forming part 202 is set to the first number (for example, 20). On the other hand, each signal line is also connected to a second board such as the main board 11 and the effect control board 12 provided below the first guide path forming portion 202, but the number of lines is less than the first number. It is set to the number (for example, 10).

A plurality of the operation portions 233 are provided corresponding to the respective connection holes 231, and have a substantially hook-like shape when viewed from the side, and are swung in the front-rear direction with the base end thereof as the swing axis. When opening the connection pinch (not shown), the operation portion 233 is pushed upward or downward to swing the operation portion 233, thereby releasing the connection pinch (not shown). When the tip of the cable C is inserted into the connection hole portion 231 with the connection pinch opened and the pressing operation of the operation portion 233 is stopped, the connection pinch is closed by the biasing force of the spring (not shown). Cable C comes to be held. The operation portions 233 arranged in the left-right direction have different shapes alternately in the left-right direction so that when a predetermined operation portion 233 is pressed, the adjacent operation portions 233 do not interfere with the pressing operation. there is

The substrate mounting frame 211 is mounted from the rear side to the mounting hole H6 formed in the upper portion while the locking piece 212 projecting downward from the lower side is inserted into the locking hole 213 formed in the rear wall portion 225B. It is attached to the mounting member 223 by screwing the threaded member N6 into a threaded hole formed in the mounting member 223 . Further, a horizontally long rectangular opening 234 is formed in the board mounting frame 211 .

On the inner surface of the substrate mounting frame 211, a plurality of restricting portions 235 that restrict the forward movement of the terminal substrate 210 by engaging with the periphery of the terminal substrate 210 inserted from the front side, and the restricting portions 235 prevent the terminal substrate 210 from moving forward. a plurality of locking portions 236 that can be elastically locked from the front side to the peripheral edge of the terminal substrate 210 whose movement is restricted; have. Therefore, the terminal board 210 is inserted from the front side of the board mounting frame 211, and is elastically locked by the locking parts 236 in a state where forward movement is restricted by the plurality of restricting parts 235, thereby mounting the board. It is attached to the frame 211 . That is, the terminal board 210 is attached to the board mounting frame 211 by using a plurality of restricting portions 235 and locking portions 236 as mounting means different from screw members (using a mounting method different from the mounting method using screw members). Mounted.

Since the terminal board 210 is formed with a plurality of connection holes 231 to which the cables C can be connected, during wiring work for connecting a plurality of cables C to the connection holes 231, an operation portion 233 corresponding to each cable C can be operated. need to operate. In addition, when the pachinko machine 1 is fixed to the game island and the game machine frame 3 is opened for inspection by a game hall clerk or the like, the cable C hanging down from the upper part of the game island is attached to the outer frame. It may be pulled around in front of 60 and tension may be applied to the connection. In other words, since the terminal board 210 is likely to be subjected to a load on the mounting portion, if it is attached to the board mounting frame 211 or the mounting member 223 with a screw member, the screw member becomes loose and easily comes off. ing.

In addition, when the terminal board 210 is attached to the board mounting frame 211, the connection hole portion 231 and the operating portion 233 of the terminal board 210 face the rear side through the opening 234 (see FIG. 17A). ). Further, since the plurality of operation portions 233 protrude substantially horizontally toward the rear, the screw members N3 to N6 can be held by the plurality of operation portions 233 arranged side by side as described later. A recess 242 is formed between the lower portion of the terminal board 210 and the front portion of the board mounting frame 211 to accommodate the screw members N3 to N6.

(Mounting state of screw members N1 to N16)
Next, the mounting state of the screw members N1 to N16 will be described with reference to FIGS. 18 to 21. FIG. FIG. 18 is a perspective view showing a state where the periphery of the ball tank portion on the back surface of the game frame is seen obliquely from behind. 19, (A) is a plan view showing the periphery of the ball tank portion on the back of the game frame, and (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along line MM of (A). FIG. 20 is a perspective view showing a state in which the periphery of the first guide passage forming portion on the back surface of the game frame is seen obliquely from behind. FIG. 21 is a plan view showing the periphery of the first guide passage forming portion on the back side of the game frame. 22, (A) is a sectional view taken along line NN of FIG. 21, (B) is a view showing the rotating state of the screw member, and (C) is a sectional view taken along line OO of FIG. 23, (A) is a sectional view taken along line PP of FIG. 21, and (B) is a sectional view taken along line QQ of FIG. 24 is a cross-sectional view taken along line RR of FIG. 21. FIG. 25 is a cross-sectional view taken along line SS of FIG. 21. FIG. FIG. 26 shows (A) the retained state of the screw member when the ball stopper is in the first state, (B) is a TT sectional view of (A), and (C) is the ball stopper in the second state. (D) is a UU cross-sectional view of (C). FIG. 27 is a vertical cross-sectional view of the first guide passage forming portion showing movement of the screw member. FIG. 28 is a vertical cross-sectional view of the first guide passage forming portion showing the moving state of the game ball on the cover portion.

As shown in FIGS. 9, 18 and 19(A), screw members N1 to N1 for attaching the mounting member 223 to the metal plate 222 are provided on the sphere tank forming portion 201 and its periphery on the back surface of the frame 3 for the gaming machine. N2 and screw members N11, N12 and N15 for mounting the first passage forming body 203 to the mounting member 223 are mounted.

Specifically, the screw members N1 and N2 are attached forward from the back side at a position away from the sphere tank forming portion 201 to the right and below the upper edge of the standing wall portion 203B of the sphere tank forming portion 201. Therefore, even if the screw members N1 and N2 are loosened and fall backward due to vibration or shock generated in the pachinko game machine 1, the possibility of falling into the ball tank forming portion 201 as shown in FIG. 18 is extremely low. .

The screw members N11 and N12 are attached forward from the back side on the outer surface of the right standing wall portion 203B of the sphere tank forming portion 201 and at a position below the upper edge of the sphere tank forming portion 201. Even if the screw members N11 and N12 are loosened and fall backward due to vibration or shock generated in the pachinko game machine 1, the possibility of falling into the ball tank forming portion 201 as shown in FIG. 18 is extremely low.

The screw member N15 is attached downward from the upper side on the outer surface of the right standing wall portion 203B of the ball tank forming portion 201 and at a position below the upper edge of the ball tank forming portion 201. Even if the screw member N15 loosens due to vibration or shock generated in the machine 1 and falls upward, the possibility of falling into the sphere tank forming portion 201 as shown in FIG. 18 is extremely low.

Further, the screw members N1, N2, N11, N12 and N15 receive and store the game balls supplied from the replenishment device 150 from the circulation path above the game island and form a ball tank on which the load of many game balls is applied. Vibrations and impacts are likely to occur due to being arranged around the portion 201, so a screw member with a flange is used, which has a large contact area with the attached portion and is less prone to loosening.

Further, the screw members N1, N2, N11, N12, and N15 around the sphere tank forming portion 201 are located at positions where they are unlikely to fall into the sphere tank forming portion 201 even if they are loosened and fall off, that is, at the upper surface opening of the sphere tank forming portion 201. , the game balls supplied from the replenishing device 150 from the circulation path above the game islands are received and stored in the ball tank forming portion 201, which is open at the top. suppressed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 19B, the sphere tank forming portion 201 is close to (or may be in contact with) the upper surface side of the plate-like first projecting portion 224 projecting rearward from the mounting member 223. The gap L30 between the bottom wall portion 203A and the first projecting portion 224 is smaller than the diameter L1 of the male threaded portion NS of the screw member (L30<L1). It is almost impossible for the screw member to be caught between the wall portion 203A and the first projecting portion 224 and held in the vicinity of the sphere tank forming portion 201 .

Further, the gap L31 formed between the rear portion of the bottom wall portion 203A of the sphere tank forming portion 201 and the upper wall portion 220H of the cover body 220 is larger than the head portion L2 of the flanged screw member and the diameter L3 of the flange portion F. is also long (L3>L2), the flanged screw member is almost never caught in the gap L31 and held in the vicinity of the sphere tank forming portion 201. As shown in FIG.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 18 and 19B, if the screw member N15 slips out of the mounting hole H15 as the mounted portion and falls onto the upper wall portion 220H of the cover body 220, the upper wall portion 220H is Since the screw member N15 is inclined downward toward the back side, the dropped screw member N15 flows down either rearward or leftward, so that it is almost never held in the vicinity of the sphere tank forming portion 201.例文帳に追加Therefore, it is possible to prevent the dropped screw member N15 from entering each of the substrate cases 11A, 12A, 37A, and 91A provided below the sphere tank forming portion 201 and contacting the wiring of the substrate to cause disconnection or the like. .

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 9, 20 and 21A, screw members N3 to N5 for attaching the mounting member 223 to the metal plate 222 and the substrate A screw member N6 for mounting the mounting frame 211 to the mounting member 223, screw members N13 and N14 for mounting the first passage forming body 203 to the mounting member 223, A threaded member N16 for attaching to is attached.

Specifically, the screw members N3 to N6 are separated from the first guide passage forming portion 202 to the front side and are positioned above the upper end edge of the standing wall portion 203B of the first guide passage forming portion 202 toward the front from the rear side. In addition, the second projecting portion 225 of the mounting member 223 is arranged between the mounting position of each of the screw members N3 to N6 and the first guide passage forming portion 202, so that the screw member Although there is a certain distance from the mounting position of each of N3 to N6 to the first guide passage forming portion 202, the upper wall portion 225A of the second projecting portion 225 is inclined downward toward the back side, so the pachinko game machine 20, when the screw members N3 to N6 are loosened due to vibrations or shocks generated in 1 and fall off rearward, as shown in FIG. There is a high possibility that it will fall into the guide passage forming portion 202 .

As shown in FIGS. 20 to 22, the screw member N3 is formed in the mounting member 223 at a position forwardly away from the upstream portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202 and above the upper end edge of the standing wall portion 203B. is attached to the mounting hole H3. Further, at a position corresponding to the mounting hole H3 on the upper surface of the upper wall portion 225A, a recessed groove 227 for avoiding interference with the head portion NH when mounting the screw member N3 to the mounting hole H3 is formed in a straight line toward the rear. has been extended to The groove 227 is formed so that the width of the groove 227 tapers toward the rear and becomes shallower. The bottom surface of 227 is substantially horizontal (or slightly slanted downward toward the rear side).

Therefore, when the screw member N3 is loosened and falls out backward due to vibration or shock generated in the pachinko game machine 1, there is a high possibility that the screw member N3 falls into the concave groove 227 on the upper wall portion 225A of the second projecting portion 225 (Fig. 22(A)). In addition, the screw member N3 that has fallen into the groove 227 is likely to be guided to move rearward in a straight line when vibration or impact occurs. , the screw member N3 is less likely to move rearward than in the region other than the concave groove 227. In other words, the concave groove 227 constitutes a special restricting portion for restricting the screw member N3 moving toward the first guiding passage forming portion 202 from falling into the first guiding passage forming portion 202. As shown in FIG.

Here, all the screw members including the screw member N3 are composed of the head NH and the male threaded portion NS. In many cases, the screw member N3 is tilted in a state in which two points with the tip are in contact (see FIG. 22(A)), so that the tilted screw member N3 as shown in FIG. Occasionally, the head NH swings around the tip of the male threaded portion NS and changes direction. Therefore, if it falls on a flat surface other than the groove 227 on the upper surface of the upper wall portion 225A, or if it deviates from the rear end of the groove 227, it may move linearly backward, or the head may move backward. The NH may also move to turn left or right by rotating its head. That is, as shown by the arrow in FIG. 20, if it moves backward and bends to the right, there is a high possibility that it will fall onto the first cover body 310. There is a high possibility that it will fall on the second cover body 320, and if it moves backward and bends to the left, there is a high possibility that it will fall on the horizontal wall portion 264 in front of the first guide passage.

As shown in FIGS. 20 and 21, when the screw member N3 that has fallen out of the mounting hole H3 is guided to the rear end of the recessed groove 227 and then bent rearward to the right, the first cover body There is a high possibility of falling onto the cover portion 314 of 310 . As shown in FIG. 22A, when the screw member N3 drops onto the cover portion 314, the screw member N3 tilts so that the male threaded portion NS intersects the long holes 316A to 316C, or the male threaded portion NS falls. Although it is inserted into any one of the long holes 316A to 316C, the head NH is retained on the cover portion 314 without falling from the cover portion 314 into the first guide passage forming portion 202 by being locked without falling off. will do. In other words, the long holes 316A to 316C prevent the screw member N3 from dropping onto the first guide passage forming portion 202 onto the cover portion 314 provided so as to partially cover the upper surface of the first guide passage forming portion 202. It constitutes a predetermined limiter for limiting.

Also, as shown in FIGS. 20 and 21, when the groove 227 is guided to the rear end of the groove 227 and then linearly moved rearward, the cover portion 324 of the second cover body 320 or the first passage is formed. It is likely to fall on horizontal wall 264 of body 203 . As shown in FIG. 22(C), when the threaded member N3 falls onto the cover portion 324, the threaded member N3 tilts so that the male threaded portion NS intersects the grooves 326A to 326C. A portion of the head NH is accommodated in the recessed grooves 326A to 326C, so that the head portion NH stays on the cover portion 324 without falling from the cover portion 324 into the first guide passage forming portion 202 . In other words, the concave grooves 326A to 326C prevent the screw member N3 from falling onto the cover portion 324 provided to partially cover the upper surface of the first guide passage forming portion 202 from falling onto the first guide passage forming portion 202. It constitutes a predetermined limiter for limiting.

In addition, when falling onto the horizontal wall portion 264 of the first passage forming body 203 provided between the rear wall portion 225B of the second projecting portion 225 and the first guide passage forming portion 202, the horizontal wall portion 264 Stay in a state of leaning to. That is, the horizontal wall portion 264 side is arranged between the rear wall portion 225B and the first guide passage forming portion 202 below the upper edge of the upper wall portion 225A and the vertical wall portion 203B, so that the upper wall portion 225A, the vertical wall portion 203B and the horizontal wall portion 264 form a concave portion 290 with an open top, so that the liquid is accommodated and retained in the concave portion 290. As shown in FIG. That is, the recess 290 is provided between the mounting hole H3 around the first guide passage forming portion 202 and the first guide passage forming portion 202, and the screw member that has moved toward the first guide passage forming portion 202 It constitutes a special restricting portion for restricting N3 from falling into the first guide passage forming portion 202 .

As shown in FIGS. 20 and 21, in the first passage forming body 203, the screw member N13 is separated forward from the upstream portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202 and slightly above the upper edge of the standing wall portion 203B. It is attached to the attachment hole H13 formed in the attachment piece 263 which is the position. Therefore, when the screw member N13 is loosened and falls backward due to vibration or shock generated in the pachinko game machine 1, there is a possibility that the screw member N13 falls into the recess 280 formed near the rear side of the mounting hole H13 in the horizontal wall portion 264. high (see FIG. 23(A)). More specifically, the horizontal wall portion 264 is arranged between the mounting piece 263 and the first guide passage forming portion 202 below the upper edge of the upper wall portion 225A and the vertical wall portion 203B. A recess 280 smaller than the recess 290 is formed in the vicinity of the mounting hole H13 in the recess 290 opened upward by 225A, the standing wall portion 203B and the horizontal wall portion 264, so that the recess 280 is accommodated and stays in the recess 280. Become.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 20 and 23B, when the screw member N13 is loosened and falls backward due to vibration or shock generated in the pachinko game machine 1, the screw member N13 is arranged on the lower left side of the horizontal wall portion 264. It may drop and stay in the concave portion 214 provided near the right side of the board mounting frame 211 . That is, the recess 214 is provided between the mounting hole H13 around the first guide passage forming portion 202 and the first guide passage forming portion 202, and the screw member that has moved toward the first guide passage forming portion 202 It constitutes a special restricting portion for restricting N13 from falling into the first guide passage forming portion 202. As shown in FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 20 and 21, the screw member N4 is formed in the mounting member 223 at a position forwardly away from the downstream portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202 and above the upper end edge of the standing wall portion 203B. It is attached to the mounting hole H4. Therefore, when the screw member N4 is loosened and falls backward due to vibration or shock generated in the pachinko game machine 1, there is a high possibility that the screw member N4 falls onto the upper wall portion 225A of the second projecting portion 225 (see FIG. 24).

As shown in FIGS. 20, 21 and 24, the screw member N4 that has fallen out of the mounting hole H4 moves backward when it bends to the right, moves backward linearly, and moves backward. As shown in FIG. 24, in any of the cases where the board is turned to the right, it falls from the rear end of the upper wall portion 211H of the board mounting frame 211 from above the upper wall portion 225A. The screw member N4 dropped from the rear end of the upper wall portion 211H enters the inside through the opening 234 and stays in the concave portion 242 formed by the substrate mounting frame 211 and the terminal substrate 210, or stays in the substrate mounting frame. Although the male threaded portion NS is inserted into the recessed portion 243 formed between 211 and the standing wall portion 203B, the head portion NH may be retained by being locked without falling off. That is, the recessed portion 242 and the recessed portion 243 are provided between the mounting hole H4 around the first guide passage forming portion 202 and the first guide passage forming portion 202, and move toward the first guide passage forming portion 202. A special restricting portion for restricting the screw member N4 from falling into the first guide passage forming portion 202 is constructed.

Incidentally, as shown in FIG. 24, when the screw member N4 drops from the rear end of the upper wall portion 211H, the screw member N4 may be held on the plurality of operation portions 233. As shown in FIG. In addition, when the pachinko machine 1 is fixed to the game island, the plurality of cables C connected to the plurality of connection holes 231 hang down from the upper part of the game island (see FIG. 3). C may also prevent the screw member N4 from falling from the rear end of the upper wall portion 211H. That is, the operating portion 233 and the cable C are provided between the mounting hole H4 around the first guide passage forming portion 202 and the first guide passage forming portion 202, and move toward the first guiding passage forming portion 202. This constitutes a special restricting portion for restricting the falling of the threaded member N4 into the first guide passage forming portion 202. As shown in FIG.

Further, when the screw member N4 falls out of the mounting hole H4 and moves rearward so as to bend to the right, and then crosses the vertical wall portion 203B, the first cover body 203 is removed from the upper surface opening of the first guide passage forming portion 202. 310 , an uncovered region 350 provided between the second cover body 320 and the third cover body 330 , which is not covered by either the second cover body 320 or the third cover body 330 , to the first guide passage forming portion 202 . to fall. The screw member N4 that has fallen into the first guide passage forming portion 202 falls out from between the game balls while moving toward the downstream side as the game ball P flows down, and approaches the bottom wall portion 203A. It falls from one of the holes 271B to 271D formed at the position corresponding to the non-coated area 350 in the guide passage forming portion 202 and is discharged out of the first guide passage forming portion 202. FIG.

Further, even if it does not fall from any one of the holes 271B to 271D, it will eventually fall from one of the holes 271A to 271H and be discharged out of the first guide passage forming portion 202. FIG. In other words, the holes 271A to 271H constitute specific restricting portions for restricting movement of the screw member N4 that has fallen into the sphere tank forming portion 201 or the first guide passage forming portion 202 toward the dispensing device 200. As shown in FIG.

On the other hand, when the screw member N4 falls out of the mounting hole H4 and moves backward and bends to the left, and then crosses the standing wall portion 203B, the screw member N4 falls onto the concave portion 336 on the cover portion 334 of the third cover body 330. By dropping, it is accommodated and stays in the concave portion 336 without dropping from the cover portion 334 into the first guide passage forming portion 202 . In other words, the recessed portion 336 restricts the screw member N4 from dropping onto the first guide passage forming portion 202, which has fallen onto the cover portion 334 provided so as to partially cover the upper surface of the first guide passage forming portion 202. constitutes a predetermined limit part of

As shown in FIGS. 20 and 21, the screw member N6 is formed in the substrate mounting frame 211 at a position forwardly away from the downstream portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202 and above the upper end edge of the standing wall portion 203B. is attached to the mounting hole H6. Therefore, if the screw member N6 is loosened and falls backward due to vibration or shock generated in the pachinko game machine 1, there is a high possibility that it will fall onto the upper wall portion 211H of the board mounting frame 211 (see FIG. 25).

As shown in FIGS. 20, 21 and 25, the screw member N6 that has fallen out of the mounting hole H6 is guided by a plurality of ribs 211A extending rearward so as to move linearly rearward. After that, when it moves so as to bend to the right, as shown in FIG. As described with reference to FIG. 16, the cover part 334 covers the upper opening of the first guide passage forming part 202 so as to be inclined downward toward the downstream side (dispensing device 200 side). There is a high possibility that the screw member N6 that has fallen to a position in the vicinity of the upstream side of the ball stopper member 340 will move toward the downstream side.

As shown in FIG. 26, the screw member N6 that has moved downstream comes into contact with the ball stop member 340 provided at the downstream end (left end) of the cover portion 334, which is the lower inclined side, and Left side) is restricted to stay on the cover portion 334 .

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 26A and 26B, when the ball stop member 340 is in the first state, the right side of the rotating portion 341 is opened, and the front wall portion 341A and the rear wall portion 341B are opened. , the left wall portion 341C, and the screw member N6 can be retained in the space surrounded by the substantially U-shaped wall portion in plan view. be able to. On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 26(C) and 26(D), when the ball stopper member 340 is in the second state, the protruding wall portion 341D is positioned so as to cross the passage in an upright state, so that the screw member N6 is placed on the protruding wall. Since the screw member N6 can be retained on the right side of the portion 341D, the screw member N6 can be held without dropping from the cover portion 334. FIG.

In the second state, the projecting wall portion 341D is arranged so as to intersect the inclination direction, and the front and rear sides are open, so that the screw member N6 whose movement is restricted may drop backward or forward. On the other hand, in the first state, the front wall portion 341A, the rear wall portion 341B, and the left wall portion 341C cover the front wall portion 341A, the rear wall portion 341B, and the left wall portion 341C. It can be retained more reliably than in the second state in which the left wall portion 341C is positioned only on the left side. In other words, the ball stopper member 340 is provided on the side of the dispensing device 200 in the inclined direction of the cover portion 334, and constitutes a specific portion capable of causing the screw member N6 dropped onto the cover portion 334 to stay in the cover portion 334. is doing.

As shown in FIGS. 20 and 21, the threaded member N5 is separated from the downstream portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202 in the mounting member 223 to the front and right side, and is positioned above the upper end edge of the standing wall portion 203B. Although it is attached to the formed mounting hole H5, the first guide passage forming portion 202 is not arranged right behind the mounting hole H5, and the upper wall portion 225A of the second protruding portion 225 is also cut halfway. Therefore, if the screw member N5 loosens due to vibration or impact and falls out backward, it will drop onto the upper wall portion 225A of the second projecting portion 225, but before it reaches the first guide passage forming portion 202, There is a high possibility of dropping from the upper wall portion 225</b>A to the outside of the first guide passage forming portion 202 .

The screw member N16 is attached to an attachment hole H16 formed in the third cover body 330 on the rear side of the first guide passage forming portion 202 and below the upper edge of the standing wall portion 203B. Therefore, if the screw member N5 is loosened by vibration or impact and falls out backward, it is highly likely that it will fall outside the first guide passage forming portion 202 without falling into the first guide passage forming portion 202. .

(action/effect)
As described above, in the pachinko game machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. N3 to N6, etc. are loosened due to vibrations and impacts generated in the pachinko game machine 1 and fall off, and after moving backward on the upper wall portion 225A due to vibrations, impacts, opening and closing of the game machine frame 3, etc., the cover When it falls on the parts 314, 324, 334, the long holes 316A to 316C, the concave grooves 326A to 326C, the concave part 336 and the ball stop member 340 restrict the fall to the first guide passage forming part 202, Since there is a high possibility that the screws will remain on the cover portions 314, 324, 334 without falling from the cover portions 314, 324, 334 into the first guide passage forming portion 202, the screws that have fallen into the first guide passage forming portion 202 It is possible to prevent the member from moving and being mixed into the dispensing device 200 . In addition, since vertical wall portions are formed at the left (downstream) end portions of the long holes 316A to 316C and the grooves 326A to 326C, even if the screw member moves leftward, can be suitably prevented from falling.

Further, as shown in FIG. 28 , on the upper surface of the first guide passage forming portion 202 , the regions other than the uncovered region 350 are covered with the cover portions 314 , 324 and 334 , but the sphere tank forming portion 201 Even if the replenished game ball spills out and gets on the cover parts 314, 324 on the upstream side, the longitudinal dimensions of the long holes 316A to 316C and the concave grooves 326A to 326C are smaller than the diameter 2R of the game ball P. Since the space is also narrow, the game ball P rolls leftward and then falls from the left end of the cover portion 324 to the uncovered area 350 and is returned into the first guide path forming portion 202 .

Therefore, not only can the game ball that has landed on the cover portions 314 and 324 be returned into the first guide path forming portion 202, but also the game ball P can be retained in the long holes 316A to 316C and the concave grooves 326A to 326C. As a result, the space in which the falling screw member N stays is restricted, or it comes into contact with the staying game ball and falls from the uncovered area 350 into the first guide passage forming part 202. can be prevented.

In addition, when the game ball falls on the cover portion 334, it either flows down on the cover portion 334 toward the left side and is restricted by the ball stopper member 340, or falls outside the first guide passage forming portion 202. do.

In addition, in the long holes 316A to 316C as the first retaining portion and the concave grooves 326A to 326C as the second retaining portion, the concave groove 326B is provided at a position closer to the dispensing device 200 than the long holes 316A to 316C, A front-rear dimension L22B is larger than a front-rear dimension L22 of the long hole 316B (L22B>L21). By doing so, the screw member is more likely to be retained in the retaining portion as it approaches the dispensing device 200, so that the screw member dropped onto the cover portions 314 and 324 moves and falls into the first guide passage forming portion 202. can be prevented.

On the other hand, the screw members N3 to N6 that have fallen and stayed on the cover portions 314, 324, and 334 move due to vibration, impact, etc., and the non-covered portions provided between the cover portions 324 and 334 move. When it falls from the region 350 into the first guide passage forming portion 202, or after moving backward on the upper wall portion 225A like the screw member N4, it falls from the uncovered region 350 to the first guiding passage forming portion 202. Even if the game ball P falls directly inside the first guide passage forming portion 202, it falls out from between the game balls while moving toward the downstream side and approaches the bottom wall portion 203A. As a result, the screw member dropped into the first guide passage forming portion 202 moves to the dispensing device 200 because it falls from one of the holes 271A to 271H and is discharged outside the first guide passage forming portion 202. Mixing can be suppressed.

A plurality of holes 271A to 271H formed in the bottom wall portion 203A are formed from the midstream portion (near the meandering portion 273) to the downstream portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202. There is a region where no hole is formed between the holes 270A and 270B which are formed close to each other and the hole 271A which is the most upstream of the holes 271A to 271H. In this way, since a region in which a plurality of holes are not formed is formed in the upstream portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202, the game balls from the ball tank forming portion 201 flow down in a state of being stacked up and down. By doing so, it is possible to suitably prevent a decrease in the strength of the bottom wall portion 203A in the vicinity of the upstream portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202 to which ball pressure is applied.

In addition, by forming a region in which no holes are formed in the first guide passage forming portion 202 in this manner, the screw member dropped from the first guide passage forming portion 202 is formed in the rear wall portion of the cover body 220. Entry into the cover body 220 through the heat radiation hole 220B (see FIG. 6) or the like can be appropriately suppressed.

In addition, by providing the first cover body 310 and the second cover body 320 at positions corresponding to the regions where the holes are not formed in the first guide passage forming portion 202, the first guide passage forming portion 202 is provided with a screw member. can be suppressed from falling, and it is suppressed that the screw member that has fallen into the first guide passage forming portion 202 does not fall outside the first guide passage forming portion 202 and is mixed into the dispensing device 200. be able to.

In addition, the hole 271H, which is the largest among the plurality of holes 271A to 271H, is provided at the position closest to the dispensing device 200, so that the screw member can be preferably transferred from the hole 271H to the outside of the first guide passage forming portion 202. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the first guide passage forming portion 202 from entering the dispensing device 200 .

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 27, when a screw member falls into the first guide passage forming portion 202 from the ball tank forming portion 201 or the uncovered region 350, the game ball is are stacked vertically, the screw member is often located above the game ball, but the hole portion 271H is arranged downstream of the straightening plate 338 of the cover portion 334, that is, , Since the game ball is arranged in a position where the game ball is rectified vertically, the screw member easily falls into the hole 271H. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the first guide passage forming portion 202 from entering the dispensing device 200 .

Further, since at least some of the holes 271B to 271D among the plurality of holes 271B to 271H are provided at positions corresponding to the uncovered regions 350 in the first guide passage forming portion 202, the screw member is uncovered. Even if it enters the first guide passage forming portion 202 from the region 350, it can be dropped out of the first guide passage forming portion 202 through the holes 271B to 271D.

Furthermore, at least some of the holes 271E to 271H among the plurality of holes 271B to 271H are provided closer to the dispensing device 200 than the uncovered region 350 in the first guide passage forming portion 202, so that the above-described Even if the game ball that has fallen from the uncovered area 350 to the first guide passage forming part 202 does not reach the holes 271B to 271D, it moves downward while moving with the flow of the game ball and falls from the holes 271E to 271H. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the first guide passage forming portion 202 from entering the dispensing device 200 .

Further, as shown in FIGS. 22C, 23A, 23B, and 24, the screw members N3 to N6 that have moved toward the first guide passage forming portion 202 are moved toward the first guide passage forming portion. Recesses 280, 290, 214, 242, and 243 as special retention portions that can be retained before reaching 202 are below screw members N3 to N6 attached to attachment holes H3 to H6 as attachment portions. The screw members N3 to N6 provided in the mounting holes H3 to H6 but not retained in the recesses 280, 290, 214, 242, 243 can move toward the cover portions 314, 324, 334. , the screw members N3 to N6 detached from the mounting holes H3 to H6 can be prevented from falling into the first guide passage forming portion 202. As shown in FIG.

Further, since the depths of the recesses 280, 290, 214, 242, 243 are the depths at which the screw members N3 to N6 partially protrude when the screw members N3 to N6 are accommodated, the recesses 280, 290, The screw members N3 to N6 staying in 214, 242, 243 can be easily taken out.

In addition, the recesses 280, 290, 214, 242, and 243, the long holes 316A to 316C, the recessed grooves 326A to 326C, and the recess 336 restrict the falling screw member from falling into the first guide passage forming portion 202. Not only does it block (or hinder), but it is a retention part that can be retained outside the first guide path formation part 202, so that the screw member can be found when a store clerk or the like at the game parlor conducts an inspection or the like. Since it becomes possible to identify which screw member has come off, it becomes easier to take countermeasures against mixing of the screw member into the dispensing device 200 .

Further, the ball stopper member 340 as the specific portion has the rotating portion 341 positioned at the upright position, the front wall portion 341A deviating upward from the slit 344, and the game ball in the first guide passage forming portion 202 being guided to the second direction. A first state in which it is possible to flow down to the passage forming portion 204, the rotating portion 341 is positioned at the tilted position, the front wall portion 341A is inserted into the slit 344 and can come into contact with the game ball, and the first guiding passage forming portion 202 is opened. It is possible to change to a second state in which the game ball cannot flow down to the second guide passage forming part 204 (or difficult to flow down), and when the ball stopper member 340 is in the second state, it is in the first state. Since the screw member is more likely to stay than in the case of , it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the first guide passage forming portion 202 from entering the dispensing device 200 .

More specifically, the reason why the ball stopper member 340 is set to the second state is, as described above, when the game ball in the first guide passage or the second guide passage is pulled out, that is, when the game parlor clerk or the like operates the pachinko game machine. 1, the ball stop member 340 is put in the first state, while the pachinko game machine 1 is in operation, that is, when the game hall clerk or the like cannot monitor it. Therefore, it is possible to preferably prevent the screw member from entering the first guide passage forming portion 202 in such a state.

In addition, the sphere tank forming portion 201 is attached to the gaming machine frame 3 at a plurality of locations by screw members N11 to N14 having flange portions F as looseness preventing portions. The screw members N11 to N14 for attaching to the game machine frame 3 are arranged so as to fall outside the first guide path formation part 202 even if they are detached from the game machine frame 3. It is mounted below the upper edge of the vertical wall portion 203B of the tank forming portion 201 . Therefore, the screw members N11 to N14 for attaching the sphere tank forming part 201 are easily loosened due to vibration and the weight of the game ball. Even if the screw members N11 to N14 for attaching the first guide passage forming part 202 come off, they will fall outside the first guide passage forming part 202. can be prevented from being mixed into

Further, among the plurality of screw members for attaching the ball tank forming portion 201 and the first guide passage forming portion 202 to the game machine frame 3, a predetermined screw member (for example, the screw member N12) near the periphery of the pachinko game machine 1 ) is also used as a screw member for attaching the ground wire (for example, the ground wire 226), so that the number of screw members (the number of parts) can be reduced. It is possible to prevent the screw member from entering the dispensing device 200 . Incidentally, instead of the ground wire, a screw member for attaching a predetermined member other than the sphere tank forming portion 201 and the first guide passage forming portion 202 may also be used.

Further, the screw members N11 to N14 for attaching the ball tank forming part 201 to the game machine frame 3 are attached to the metal plate 222 for reinforcing the game machine frame 3, so that the ball tank forming part 201 can be firmly attached, and vibrations are less likely to occur, so loosening of the screw member can be suitably suppressed.

Further, the screw members N3 to N6 attached to the upper position of the first guide passage forming portion 202 in the game machine frame 3 are screw members having a head portion NH with a small diameter that does not have a flange portion F. Even if it falls into the first guide passage forming portion 202, it can be easily dropped from the holes 271A to 271H, so that the screw member can be prevented from entering the dispenser 200. FIG.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 19(B) and 27, in the area below the first guide passage forming portion 202 on the game board 2 detachable from the frame 3 for the game machine, the fallen screw member is placed backward. Alternatively, an inclined surface (for example, the upper wall portion 220H of the cover body 220) that can flow down to the dispensing device 200 side is provided with a gap from the first guide passage forming portion 202, so that the cover body 220 It is possible to prevent the screw member that has dropped on the upper wall portion 220H from jumping and being mixed into the first guide passage forming portion 202 again.

Also, although not shown, the substrate cases 11A, 12A, 37A, and 91A are provided so as not to protrude rearward from the rear wall portion of the cover body 220, and drop onto the upper wall portion 220H of the cover body 220. The screw members are guided so as to flow backward or toward the dispensing device 200 side, thereby preventing the screw members falling on the upper wall portion 220H from falling into the substrate cases 11A, 12A, 37A, and 91A arranged below. can be prevented.

In addition, the cover body 220 is provided so as to cover the image display device 5 provided on the back side of the game board 2, the production device having a movable body, and the production control board 12, so that the drive source of these is generated. A plurality of heat radiation holes 220B for releasing heat are formed in the upper part of the rear wall (see FIG. 6). It is preferably of a size that does not allow NH to be inserted. In addition, since there is a high possibility that screw members will fall from the upper holes 270A, 270B, and 271A to 271H of the upper wall portion 220H arranged directly below the first guide passage forming portion 202, the heat radiation hole 220B is Preferably, it is formed at least at positions not corresponding to the holes 270A, 270B, and 271A to 271H in the upper wall portion 220H, or formed at a portion other than the upper wall portion 220H (for example, the rear wall portion). By doing so, it is possible to prevent the falling screw member from falling into the cover body 220 and adversely affecting the image display device 5, the performance device having the movable body, the performance control board 12, and the like.

(Modification 1)
Next, Modification 1 of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 29A is a schematic rear view showing a cover portion as a modification, and FIG. 29B is a schematic rear view showing a state in which cables are wired so as to intersect the cover portion.

In the above-described embodiment, the guiding passage forming portion that forms the guiding passage for guiding the game balls of the ball tank forming portion 201 to the payout device 200 is the first ball tank forming portion extending to the left side so as to incline downward. It has a guiding passage forming portion 202 and a second guiding passage forming portion 204 extending downward from the lower left end portion of the first guiding passage forming portion 202. As shown in FIG. 16, the cover part 334 of the third cover body 330, which is provided so as to partially cover the upper surface, is provided with a ball stopper member 340 protruding upward from the upper surface of the left end. In the above, the configuration in which the screw member N moving to the left on the cover portion 334 can be received and retained has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the cover portion of Modification 1 Like 360, the left end portion 360R of the cover portion 360 may be formed in an R shape that curves toward the second guide passage forming portion 204 below.

By doing so, the game ball P and the screw member N that have fallen onto the cover portion 360 do not remain on the cover portion 360 when moving toward the left end side, and the first guide passage forming portion 202 Since the screw member N directly falls outside the first guide passage forming portion 202 from the left end portion of the screw member N, it is possible to prevent the screw member N from being mixed into the dispensing device 200 .

Further, as shown in FIG. 29B, in the cover portion 360 in which a recess 361 capable of retaining the screw member N is formed in the upper surface thereof, a second A cable CH may be provided so as to intersect the flowing direction of the game ball in the 1 guide passage forming portion 202 .

By doing so, the movement of the screw member N and the game ball P, which are retained in the recessed portion 361 but may move due to the inclination, can be restricted by the cable C so as to be retained.

(description of variations and applications)
For example, in the above-described embodiment, screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16 for attaching the mounting member 223 and the first passage forming body 203 to the game machine frame 3 of the pachinko game machine 1, Screw members (not shown) attached to other parts of the game machine 1, screw members (not shown) for assembling the building blocks that make up the game island, and various devices (for example, , replenishment device 150, etc.) and the like have been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. All screw members such as screw members that have remained in the pachinko game machine 1 for some reason such as forgetting to install them during maintenance at the place can be targeted, but at least they have been installed in the pachinko game machine 1 in advance. It is preferable that the screw member can be prevented from being mixed into the dispensing device 200 .

Further, in the above-described embodiment, as a storage portion capable of storing game media, the sphere tank forming portion 201 formed in a box-like shape with an open upper surface by the bottom wall portion 203A and the vertical wall portion B is applied. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as long as the storage portion can store game balls, the front-rear dimension is larger than the front-rear dimension of the first guide passage-forming portion 202 like the ball tank-forming portion 201 described above. It does not have to be long, and the front-to-rear dimension may be substantially the same as or shorter than that of the first guide passage forming portion 202 . In addition, as long as the game balls supplied from the supply device 150 can be received, the upper surface does not necessarily have to be open.

In the above-described embodiment, the payout device 200 capable of paying out game balls with a rotatable sprocket is applied as a payout unit capable of paying out game media, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, it may be a payout device that can pay out game balls by members other than sprockets.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the bottom wall portion 203A and the vertical wall portion 203B serve as the guide passage forming portion having an open upper surface and forming a guide passage for guiding the game media in the storage portion to the payout portion. Although the configuration in which the groove-shaped first guide passage forming portion 202 is applied is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the guide is composed of a tubular member having an opening formed in a part of the upper surface. It may be a passage forming portion, and the shape, size, and the like can be variously changed. In addition, the width dimension (front-rear dimension) of the ball tank forming part 201 may be substantially the same or larger, and the game balls may be guided so as to flow down in a plurality of rows.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the ball tank forming portion 201 as a storage portion capable of storing game balls and the first guide passage whose upper surface is open and which guides the game balls in the ball tank forming portion 201 to the payout device 200 are provided. Although the form in which the first guiding passage forming portion 202 to be formed is integrally formed is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the sphere tank forming portion 201 and the first guiding passage forming portion 202 are separately formed. The members may be integrally formed by assembling them with screw members or the like. In this case, the threaded member for assembling the sphere tank forming portion 201 and the first guide passage forming portion 202 is also subject to the threaded member of the present invention.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the form in which the screw member can enter from the top opening of the first guide passage forming portion 202 was illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first guide passage forming portion 202 The screw member may enter through a hole or a notch formed on the vertical wall side. In addition, when a screw member may be mixed in the second guide passage forming portion 204, a predetermined restricting portion for restricting the fall of the screw member to the second guide passage forming portion 204, or the second guide passage forming portion 204 A specific restricting portion or the like for restricting the movement of the dropped screw member to the dispenser 200 may be provided.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the first cover body 310, the second cover body 320, and the third cover body 330 are applied as the cover parts provided so as to partially cover the upper surface of the first guide passage forming part 202. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the entire area of the upper surface of the first guide passage forming portion 202 may be covered with the cover portion.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the cover portion that covers a partial region of the upper surface of the first guide passage forming portion 202 may be configured by a member separate from the first guide passage forming portion 202, It may be integrally formed with the first guide passage forming portion 202 in advance. In other words, the first guide passage forming portion 202 may be formed in advance in a square tubular shape.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the screw member is retained on the cover portion as a predetermined limiting portion for limiting the drop of the screw member dropped onto the cover portions 314, 324, 334 to the first guide passage forming portion 202. Although the embodiments in which the elongated holes 316A to 316C as the holes that allow the thread to be inserted, the grooves 326A to 326C and the recess 336 as the recesses are applied, the present invention is not limited to this, and the screw member A fall restriction part (drop obstruction part) that can restrict (or obstruct) the fall from the cover part, and a movement restriction part (movement obstruction part) that can restrict (or obstruct) the movement of the screw member on the cover part Alternatively, it may be a drop guide portion such as an inclined surface that guides the screw member so that it can fall from the cover portion to the outside of the first guide passage forming portion 202 . Note that the means capable of restricting or inhibiting falling or movement may be not only the protrusions and recesses, but also magnets capable of attracting metal screw members, adhesive parts capable of adhering screw members, and the like.

In other words, the predetermined limit portion for limiting the drop of the screw member dropped onto the cover portions 314 , 324 , 334 onto the first guide passage forming portion 202 is Not only those that make it impossible to fall, but also those that make it difficult to fall.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a plurality of specific restricting portions are provided in the first guiding passage forming portion 202 to restrict the movement of the screw member that has fallen into the first guiding passage forming portion 202 toward the dispensing device 200. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the movement of the screw member that has fallen into the first guide passage forming portion 202 toward the dispensing device 200 is restricted ( Alternatively, it may be a movement restricting portion (movement inhibiting portion) capable of inhibiting movement. It should be noted that the means capable of restricting or inhibiting the movement to the dispensing device 200 side is not limited to the protrusions and recesses, but may be a magnet capable of attracting a metal screw member, an adhesive portion capable of adhering the screw member, or the like. However, it is preferable to provide them at positions that do not affect the flow of the game ball (for example, the corners between the bottom wall portion 203A and the vertical wall portion 203B, which are not in contact with the game ball).

That is, the specific restricting portion provided in the first guide passage forming portion 202 for restricting the movement of the screw member that has fallen into the first guide passage forming portion 202 to the dispensing device 200 is the dispensing device 200 for the screw member. If the movement to the side can be restricted, the movement of the screw member mixed in the first guide passage forming portion 202 to the dispensing device 200 side is not necessarily disabled, and the movement can be made difficult. Anything is fine.

Further, when the movement of the screw member that has fallen into the first guide passage forming portion 202 to the dispensing device 200 is restricted (restricted, inhibited) by the specific restricting portion provided in the first guide passage forming portion 202, the movement is restricted. There is a high possibility that the screw member that is restricted and stays in the first guide passage restricts the downflow of the game ball, resulting in ball clogging. When ball clogging occurs, the replenishment error notification is executed as described above, so that the game hall clerk or the like opens the game machine frame 3 to form the ball tank forming part 201 on the back or the first guide passage. There is a high possibility that the state of the game ball in the section 202 will be visually inspected. At this time, since the screw member remains in the first guide passage forming portion 202 without moving to the dispensing device 200, it becomes easier for the store clerk or the like to identify that the ball clogging was caused by the screw member. Appropriate measures can be taken.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, all of the plurality of holes 271A to 271H have a size that allows the screw member to drop, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the plurality of holes 271A 271H are formed so that the screw member can be dropped, the other holes may not be capable of dropping the screw member. Moreover, the shape and size of the plurality of holes 271A to 271H are arbitrary and can be changed in various ways without being limited to the above-described forms.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the main board 11 and the production control board 12 are applied as the first board attached to the lower position than the first guide passage forming part 202, but the present invention is limited to this. Other substrates such as relay substrates may also be targeted.

In the above-described embodiment, the terminal substrate 210 is applied as the second substrate attached above the first guide passage forming portion 202, but the present invention is not limited to this. , other substrates such as a relay substrate may be used as the second substrate.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the main board 11 and the effect control board 12 as the first board are exemplified by the form in which the board cases 11A and 12A in which these boards are accommodated are attached to the game board 2 by the screw members N20 and N21. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the various substrates as the first substrate may be attached directly to the game board 2 or the game machine frame 3 without interposing the substrate case.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the main board 11 and the effect control board 12 as the first board are configured such that the board cases 11A and 12A in which each board is accommodated are screw members N20 and N21, that is, screw members are used. The terminal board 210 as the second board is attached to the game board 2 by an attachment method, using locking means consisting of a plurality of restricting portions 235 and locking portions 236 as mounting means different from screw members, that is, Although a form in which the board mounting frame 211 is mounted by a mounting method different from the mounting method using a screw member is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this. It may include attachment means, adhesion means using an adhesive or the like.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the screw member is provided around the first guide passage forming portion 202 to restrict the screw member moving toward the first guide passage forming portion 202 from falling into the first guide passage forming portion 202. As a special restricting portion for making the first guiding passage forming portion 202 of the screw member, the recesses 280, 290, 214, 242, and 243 are applied, but the present invention is not limited to this. a fall restricting portion (fall inhibiting portion) capable of regulating (or inhibiting) the fall of, a movement regulating portion (movement inhibiting portion) capable of regulating (or inhibiting) movement of the screw member to the first guide passage forming portion 202, , a drop guide portion such as an inclined surface that guides the screw member so that it can drop out of the first guide passage forming portion 202, or the like. In addition, as a means capable of restricting or inhibiting the falling or movement of the first guide passage forming portion 202, not only the convex portion and the concave portion, but also a magnet capable of attracting a metal screw member and a magnet capable of adhering the screw member. It may be an adhesive portion or the like.

In other words, the special restricting portion for restricting the falling of the detached screw member to the first guide passage forming portion 202 is not only the portion that disables the dropping of the screw member to the first guide passage forming portion 202, Any material can be used as long as it makes it difficult to fall. For example, a convex portion as a fall restricting portion (fall inhibiting portion) and a concave portion or a hole as a movement restricting portion (movement inhibiting portion) may be provided at predetermined positions of the upper wall portion 225A or the like.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the periphery of the first guide passage forming portion 202 in which the concave portions 280, 290, 214, 242, 243, etc., are provided as the special restricting portion is in the vicinity of the front standing wall portion 203B. Although it was exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and at least it is provided in the vicinity of the vertical wall portion 203B as long as it is between the mounting portion (mounting hole) to which the screw member is mounted and the guide passage forming portion. For example, it may be provided at a position closer to the attached portion than the guide passage forming portion between the attached portion and the guide passage forming portion of the screw member.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the first Although the form which applied the ball stop member 340 which can change to the 1st state which makes the game ball of the guidance passage formation part 202 flow down, and the 2nd state which makes it difficult or impossible to flow down was illustrated, this invention It is not limited to this, and any member provided on the side of the payout device 200 in the inclined direction (lower side of the inclination) of the cover portion 334 may restrict the movement of the screw member even if it does not have a ball stopper function. It may be a convex portion, a standing wall portion, or a wiring retainer that can (or obstruct).

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the ball stopper member 340 as the specific portion is provided on the payout device 200 side in the inclined direction of the cover portion 334, but the present invention is not limited to this. Alternatively, the specifying portion may be provided at the end portion of the dispensing device 200 side of the cover portions 314 and 324 as long as it is provided at the dispensing device 200 side end portion of one cover portion.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the ball stopper member 340 as the specific portion is configured by a member separate from the cover portion 334, but the present invention is not limited to this. A specific portion (a ball stop portion) may be integrally formed with a part of the member that constitutes the cover portion 334 .

Further, in the above embodiment, as an example of the locking portion, the flange portion F (washer) having a larger diameter than the head portion NH of the screw members N1, N2, N11 to N16 and integrally formed with the head portion NH However, the present invention is not limited to this, instead of the flange portion F, a washer or the like that is formed separately from the screw member and can be attached to the screw member may be used, or the head Also included are the anti-rotation portion of the head NH formed in an uneven shape on the back surface of the NH and the flange portion F (washer), an adhesive agent, and the like. Moreover, the threaded member is not limited to one that can be attached with a tool such as a screwdriver, but may be a thumbscrew, or includes a member such as a screw or a bolt that separates from the attached portion when loosened.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the ball tank forming portion 201 as the storage portion is attached to the gaming machine frame 3 at a plurality of locations by the screw members N11 to N14 having the flange portion F as the locking portion to form the ball tank. The screw members N11 to N14 for attaching the portion 201 and the first guiding passage forming portion 202 to the game machine frame 3 are designed so as to fall outside the first guiding passage forming portion 202 even if they come off the game machine frame 3. , the first guiding passage forming portion 202 and the sphere tank forming portion 201 are mounted below the upper edge of the standing wall portion 203B of the sphere tank forming portion 201, but the present invention is not limited to this. Even if the position is above the upper end edge of the vertical wall portion 203B of the guiding passage forming portion 202 or the ball tank forming portion 201, for example, it may be displaced in the horizontal direction from the position directly above the first guiding passage forming portion 202 or the ball tank forming portion 201. If the screw member is attached at a non-directly above position, it is possible to prevent the screw member from directly falling into the first guide passage forming portion 202 . Further, the dropped screw member is guided to fall outside the first guide passage forming portion 202 by a predetermined guiding portion (for example, a concave groove formed in the upper wall portion 225A). good too.

Further, the predetermined restriction portion, the specific restriction portion, the special restriction portion, and the specific portion in the above-described embodiments are not only the screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16 attached to the pachinko game machine 1, but also the pachinko game such as game islands. Although the embodiment of restricting or regulating (obstructing) the movement of the screw member other than the machine 1 to the payout device 200 has been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and at least the screw member is attached to the pachinko game machine 1. Restrict or restrict the movement of the screw members N1 to N6, N11 to N16, and the screw members N3 to N6 attached above the first guide passage forming portion 202 and the sphere tank forming portion 201 to the dispensing device 200. It is preferably formed in a size and shape that allow (inhibition).

(Characteristic part 053SG)
Next, a form for implementing a gaming machine in the characterizing part 053SG according to the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 30-1 to 30-24.

The game machine in the characteristic part 053SG is a pachinko game machine or a slot machine installed in a game hall or the like, and in particular, as shown in FIG. Equipped with a game control board. As the game machine described below, the pachinko game machine 1 of the above-described embodiment can be applied, and the main board 11 of the above-described embodiment can be applied as the game control board, and the effect control board 12 can be applied as the effect control board. is.

As shown in FIG. 30-1, the game control board is connected with a plurality of input components such as various switches and sensors for detecting input conditions according to the progress of the game. Input components include, for example, detection switches that detect operations by the player, detection switches that detect the passage of game media such as game balls and medals, sensors that specify the positions of movable objects used in games such as reels, detection switches used for various settings such as the degree of advantage of the door, and detection switches for detecting door opening, abnormalities, and the like.

In addition, the game control board, as shown in FIG. 30-1, is equipped with an input circuit that detects the input signal from these input components, and the detection status of the input signal from the input component by the input circuit is specified. The input data is transmitted to the game control microcomputer and used for game control by the game control microcomputer.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 30-1, the game control board is connected to a plurality of output components such as indicators, LEDs, motors, solenoids, etc., which perform output control according to the progress of the game. Output components include, for example, a display that displays according to the lottery result, a display that displays the progress of the game and the state of the gaming machine, a display that instructs the player on the operation mode, and a value owned by the player. , an LED that indicates the game state, an LED that notifies the occurrence of an abnormality, a motor, a solenoid, and the like that operate movable parts used in the game, such as reels and variable winning devices.

In addition, the game control board, as shown in FIG. 30-1, is provided with an output circuit that outputs an output signal to the corresponding output component based on the output data transmitted from the game control microcomputer. , the game control microcomputer transmits output data to the output circuit, thereby controlling the output components according to the progress of the game.

In addition, the game control microcomputer, the input circuit and the output circuit are connected via a data bus, and input data is transmitted from the input circuit to the game control microcomputer and from the game control microcomputer to the output circuit. The transmission of the output data of is through a shared data bus.

Also, not all input circuits are connected via a shared data bus, but some input circuits are connected directly to the game control microcomputer without a data bus, and are connected to a shared data bus. Input data is transmitted from the input circuit to the game control microcomputer without going through.

The output circuits are all connected via a shared data bus. The configuration may be such that the output data is transmitted from the game control microcomputer to the output circuit without passing through the data bus.

In addition, the data bus is connected to an external output terminal, and the output data from the game control microcomputer is output to the external device as an external output signal. It is possible to inspect the performance of the game machine using the output data output as.

Next, the game control board provided in the gaming machine of the present invention will be explained using the following Examples 1 to 3.

The structure of the game control board in Example 1 will be described. The game control board has electronic components mounted on one surface and no electronic components mounted on the other surface, and has a configuration in which the terminals of the electronic components are soldered. The surface is called a mounting surface, and the surface on which no electronic component is mounted and terminals of the electronic component are soldered is called a soldering surface.

FIG. 30-2 is a diagram showing the mounting surface of the game control board in this embodiment, and FIG. 30-3 is a diagram showing the soldering surface of the game control board in this embodiment. As shown in FIGS. 30-2 and 30-3, the game control board has a rectangular shape consisting of a pair of short sides extending in the vertical direction and a pair of long sides extending in the horizontal direction, and has an insulating printed board. Consists of In addition, the game control board is formed with a plurality of through holes passing through the mounting surface and the soldering surface, and the mounting surface and the soldering surface of the game control board are configured with conductors so as to appropriately connect the through holes. A plurality of wiring patterns are formed. In addition, in the area where the wiring pattern is not formed on the mounting surface and the soldering surface of the game control board, a ground area is formed by an insulating area made of an insulator and a conductor and forming a ground. The ground area is a solid ground formed over almost the entire area other than the area where the wiring pattern and the insulating area are formed on the mounting surface and the soldering surface of the game control board.

As shown in FIG. 30-2, wiring patterns extending in the vertical direction are arranged on the mounting surface in a larger proportion than wiring patterns extending in the horizontal direction, and on the other hand, as shown in FIG. , more wiring patterns extending in the horizontal direction are arranged than wiring patterns extending in the vertical direction. Therefore, the wiring patterns extending in the vertical direction are concentrated on the mounting surface, and the wiring patterns extending in the horizontal direction are concentrated on the soldering surface. Designs such as bypassing wiring patterns can be reduced as much as possible.

Further, as shown in FIG. 30-3, the wiring pattern arranged on the solder surface has many wires extending in the same horizontal direction as the long side, so the wiring pattern distance is longer than the wiring pattern arranged on the mounting surface. However, as mentioned above, electronic components are mounted only on the mounting surface, not on the soldering surface, and the relatively long wiring pattern placed on the soldering surface is obstructed by the electronic components. is avoided.

Further, when branching the wiring pattern formed on the solder surface, one of the branched wiring patterns is formed on the solder surface and the other is formed on the mounting surface through the through holes. One wiring pattern of the branch destination is detoured, and the one wiring pattern of the branch destination and the other wiring pattern do not cross each other on the same plane.

FIG. 30-4 is a diagram showing the mounting surface of the game control board in the present embodiment in which the input circuit and the output circuit are mounted.

As shown in FIG. 30-4, electronic components such as the aforementioned game control microcomputer, input circuit, and output circuit are mounted on the mounting surface of the game control board. These electronic components include electronic components having one or more terminal rows each composed of a plurality of terminals arranged in one direction. Most of the electronic components having these terminal rows are arranged along the long side of the game control board, that is, in the horizontal direction. As mentioned above, on the mounting surface, there is a large percentage of wiring patterns extending in the vertical direction, and electronic components with terminal rows are often arranged along the long side of the game control board, that is, arranged in the horizontal direction. By doing so, it is possible to directly connect the wiring pattern extending in the vertical direction to the terminal rows arranged in the horizontal direction without changing the direction of the wiring pattern.

30-4, the input circuit and the output circuit among the electronic components having a terminal row are formed in a rectangular shape and provided with a recessed notch on one of the short sides, and on the surface The model number is printed so that the orientation of the part can be specified by the orientation of the notch and the printing direction of the model number. As shown in FIG. 30-4, the input circuit is arranged so that the notch is on the left side in FIG. 30-4 and the model number is printed from left to right. 30-4, the notch faces right and the model number is printed from right to left. It is possible to specify whether the circuit is present or whether it is an output circuit.

FIG. 30-5 is a diagram showing the configuration of the data bus formed on the soldering surface of the game control board in this embodiment, and FIG. It is a figure which shows the wiring pattern which branched.

The game control board is formed with a data bus shared for transmission of input data from the input circuit to the game control microcomputer and transmission of output data from the game control microcomputer to the output circuit as described above. . The data bus formed on the game control board of this embodiment is composed of eight wiring patterns extending in the horizontal direction formed on the solder surface, and as shown in FIG. It consists of eight wiring patterns formed so as to extend laterally toward the right side from through holes to which terminals of a game control microcomputer mounted on the left side are connected. As shown in FIG. 30-6, the data bus, input circuits, output circuits, and other electronic components are connected to a wiring pattern formed so as to branch out to the mounting surface side through through holes and extend vertically in the vertical direction. connected by

When connecting the game control microcomputer and electronic components such as input circuits and output circuits separated in the horizontal direction through the data bus, first, the terminals of the game control microcomputer extend in the horizontal direction. It is connected to a data bus on the surface, branches to a wiring pattern on the mounting surface side extending vertically toward the electronic component through a through hole at a position where the electronic component is mounted, and is connected to the electronic component. Therefore, it is not necessary to bypass the wiring pattern branched from the data bus, and it is possible to efficiently connect the game control microcomputer and the electronic parts separated in the horizontal direction. In addition, since the wiring pattern forming the data bus is formed on the solder surface on which electronic components are not mounted, the data bus is less likely to be affected by noise from the electronic components. Since the wiring pattern branched to the mounting surface side through the hole is used for connection, the wiring pattern on the mounting surface side is shortened, and the influence of noise from the electronic components during this period is reduced.

As shown in FIG. 30-5, the wiring patterns extending in the horizontal direction forming the data bus are not formed in a straight line, but divided into a plurality of wiring patterns extending in the horizontal direction. The length of each divided wiring pattern (L1 to L8) is an antenna that maximizes resonance according to the bus clock (frequency used when transmitting data on the data bus) when transmitting data on the data bus. It is formed shorter than the length (λ (bus clock)/2). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the wiring pattern forming the data bus from having an antenna length corresponding to the bus clock and unintentionally emitting radio waves due to resonance. Furthermore, even if the length of the antenna is half the length corresponding to the bus clock, it may reflect off the surface of the substrate and cause strong resonance. The lengths (L1 to L8) are formed to a length that is not half the antenna length at which resonance is maximized according to the bus clock. Emission of radio waves is also prevented.

In addition, the bus clock varies depending on the game control microcomputer and the oscillator to be installed, but the length of each divided wiring pattern (L1 to L8) depends on the bus clock, which is the maximum frequency assumed among them. The length of the antenna is shorter than the length of the antenna that maximizes resonance, and the length of the antenna is less than half the length of the antenna that maximizes resonance according to the bus clock that has the maximum frequency. Therefore, even when data is transmitted with a bus clock frequency lower than the expected maximum frequency, unintended radio waves are prevented from being generated.

As shown in FIG. 30-5, a plurality of divided horizontal wiring patterns forming a data bus are arranged in an oblique right direction or an oblique left direction. They are connected across wiring patterns extending in different directions. Further, the wiring pattern in the horizontal direction and the wiring pattern in the oblique right direction or the oblique left direction are connected while being bent at an obtuse angle. Therefore, it is possible to prevent unintended emission of radio waves from the bent portion of the wiring pattern.

Also, as shown in FIG. 30-5, through holes (A to F shown in FIG. 30-5) provided on oblique wiring patterns that connect a plurality of divided horizontal wiring patterns are used for mounting. Wiring patterns on the surface side (wiring patterns connected to A to F shown in FIG. 30-6) are branched, and oblique wiring patterns that connect the divided horizontal wiring patterns to each other. are used to branch the wiring pattern that constitutes the data bus.

In addition, in the game control board in the first embodiment, in order to make the length of the wiring pattern in the horizontal direction shorter than the antenna length that maximizes resonance, the wiring pattern in the horizontal direction is divided into a plurality of wiring patterns, and a plurality of In this configuration, the horizontal wiring patterns divided into two are connected to each other by oblique wiring patterns formed on the same soldering surface. In other words, horizontal wiring patterns are alternately formed on the soldering surface and the mounting surface so that the horizontal wiring pattern length is shorter than the antenna length at which resonance is maximized. Also good. In such a configuration, it is preferable to branch the wiring pattern in the horizontal direction at the point where the wiring pattern is switched from the soldering surface or the mounting surface to the other surface. , the wiring patterns forming the data bus can be branched without intersecting on the same plane.

Figure 30-7 is a diagram showing the configuration of the ground area formed on the mounting surface of the game control board in this embodiment, Figure 30-8 is formed on the solder surface of the game control board in this embodiment FIG. 4 is a diagram showing the configuration of a ground area;

As shown in FIGS. 30-7 and 30-8, the ground area is formed over almost the entire area other than the area where the wiring pattern and the insulating area are formed on the mounting surface and soldering surface of the game control board. The ground area formed on the game control board comprises a first ground area and a second ground area electrically separated via an insulating area. In both the mounting surface and the soldering surface, the first ground area is formed in the left area of the game control board, and the second ground area is formed in the right area of the game control board.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 30-7, a wiring pattern that transmits a low voltage (Vcc (+5 V) in this embodiment) signal such as a game control microcomputer, an input circuit, an output circuit, etc. is connected. Electronic components (low-voltage components) are mounted on the left area where the first ground area is formed, and ground terminals of the low-voltage components are connected to the first ground area. On the other hand, electronic parts (high voltage parts) to which wiring patterns for transmitting high voltage (VLD (+24 V) in this embodiment) signals are connected, such as drive circuits for operating motors, solenoids, etc. It is mounted on the right area where two ground areas are formed, and the ground terminal of the high voltage component is connected to the second ground area. This prevents unintended reverse flow of current from the high voltage component to the low voltage component via the ground area. In addition, since the first ground area and the second ground area are formed on opposite side sides of the game control board, interference with each other is prevented even if a potential difference occurs temporarily.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 30-9, a capacitor is provided between the first ground area and the second ground area. Even if a potential difference occurs temporarily, current is prevented from flowing from one ground area to the other ground area.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 30-7 and 30-8, an insulating region in which no wiring pattern is formed is formed between the first ground region and the second ground region on the mounting surface and the soldering surface. The ground area and the second ground area are electrically separated. Further, the first ground region and the second ground region on the mounting surface and the first ground region and the second ground region on the soldering surface are formed so as to overlap each other, and the first ground region and the second ground region on the mounting surface are formed so as to overlap each other. Since the insulating region that separates the ground regions and the insulating region that separates the first ground region and the second ground region on the solder surface are also formed so as to overlap each other, from one surface of the mounting surface and the solder surface to the other surface Mutual interference is prevented even if a potential difference occurs temporarily.

30-10 is a diagram showing the configuration of the connector mounted on the mounting surface of the game control board in this embodiment, FIG. 30-11 is a connector formed on the soldering surface of the game control board in this embodiment FIG. 30-12 is a diagram showing a peripheral wiring pattern, and FIG. 30-12 is a diagram showing a state in which the game control board in this embodiment is housed in the board case.

As shown in FIG. 30-10, the game control board has a plurality of connectors CN1 to CN7 mounted near the lower side of the mounting surface for connecting wires from the outside of the game control board. In the wiring from the game control board, there are a signal that triggers the lottery, a signal that changes the set value that defines the advantage for the player such as the probability of the lottery, and a signal that changes the set value. Wiring for inputting or outputting signals related to the degree of advantage in the game, such as signals, signals for displaying information advantageous to the player on an external display, wiring for inputting the detection signal of the error cancellation operation, backup power supply wiring as a supply line for

As shown in FIG. 30-10, the terminals provided on the connectors CN1 to CN7 are not directly connected to the wiring patterns formed on the mounting surface, that is, the surface on which the connectors CN1 to CN7 are mounted. -11, it is connected to a wiring pattern formed on the solder side, that is, the side opposite to the side on which the connectors CN1 to CN7 are mounted. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 30-10, no wiring pattern is formed around the mounting portion of the connectors CN1 to CN7 on the mounting surface, and information about the connector such as the connector number is printed therearound. ing. The information printed around the mounting portions of the connectors CN1 to CN7 is not limited to the connector number, and may be configured to print the number of terminals, the direction of the connector, the connection destination, and the like.

As shown in FIG. 30-11, the wiring pattern connected to the terminals provided on the connectors CN1 to CN7 on the solder surface passes through the through holes at the end opposite to the side connected to the terminals, and the wiring on the mounting surface passes through. connected to the pattern. In particular, the through holes a to h shown in FIGS. 30-10 and 30-11 are through holes to which the terminals of electronic components are connected, and the wiring patterns connected to the terminals provided in the connectors CN1 to CN7 are It is provided at the place where it is first connected to the electronic component. Therefore, it is possible to connect from the solder surface to the wiring pattern on the mounting surface using the through holes for connecting to the electronic component.

As shown in FIGS. 30-12(A) and 30-12(B), the game control board is attached to the game machine while being accommodated in the board case. The substrate case can be sealed by a one-way screw, sealing seal, welding, or the like, and once sealed, it is difficult to open without leaving a trace. Therefore, by attaching the game control board to the game machine in a state where it is housed in the board case, it has a structure that prevents fraudulent use of the game control board.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 30-12 (A) and (B), the substrate case is provided with a covering portion for covering the area around the connectors CN1 to CN7 when the game control substrate is accommodated. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 30-10, the wiring pattern is not formed in the area covered by the covering portion of the board case of the mounting surface of the game control board, and the wiring pattern is formed avoiding the area. there is The covering portion is provided with insertion holes having substantially the same shape as the connectors CN1 to CN7, and the connectors CN1 to CN7 are exposed to the outside through these insertion holes so that wiring from the outside can be connected.

Even when the game control board is housed in the board case in this way, since the connectors CN1 to CN7 are connected to wiring from the outside, a slight gap is generated around the connectors CN1 to CN7. are not directly connected to the wiring patterns formed on the mounting surface, that is, the surface on which the connectors CN1 to CN7 are mounted, and are not directly connected to the solder surface, that is, the surface on which the connectors CN1 to CN7 are mounted. It is designed to be connected to the wiring pattern formed on the opposite side, and the wiring pattern connected to the terminals of the connectors CN1 to CN7 is short-circuited from the periphery of the portion where the connectors CN1 to CN7 are exposed from the substrate case. Fraudulent acts such as disconnection are prevented.

In addition, the periphery of the mounting portion of the connectors CN1 to CN7 on the mounting surface is covered by the covering portion of the board case, and the area covered by the covering portion includes wiring connected to the terminals provided on the connectors CN1 to CN7. No wiring patterns including patterns are formed, and the wiring patterns connected to the terminals provided in the connectors CN1 to CN7 are connected to the wiring patterns on the mounting surface in areas other than the covering portion, It is possible to reliably prevent fraudulent acts such as short-circuiting or disconnection of the wiring patterns connected to the terminals of the connectors CN1 to CN7 from the periphery of the portions where the connectors CN1 to CN7 are exposed from the board case.

FIG. 30-13 is a circuit diagram relating to the supply of backup power to the game control microcomputer mounted on the game control board in this embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 30-13, Vcc (+5V) is generated by the power board and connected to the power input terminal Vcc of the game control microcomputer mounted on the game control board. In addition, Vcc (+5V) is branched from the line supplied to the game control microcomputer on the power supply board, and is connected to the charging capacitor through the backflow prevention diode, and the backflow prevention diode and the charging capacitor A line branched between is connected to the backup power supply input terminal VBB of the game control microcomputer.

While the power is being supplied, Vcc (+5V) is supplied as a drive power source for the game control microcomputer, and the charging capacitor is charged. On the other hand, when the power supply is stopped, the supply of Vcc (+5V) is stopped, so that the backup power supply VBB charged in the charging capacitor is supplied to the game control microcomputer, The game control microcomputer is supplied with the backup power supply VBB so that the data stored in the RAM of the game control microcomputer is retained. In this embodiment, the backup power supply is configured to be supplied from a power supply board outside the game control board, but may be configured to be supplied from a circuit provided within the game control board.

30-14 is a diagram showing a wiring pattern for power supply formed on the solder surface of the game control board in this embodiment, and FIG. 30-15 is formed on the mounting surface of the game control board in this embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the relationship between the wiring pattern formed on the soldered surface and the wiring pattern for power supply formed on the solder surface;

As shown in FIG. 30-14, on the soldering surface of the game control board, wiring patterns Vcc1 to 3 for supplying normal power and wiring patterns VBB for supplying backup power are provided as wiring patterns constituting power supply lines. , are formed. The wiring patterns Vcc1 to 3, as shown in FIGS. 30-14 and 30-15, are configured by a wiring pattern formed on the solder surface and a wiring pattern formed on the mounting surface, and are mounted on the game control board. Connected to electronic components. On the other hand, the wiring pattern VBB, as shown in FIG. 30-14, consists only of wiring patterns formed on the solder surface. That is, the wiring pattern VBB is connected to the backup power input terminal VBB of the game control microcomputer only through the wiring pattern formed on the soldering surface without being connected to the wiring pattern formed on the mounting surface. That is, the wiring pattern VBB supplied with the backup power supply VBB from the power supply board is formed only on the solder surface. Therefore, the wiring pattern VBB to which the backup power supply VBB is supplied does not need to bypass the electronic components mounted on the mounting surface, and the distance of the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer can be shortened. This prevents the data stored in the RAM from being corrupted by noise.

Further, as shown in FIG. 30-15, on the mounting surface, a solid ground is formed in the portion where the wiring pattern VBB is formed on the solder surface side. Therefore, the wiring pattern VBB on the solder surface side is less susceptible to noise because the solid ground formed on the mounting surface blocks noise. Further, as shown in FIG. 30-15, among the wiring patterns formed on the solder surface, the wiring pattern VBB for supplying the backup power is closer to the mounting surface than the wiring patterns Vcc1 to 3 for supplying the normal power. In the region corresponding to , the wiring pattern formed on the mounting surface side, especially the wiring pattern used for signal transmission, is formed at a position where there are few crossing points. Therefore, the influence of noise on the wiring pattern VBB to which backup power is supplied from the wiring pattern used for signal transmission formed on the mounting surface side is suppressed as much as possible.

In the present embodiment, among the wiring patterns formed on the soldering surface, the wiring pattern VBB for supplying the backup power supply is located in the corresponding region on the mounting surface side rather than the wiring patterns Vcc1 to 3 for supplying the normal power supply. is formed at a position where there are few intersections with the wiring pattern used for signal transmission formed on the mounting surface side. For example, a wiring pattern that transmits a signal related to the player's profit is closer to the mounting surface than a wiring pattern that transmits a signal that is not directly related to the player's history, such as a signal for controlling output parts. In the corresponding area, the wiring pattern used for signal transmission formed on the mounting surface side is formed at a position where there are few crossing points, so that the signal formed on the mounting surface side can be used for transmission. The influence of noise on the wiring pattern, through which the signal related to the profit of the player is transmitted from the wiring pattern, is suppressed as much as possible.

In addition, among the wiring patterns formed on the solder surface, the wiring pattern that transmits the reset signal to the game control microcomputer and the wiring pattern that gives the operation clock to the game control microcomputer are relatively important. A place where a wiring pattern for signal transmission intersects a wiring pattern used for signal transmission formed on the mounting surface side in a corresponding region on the mounting surface side rather than a wiring pattern for transmitting other signals. By adopting a configuration in which the noise is reduced, the influence of noise on the wiring pattern used for signal transmission formed on the mounting surface side and transmitting signals of relatively high importance is minimized. suppressed.

FIG. 30-16 is a diagram showing an example of a situation in which the game control board is attached to the slot machine. The slot machine is equipped with game parts related to games such as a liquid crystal display, an effect control board for controlling effects, a reel unit consisting of a plurality of reels, and a hopper unit for paying out medals. When the game control board is attached to the slot machine, the game control board has the mounting surface side, that is, the surface opposite to the solder surface on which the wiring pattern VBB to which the backup power is supplied is formed on the game component side. Mounted to be positioned. By adopting such a configuration, the influence of noise emitted from the game parts on the wiring pattern VBB to which the backup power supply is supplied can be suppressed.

FIG. 30-17 is a diagram showing an example of a situation in which the game control board is attached to the pachinko game machine. When the pachinko gaming machine is installed in a game arcade, it is often installed in such a manner that the back faces of other gaming machines such as other pachinko gaming machines face each other. When the game control board is attached to the pachinko game machine, the game control board has a mounting surface side, that is, a surface opposite to the solder surface on which the wiring pattern VBB to which the backup power is supplied is formed. It is attached so that it is arranged on the device side. By adopting such a configuration, the influence of noise emitted from other game machines on the wiring pattern VBB to which the backup power supply is supplied can be suppressed.

(Effect 1)
In the game control board of this embodiment, wiring patterns are formed on both the mounting surface and the soldering surface, and the wiring pattern formed on the mounting surface has a ratio of the wiring pattern extending in the first direction (vertical direction). The ratio of the wiring patterns extending in the second direction (horizontal direction) different from the first direction (horizontal direction) is higher than that of the wiring patterns extending in the second direction (horizontal direction). direction). According to such a configuration, the wiring patterns extending in the first direction (vertical direction) are concentrated on the mounting surface, and the wiring patterns extending in the second direction (horizontal direction) are concentrated on the soldering surface. When the wiring pattern extending in the (vertical direction) and the wiring pattern extending in the second direction (horizontal direction) intersect, design such as bypassing the wiring pattern can be reduced as much as possible.

The game control board of this embodiment is a quadrilateral consisting of a pair of sides (left side and right side) extending in a first direction (vertical direction) and a pair of sides (upper side and lower side) extending in a second direction (horizontal direction). It is characterized by its shape. According to such a configuration, the wiring pattern can be formed along the shape of the game control board without waste.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that an electronic component having a terminal row consisting of a plurality of terminals is arranged so that the terminal rows are arranged in the second direction (horizontal direction). According to such a configuration, the wiring pattern extending in the first direction (horizontal direction) can be directly connected to the electronic component.

The game control board of this embodiment includes a pair of short sides (left side and right side) extending in the first direction (vertical direction) and a pair of long sides (upper side and lower side) extending in the second direction (horizontal direction). It is characterized in that the electronic component is mounted only on the mounting surface and the electronic component is not mounted on the soldering surface. According to such a configuration, it is possible to form a wiring pattern in the second direction (horizontal direction), in which the distance can be long on the solder surface, without being obstructed by the electronic component.

In the game control board of the present embodiment, the wiring pattern includes a wiring pattern branching from one wiring pattern to two wiring patterns, one of the two wiring patterns at the branch destination is formed on the mounting surface, The other wiring pattern is characterized in that it is formed on the solder surface. With such a configuration, it is not necessary to detour one of the wiring patterns at the branch destination, or to cross the one wiring pattern at the branch destination with the other wiring pattern on the same plane. can be formed.

(Effect 2)
The game control board of the present embodiment connects the first terminal (terminal of the game control microcomputer) and the second terminal (input circuit, terminal of the output circuit) separated in a specific direction (horizontal direction), and a specific signal ( A specific wiring pattern (data bus) used for transmitting input data and output data) is formed, and the specific wiring pattern (data bus) is formed of a plurality of wiring patterns consisting of straight wiring patterns extending in a specific direction (horizontal direction). Each linear wiring pattern formed by division and extending in a specific direction (horizontal direction) has a specific length (λ/2), which is an antenna length corresponding to the frequency (bus clock) of a specific signal (input data, output data). It is characterized by being formed shorter than According to such a configuration, the specific wiring pattern (data bus) is formed by dividing into a plurality of wiring patterns consisting of straight wiring patterns extending in a specific direction (horizontal direction), and straight lines extending in a specific direction (horizontal direction) are formed. Each wiring pattern is formed shorter than a specific length (λ/2), which is the antenna length corresponding to the frequency (bus clock) of the specific signal (input data, output data), so that the specific wiring pattern (data bus ) can be prevented from having an antenna length corresponding to the frequency (bus clock) of the specific signal (input data, output data), and unintended radio waves can be prevented from being emitted.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that straight wiring patterns extending in a specific direction (horizontal direction) are connected by wiring patterns extending in a direction (diagonal direction) different from the specific direction (horizontal direction). . According to such a configuration, a specific wiring pattern (data bus) can be divided into straight wiring patterns extending in a specific direction (horizontal direction) with a simple structure.

In addition, the game control board of the present embodiment has a configuration in which straight wiring patterns extending in a specific direction (horizontal direction) are connected by a wiring pattern extending in a direction (diagonal direction) different from the specific direction (horizontal direction). Alternatively, wiring patterns may be formed on the mounting surface and the soldering surface, and linear wiring patterns extending in a specific direction (horizontal direction) may be alternately formed on the mounting surface and the soldering surface. Also in such a configuration, a specific wiring pattern (data bus) can be divided into straight wiring patterns extending in a specific direction (horizontal direction) with a simple structure.

In the game control board of the present embodiment, the specific wiring pattern (data bus) is different from the specific wiring pattern (data bus) between one wiring pattern extending in a specific direction (horizontal direction) and the other wiring pattern. It is characterized by branching into According to such a configuration, the specific wiring pattern (data bus) can be preferably branched by utilizing the space between one wiring pattern extending in the specific direction and another wiring pattern.

The game control board of this embodiment has an antenna length corresponding to the maximum frequency (maximum frequency assumed as a bus clock) of each specific signal (input data, output data) with a straight wiring pattern extending in a specific direction (horizontal direction). It is characterized in that it is formed shorter than a specific length (λ/2). According to such a configuration, the length of the straight wiring pattern extending in the specific direction (horizontal direction) is shorter than the antenna length corresponding to the maximum frequency of the specific signal (input data, output data). It is possible to prevent unintended radio waves from being emitted even if a signal is transmitted by

In the game control board of this embodiment, the straight wiring pattern extending in a specific direction has a specific length (λ/2), which is the antenna length corresponding to the frequency (bus clock) of the specific signal (input data, output data). It is characterized in that the length is not 1/2 (λ/4). According to such a configuration, the straight wiring pattern extending in the specific direction (horizontal direction) is 1/2 of the specific length (λ/2), and strong resonance occurs due to reflection from the surface of the substrate. Therefore, it is possible to prevent unintended emission of radio waves.

(Effect 3)
The game control board of the present embodiment includes a first electronic component (low voltage component) to which a wiring pattern for transmitting a signal of a first voltage (Vcc (+5V)) is connected, and a second voltage (VDL (+24V)). A second electronic component (high-voltage component) to which a wiring pattern for transmitting a signal of is connected is mounted, the first electronic component (low-voltage component) is connected to the first ground area, and the second electronic component ( The high voltage components) are characterized by being connected to a second ground area separated from the first ground area by an insulator. According to such a configuration, the first electronic component (low voltage component) to which the wiring pattern through which the signal of the first voltage (Vcc (+5V) is transmitted) is connected is connected to the first ground area, and the second voltage is connected to the first ground area. A second electronic component (high-voltage component) to which a wiring pattern for transmitting a signal of (VDL (+24 V)) is connected is connected to a second ground region separated from the first ground region by an insulating portion (insulating region). Therefore, it is possible to prevent an unintended reverse flow of current through the ground.

In addition, in the game control board of the present embodiment, the first electronic component (low voltage component) to which the wiring pattern for transmitting the signal of the first voltage (Vcc (+5V)) is connected is connected to the first ground area, A second electronic component (high-voltage component), to which a wiring pattern that transmits a signal of a second voltage (VDL (+24 V)) is connected, is connected to a second ground region separated from the first ground region by an insulating portion. Regarding the configuration, in a configuration in which there is a large difference in the current flowing through the wiring pattern that connects the first electronic component and the second electronic component, the first electronic component is connected to the first ground area, and the second electronic component is connected to the first ground area. It may be configured to be connected to a second ground region separated from the first ground region by an insulating portion. Even if the current difference between the patterns is large, the first electronic component is connected to the first ground area and the second electronic component is connected to the second ground area, so that an unintended reverse current flows through the ground. can be prevented.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that a capacitor is provided between the first ground area and the second ground area. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a current from flowing from one ground area to the other ground area even if a potential difference occurs temporarily between the first ground area and the second ground area due to the capacitor. .

In the game control board of the present embodiment, a first ground area is formed on one side (left side), a second ground area is formed on the other side (right side) opposite to one side, and a first electronic component (low voltage component ) is mounted in the first ground area, and the second electronic component (high voltage component) is mounted in the second ground area. According to such a configuration, since the first ground area and the second ground area are formed on the opposite sides of the game control board, they can be prevented from interfering with each other even if a potential difference occurs temporarily.

In the game control board of this embodiment, a non-wiring pattern area (insulating area) in which no wiring pattern is formed between the first ground area and the second ground area is formed on both the mounting surface and the solder surface. is characterized by With such a configuration, the insulation between the first ground region and the second ground region can be enhanced.

In addition, the game control board of this embodiment has a configuration in which a non-wiring pattern area (insulating area) is formed between the first ground area and the second ground area on both the mounting surface and the solder surface. Even in a configuration in which a non-wiring pattern area (insulating area) is formed between the first ground area and the second ground area on at least one of the mounting surface and the solder surface, the first ground area and the Insulation between the second ground regions can be enhanced.

In the game control board of this embodiment, the first ground area and the second ground area on the mounting surface and the first ground area and the second ground area on the solder surface are formed in areas corresponding to each other. and the non-wiring pattern area (insulating area) of the solder surface are also formed in corresponding areas. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent mutual interference even if a potential difference is temporarily generated from one surface of the mounting surface and the solder surface to the other surface.

(Effect 4)
The game control board of this embodiment is attached to the game machine while being housed in the board case, and connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) for attaching wiring from the outside of the game control board are mounted on the mounting surface. The terminals of (connectors CN1 to CN7) are characterized in that they are connected to wiring patterns formed on the solder surface. According to such a configuration, the terminals of the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) are connected not to the mounting surface on which the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) are mounted, but to the wiring pattern formed on the opposite solder surface. It is possible to prevent fraudulent acts such as short-circuiting or disconnection of wiring patterns connected to the terminals of the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) from the periphery of the portions where the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) are exposed from the board case.

In the game control board of this embodiment, the wiring connected to the connector (connectors CN1 to CN7) is connected to the wiring related to the advantage of the game (signal for changing the setting value to a changeable state, changing the setting value (wiring for inputting or outputting signals for displaying information advantageous to the player on an external display). According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent cheating related to game advantage.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that information (connector number) on the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) is displayed around the mounting portions of the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) on the mounting surface. According to such a configuration, the terminals of the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) are connected to wiring patterns formed on the solder surface, and wiring patterns are formed around the mounting portions of the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) on the mounting surface. Since the wiring pattern is not formed, by displaying information (connector number) on the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) in this portion, the portion where the wiring pattern is not formed on the mounting surface can be effectively used.

In the game control board of the present embodiment, the board case has a covering portion covering the area around the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7), and the wiring patterns connected to the terminals of the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) are: It is characterized in that it is formed on the solder surface in the region covered by the covering portion. With such a configuration, wiring patterns connected to the terminals of the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) are not formed on the mounting surface even in the periphery of the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7). (Connectors CN1 to CN7) can be reliably prevented from fraudulent actions such as short-circuiting or disconnection of wiring patterns connected to the terminals of the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) from the exposed portions.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that the wiring pattern connected to the terminals of the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) is connected to the wiring pattern on the mounting surface at the point where it is first connected to the electronic component. . According to such a configuration, it is possible to connect to the wiring pattern on the mounting surface using the through holes for connecting to the electronic component.

(Effect 5)
In the game control board of the present embodiment, a plurality of electronic components including a game control microcomputer having storage means (RAM) are mounted on the mounting surface, and no electronic components are mounted on the solder surface. The microcomputer for is capable of holding the stored contents of the storage means (RAM) by a specific power supply (backup power supply (VBB)) supplied by the wiring pattern, and the specific power supply (backup power supply (VBB)) is a game control microcomputer. The wiring pattern (VBB) to be supplied to is characterized in that it is formed only on the solder surface. According to such a configuration, the wiring pattern that supplies the specific power supply (backup power supply (VBB)) to the game control microcomputer is formed only on the solder surface on which electronic components are not mounted, bypassing the electronic components. Since the distance of the wiring pattern can be shortened, it is difficult to receive noise from the outside, and the data stored in the memory means (RAM) can be prevented from being damaged by the noise.

The game control board of the present embodiment is characterized in that the mounting surface side is attached so as to be placed on the side of the game components (liquid crystal display, effect control board for controlling effects, etc.) related to the game. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the influence of noise emitted from the game parts on the wiring pattern (VBB) for supplying the specific power supply (backup power supply (VBB)) to the game control microcomputer.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that it is attached so that the mounting surface side is arranged on the other game device (another game machine) side. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the wiring pattern (VBB) for supplying the specific power supply (backup power supply (VBB)) to the game control microcomputer from the influence of noise emitted from other game machines.

In the game control board of this embodiment, the area on the mounting surface side corresponding to the area provided with the wiring pattern (VBB) that supplies the specific power supply (backup power supply (VBB)) to the game control microcomputer on the solder surface is solid. A ground is formed. According to such a configuration, noise from the mounting surface side can be blocked by the solid ground formed on the mounting surface.

In the game control board of this embodiment, the wiring pattern (VBB) that supplies a specific power supply (backup power supply (VBB)) to the game control microcomputer is more It is characterized in that there are few intersections with the wiring pattern for transmitting signals in the corresponding area on the mounting surface side. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the influence of noise from the wiring pattern for transmitting signals on the mounting surface side as much as possible.

Embodiment 1 of the present invention has been described above with reference to the drawings, but the present invention is not limited to this embodiment, and any changes or additions within the scope of the present invention are included in the present invention. It goes without saying that

For example, in the present embodiment, an example in which the configuration according to the present invention is applied to a game control board for controlling a game has been described. The configuration according to the present invention may also be applied to a board for controlling game media and the provision of game values, a board for relaying between boards, and the like.

The structure of the game control board in Example 2 will be described. As in the first embodiment, the game control board has electronic parts mounted on one side, no electronic parts mounted on the other side, and terminals of the electronic parts are soldered. The configuration of the game control board in the second embodiment is basically the same as the configuration of the game control board in the first embodiment, and here, mainly the configuration different from the game control board in the first embodiment will be described. .

30-18 is a view showing the mounting surface of the game control board in Example 1, and FIG. 30-19 is a view showing the soldering surface of the game control board in this example.

As shown in FIGS. 30-18 and 30-19, the game control board has a rectangular shape consisting of a pair of short sides extending in the vertical direction and a pair of long sides extending in the horizontal direction, and has an insulating printed board. Consists of A plurality of through holes are formed in the game control board, and a plurality of wiring patterns are formed in the mounting surface and the soldering surface of the game control board so as to appropriately connect the through holes. In addition, an insulating area and a ground area are formed in the area where the wiring pattern of the mounting surface and the soldering surface of the game control board is not formed.

Also in the game control board in the second embodiment, similarly to the game control board in the first embodiment, an input circuit and an output circuit are mounted. A concave notch is provided on one side, and the model number is printed on the surface, so that the orientation of the part can be specified by the direction of the notch and the direction of printing the model number. The input circuit is arranged so that the cutout is on the left side in the figure and the model number is printed from left to right, while the output circuit is arranged so that the cutout is on the right side in the figure and the model number is printed. It is arranged so that the printing direction is from right to left, and it is possible to identify whether these electronic components are input circuits or output circuits by the position of the notch and the printing direction of the model number. there is

FIG. 30-20 is a diagram showing the configuration of the data bus formed on the soldering surface of the game control board in this embodiment, and FIG. It is a figure which shows the wiring pattern which branched.

The game control board is formed with a data bus that is shared for transmission of input data from the input circuit to the game control microcomputer and transmission of output data from the game control microcomputer to the output circuit. The data bus formed on the game control board of this embodiment is composed of eight wiring patterns extending in the horizontal direction formed on the solder surface, and as shown in FIGS. It consists of eight wiring patterns formed so as to extend laterally toward the right side from through holes to which terminals of a game control microcomputer mounted on the left side are connected. As shown in FIG. 30-21, the data bus, the input circuit and the output circuit are connected by a wiring pattern formed to branch to the mounting surface side through the through hole and extend vertically in the vertical direction. .

When connecting the game control microcomputer and the laterally separated input and output circuits via the data bus, first, the terminal of the game control microcomputer extends in the lateral direction on the data bus on the solder surface. at the position where the input circuit or output circuit is mounted, branch to the wiring pattern on the mounting surface side extending in the vertical direction toward the input circuit or output circuit through the through hole, and connect to the input circuit or output circuit becomes. Therefore, there is no need to bypass the wiring pattern branched from the data bus, and the game control microcomputer can be efficiently connected to the laterally separated input and output circuits. In addition, since the wiring pattern forming the data bus is formed on the solder surface on which electronic components are not mounted, the data bus is less susceptible to noise from the electronic components. are connected by wiring patterns branched to the mounting surface side through through-holes, the wiring pattern on the mounting surface side is shortened and is less susceptible to noise from the electronic components during this period.

Also, as shown in FIG. 30-22, the data bus is connected to the noise elimination circuit at a position closer to the game control microcomputer than any input circuit or output circuit connected to the data bus. This makes it difficult for noise on the data bus to affect the game control microcomputer.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 30-20, on the game control board, connectors CN10 to CN17 for connecting wires from the outside of the game control board are mounted in the vicinity of the upper side in the figure, and a data bus is installed. The wiring pattern is formed in an area near the lower side of the game control board in the figure, that is, in an area near the other side opposite to the one side on which the connectors CN10 to CN17 are mounted. For this reason, a wide area for mounting electronic parts such as input circuits and output circuits is ensured between the data bus and the connectors CN10 to CN17 for signal input/output with electronic parts outside the game control board. It's becoming

As shown in FIGS. 30-20 and 30-21, the game control board has an input signal from the first input component, which has relatively low importance among the input components used for game control (not triggering the lottery). A first input circuit that detects the input of a sensor or switch detection signal, etc.), an input signal from a second input component that is more important than the first input component (sensor or switch detection signal that triggers the lottery, an advantageous A second input circuit that detects input such as a detection signal that changes the set value that defines the speed, based on the output data from the game control microcomputer, the operation of the movable parts such as solenoids and motors according to the progress of the game A first output circuit that outputs an output signal to the first output component that performs the second output that displays according to the progress of the game, such as various indicators and LEDs, based on the output data from the game control microcomputer A second output circuit that outputs output signals to parts, based on the output data from the game control microcomputer, is mounted on the game control board, and the payout rate when playing the game for a certain period of time, etc. A third output circuit is implemented for outputting an output signal to a performance indicator for displaying performance.

A first output circuit, a first output circuit, a second output circuit, and a third output circuit among these input circuits and output circuits are connected to a data bus, and transmission of input data and transmission of output data are performed via the data bus. is done.

As shown in FIG. 30-20, the wiring pattern that constitutes the data bus connected to the terminal of the game control microcomputer on the solder surface branches to the mounting surface side through through holes at multiple points, and is vertically mounted on the mounting surface. It is connected to the wiring pattern formed in the direction. As shown in FIG. 30-21, the wiring pattern branched to the mounting surface side through the through hole at the position M in the figure is connected to the terminal of the first input circuit. Further, the wiring pattern branched to the mounting surface through the through hole at the position N in the figure is connected to the terminal of the third output circuit. Wiring patterns branched to the mounting surface through through holes at positions O and P in the figure are connected to the terminals of the first output circuit. Further, the wiring pattern on the mounting surface side connected through the through hole at the position Q in the drawing is connected to the terminal of the second output circuit and branches on the mounting surface. The remaining wiring pattern is connected to the wiring pattern on the solder side once through the through hole at the position R in the figure, and is connected to the wiring pattern on the mounting side through the through hole again at the position S in the figure. and connected to the external output terminal.

As shown in FIGS. 30-20 and 30-21, the input circuit of the input circuit and output circuit connected by a shared data bus has a wiring pattern length from the output circuit to the game control microcomputer. It is connected to the data bus so that it is short. Therefore, the input data used for game control is less susceptible to noise and the like.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 30-20 and 30-21, among a plurality of output circuits connected by a shared data bus, an output signal is output to a first output component that operates a movable portion according to the progress of the game. has a shorter wiring pattern length to the game control microcomputer than the second output circuit that outputs the output signal to the second output component that displays according to the progress of the game. are connected to the data bus so that Therefore, it is possible to prevent the output data from being affected by noise or the like, which affects the operation of the movable portion according to the progress of the game.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 30-20 and 30-21, among the plurality of output circuits connected by the shared data bus, the third output circuit that outputs the output signal to the performance indicator is Data so that the length of the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than the second output circuit that outputs the output signal to the display (second output component) that performs display according to the progress of the game Connected to a bus. For this reason, it is difficult to tamper with the contents of the performance display by arranging illegal parts or the like.

Also, as shown in FIGS. 30-21, the wiring pattern on the mounting surface side, which is connected through a through-hole at the position Q in the drawing, from the wiring pattern constituting the data bus on the soldering surface side, changes according to the progress of the game. It is connected to the terminal of the second output circuit that outputs the output signal to the second output component that outputs, and branches on the mounting surface, and the branched wiring pattern outputs the output signal according to the progress of the game to the external device It is connected to an external output terminal for outputting to. In this way, by utilizing the wiring pattern on the mounting surface connected through the through holes from the data bus formed on the soldering surface, the wiring pattern is connected to the second output circuit in order to output according to the progress of the game on the mounting surface side. and the wiring pattern connected to the external output terminal for outputting the output signal according to the progress of the game to the external device. Since it is not necessary to branch to the soldering surface side from the data bus formed on the mounting surface in order to branch to each wiring pattern connected to the wiring pattern, the wiring pattern is formed simply.

The wiring pattern on the mounting surface side, which is connected through a through hole from the wiring pattern constituting the data bus on the soldering surface side, outputs an output signal to a second output component that outputs according to the progress of the game. It may be configured such that it is connected to terminals of two output circuits, and branched on the mounting surface, and the branched wiring pattern is connected to an output circuit for outputting an output signal according to the progress of the game to an external device. Even with such a configuration, it is desirable to use the wiring pattern on the mounting surface connected through the through-holes from the data bus formed on the soldering surface, so that the output corresponding to the progress of the game can be performed on the mounting surface side. By branching the wiring pattern connected to the second output circuit and the wiring pattern connected to the output circuit for outputting the output signal according to the progress of the game to the external device, it is connected to a plurality of output circuits. Since it is not necessary to branch to the soldering surface side from the data bus formed on the mounting surface for branching to each wiring pattern, the wiring pattern can be formed simply.

Among the input circuits, the second input circuit is not connected to the data bus and transmits input data directly to the game control microcomputer without going through the data bus. As shown in FIG. 30-21, the wiring pattern connected to the terminal of the game control microcomputer on the mounting surface is connected to the wiring pattern on the solder surface side through the through hole once at the position of T in the figure, U in the figure It is connected to the wiring pattern on the mounting surface side again through the through hole at the position of , and is connected to the terminal of the second input circuit.

Thus, the first input circuit for detecting the input of the input signal from the first input component, which is relatively less important among the input components used for game control, communicates with the game control microcomputer via the data bus. A second input circuit that is connected but detects input of an input signal from a second input component having higher importance than the first input component is not connected to the data bus and is directly connected without going through the data bus. It is designed to be connected to a game control microcomputer, and the input data based on the input signal from the second input component is transmitted through the data bus through which the input data from other input circuits and the output data to the output circuit are transmitted. Since it is transmitted to the game control microcomputer without intermediary, the input data based on the important input signal is transmitted to the game control microcomputer without being affected by the input data from other input circuits or the output data to the output circuit. It will be transmitted.

(Effect 6)
In the game control board of this embodiment, a data bus is formed for transmission of input data from the input circuit to the game control microcomputer and transmission of output data from the game control microcomputer to the output circuit. The input circuit is characterized in that it is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than the output circuit. According to such a configuration, the input circuit for transmitting the input data based on the input signal from the electronic component (input component) used for controlling the game control microcomputer to the game control microcomputer is the game control microcomputer Since the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than the output circuit that outputs the output signal to the electronic component (output component) based on the output data transmitted from the data bus, Data can be prevented from being affected by noise or the like.

The game control board of this embodiment is configured such that the input circuit is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than the output circuit. It may be configured to be connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than, and with such a configuration, based on the output data transmitted from the game control microcomputer An output circuit that outputs an output signal to an electronic component (output component) transmits input data based on an input signal from an electronic component (input component) used to control the game control microcomputer to the game control microcomputer. Since the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than the input circuit, it is possible to prevent the output data from being affected by noise or the like.

In the game control board of this embodiment, a data bus is formed which is shared for transmission of input data from the input circuit to the game control microcomputer and transmission of output data from the game control microcomputer to the output circuit. a first output circuit for outputting an output signal to a first output component that operates a movable portion according to the progress of a game based on output data transmitted from a game control microcomputer; a second output circuit for outputting an output signal to a second output component that displays according to the progress of the game based on the output data transmitted from the game control microcomputer, the first output circuit comprising: It is characterized in that it is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than the second output circuit. According to such a configuration, the first output circuit that outputs the output signal to the first output component that operates the movable portion according to the progress of the game outputs the second output that displays according to the progress of the game. Since the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than the second output circuit that outputs the output signal to the part, the output data is affected by noise etc. It is possible to prevent the operation of the movable part according to the progress from being affected.

In addition, the game control board of the present embodiment is configured such that the first output circuit is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than that of the second output circuit. The output circuit may be connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than the first output circuit. A second output circuit that outputs an output signal to a second output component that performs display, and a first output circuit that outputs an output signal to a first output component that operates a movable portion according to the progress of a game. Also, since the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is connected to the data bus so as to be short, it is possible to prevent the output data from being affected by noise, etc., and affecting the display according to the progress of the game. can.

Also, like the game control board of the first embodiment, a first ground area where low voltage components are mounted is formed on the left side where the game control microcomputer is arranged, and a first ground area where high voltage components are mounted on the right side. When two ground areas are formed, the first output circuit that outputs an output signal to the first output component that operates the movable portion according to the progress of the game often belongs to the high voltage component. The second output circuit, which is mounted in the second ground area and outputs an output signal to the second output part that displays according to the progress of the game, is often mounted in the first ground area because it belongs to the low voltage parts. The Rukoto. In such a configuration, the second output circuit is configured to be connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than the first output circuit, and the second output circuit is connected to the first ground. By mounting the second output circuit in the area, it is not necessary to mount the second output circuit, which is a low-voltage component, in the second ground area together with the first output circuit, which is a high-voltage component, thereby preventing a load from being applied to the second output circuit. can.

In the game control board of this embodiment, a data bus is formed which is shared for transmission of input data from the input circuit to the game control microcomputer and transmission of output data from the game control microcomputer to the output circuit. Electronic parts are mounted only on the mounting surface, and a data bus is formed on the soldering surface, and the wiring pattern on the mounting surface connected from the data bus through through holes is used to output output according to the progress of the game on the mounting surface. The wiring pattern is branched into a wiring pattern connected to a second output circuit for playing the game and a wiring pattern connected to an external output terminal for outputting an output signal according to the progress of the game to an external device. According to such a configuration, the second output for outputting according to the progress of the game on the mounting surface side using the wiring pattern on the mounting surface connected through the through holes from the data bus formed on the solder surface. Since the wiring pattern connected to the circuit and the wiring pattern connected to the external output terminal for outputting the output signal according to the progress of the game to the external device are branched, in order to branch to each of these wiring patterns Since there is no need to branch from the data bus formed on the soldering surface to the mounting surface side, the wiring pattern can be formed simply.

In the game control board of this embodiment, a data bus is formed which is shared for transmission of input data from the input circuit to the game control microcomputer and transmission of output data from the game control microcomputer to the output circuit. A first input circuit for transmitting input data based on an input signal from a first input component used for controlling the game control microcomputer to the game control microcomputer, and a first input circuit used for controlling the game control microcomputer A second input circuit that transmits input data based on the input signal from the 2 input components to the game control microcomputer, and a first output component and a second output component based on the output data transmitted from the game control microcomputer It includes a first output circuit and a second output circuit that output an output signal, and the first input circuit, the first output circuit and the second output circuit are connected to a game control microcomputer via a data bus. , the second input circuit is characterized in that it is connected to a game control microcomputer without a data bus. According to such a configuration, the input data based on the input signal from the second input component is used for game control without passing through the data bus through which the input data from other input circuits and the output data to the output circuit are transmitted. Since it is transmitted to the microcomputer, the input data based on the important input signal can be transmitted to the game control microcomputer without being affected by the input data from other input circuits or the output data to the output circuit. .

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that electronic components are mounted only on the mounting surface and a data bus is formed on the solder surface. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the data bus from being affected by noise from electronic components.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that the data bus, the input circuit and the output circuit are connected to each other by a branched wiring pattern on the mounting surface opposite to the soldering surface on which the data bus is formed through through-holes. and According to such a configuration, since the distance of the wiring pattern from the data bus to the input circuit and the output circuit is shortened, the influence of noise can be reduced.

In the game control board of this embodiment, connectors (connectors CN10 to CN17) for attaching wiring from the outside of the board are mounted near one side (upper side), and the data bus faces one side of the game control board. It is characterized in that it is formed in a region closer to the other side (lower side) than the other side. According to such a configuration, an area for mounting electronic components such as an input circuit and an output circuit can be secured between the connectors (connectors CN10 to CN17) and the data bus, so that the substrate area can be effectively utilized. .

In the game control board of this embodiment, a performance indicator for displaying the performance of the gaming machine is mounted, and the third output circuit for outputting an output signal to the performance indicator outputs an output signal to another indicator. It is characterized in that it is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than the output second output circuit. According to such a configuration, the third output circuit that outputs the output signal to the performance display device, the second output circuit that outputs the output signal to the other display device to the game control microcomputer Since the wiring pattern is short, it is possible to make it difficult to modify display contents by arranging illegal parts.

The game control board of the present embodiment is characterized in that the input circuit and the output circuit are mounted so that the component orientations are different. According to such a configuration, it is possible to easily grasp the difference between the input circuit and the output circuit.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that the data bus is connected to the noise elimination circuit at a position closer to the game control microcomputer than the input circuit and the output circuit. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the influence of noise on the game control microcomputer.

Although the second embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to this second embodiment, and any changes or additions within the scope of the present invention are included in the present invention. Needless to say. Also, the same or similar configuration as the first embodiment has the same effects as those described in the first embodiment. Further, the modified example exemplified for the first embodiment can also be applied to the second embodiment.

The structure of the game control board in Example 3 will be described. As in the first and second embodiments, the game control board has electronic parts mounted on one side, no electronic parts mounted on the other side, and terminals of the electronic parts are soldered. It should be noted that the game control board in Example 3 is characterized by the structure of the mounted electronic components and the through holes, and here, the structure of the electronic components and the through holes will be described.

30-23 are perspective views showing the structure of the specific electronic component mounted on the game control board in Example 3, (A) is a perspective view from above of the specific electronic component, and (B) is a , and a perspective view from below of the specific electronic component.

The specified electronic component is a relatively large electronic component such as a key switch, and below the specified electronic component, as shown in FIGS. For the purpose, fixing terminals 1 and 2 that are not used to propagate signals and power of the specific electronic component, connection terminals that are connected to the wiring pattern of the substrate and are used to propagate signals and power of the specific electronic component, is provided. Moreover, the model number of the specific electronic component is stamped or printed above the fixing terminals 1 and 2 on the side surface of the specific electronic component.

In this embodiment, a key switch having both a fixing terminal and a connection terminal is exemplified as the specific electronic component, but other electronic components may be applied as the specific electronic component. An electronic component having only connection terminals without fixing terminals may be applied as the specific electronic component.

The through-holes provided in the game control board consist of normal through-holes and specific through-holes. As shown in Fig. 30-24(A), a normal through-hole is plated with copper, which is a conductor, from the solder surface to the inner peripheral surface of the through-hole. It is a through hole that conducts with On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 30-24(B), a specific through-hole is a through-hole in which the inner peripheral surface of the through-hole is not copper-plated and the through-hole does not conduct between the mounting surface and the soldering surface. be.

Normally, when soldering to the through-hole from the soldering surface side, as shown in Fig. 30-24(A), since the inside of the through-hole is copper-plated, the solder inside the through-hole does not reach the mounting surface. Although it will flow up, when soldering to a specific through hole from the soldering surface side, as shown in FIG. The solder does not flow up and the solder does not reach the mounting surface.

In this embodiment, the specific electronic component is fixed by inserting the fixing terminals 1 and 2 through the specific through holes, inserting the connection terminals through the normal through holes, and soldering them from the solder surface side.

In this way, the fixing terminals 1 and 2 are inserted through the specific through holes and fixed by soldering from the soldering surface side, so that the solder does not reach the mounting surface. It is possible to prevent troubles such as the model number printed or stamped above the fixing terminals 1 and 2 being hidden by the solder due to excessive rise to the mounting surface side where the component is mounted.

In particular, if the model number is hidden by solder, even if the part is illegally replaced, there is a risk that it will not be discovered. Also, if the model number is hidden in the model test, it will not be possible to specify the component configuration, and the test will not be approved. There is a risk that the terminal will not be able to receive the terminal, or that installation at the amusement arcade will not be approved because the model number cannot be confirmed at the time of installation at the amusement arcade. Such a problem can be prevented by fixing with .

On the other hand, since the fixing terminals 1 and 2 are terminals that are not used for transmitting signals or electric power of specific electronic components, problems arise even if the electrical connection is weakened when they are soldered to the specific through-holes. never On the other hand, the connection terminals are usually inserted through the through-holes and fixed by soldering from the solder surface side, so that the solder reaches the mounting surface to ensure electrical connection.

(Effect 7)
In the game control board of this embodiment, a plurality of electronic components are mounted on the mounting surface of the mounting surface and the soldering surface, and wiring patterns are formed on the mounting surface and the soldering surface. A specific through-hole is formed in which a specific electronic component among a plurality of electronic components is fixed by inserting a terminal into the through-hole penetrating the surface and the soldering surface and soldering the through-hole and the terminal, The specific through-hole is characterized in that the solder surface of the mounting surface does not conduct and the solder does not reach the mounting surface when the terminal of the specific electronic component is soldered from the solder surface. According to such a configuration, the specific through-hole does not allow electrical continuity between the mounting surface and the soldering surface, and when the terminal of the specific electronic component is soldered from the soldering surface, the solder does not reach the mounting surface. In this case, it is possible to prevent the solder from rising too much toward the mounting surface on which the electronic component is mounted and causing a problem.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that the terminals for fixing the specific electronic parts (fixing terminals 1 and 2) are inserted into the specific through holes and soldered. According to such a configuration, the specific through-holes are soldered to the specific through-holes for fixing the specific electronic component (fixing terminals 1 and 2), so that the solder reaches the mounting surface. By not doing so, problems do not occur even if the electrical connection becomes weak.

In addition, the game control board of the present embodiment has a configuration in which the terminals (fixing terminals 1 and 2) for fixing the specific electronic parts are inserted into the specific through holes and soldered. Terminals (connecting terminals) that propagate signals and power of components may be inserted and soldered. It is possible to prevent problems caused by short-circuiting of a terminal that propagates a signal or power of a specific electronic component with another terminal.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that the model number of the specific electronic component is displayed (printed or stamped) above the terminals (fixing terminals 1 and 2). According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the model number of the specific electronic part from being hidden due to excessive solder rising to the mounting surface side where the electronic component is mounted.

Although the third embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to this third embodiment, and any changes or additions within the scope of the present invention are included in the present invention. Needless to say. In addition, the same or similar configurations as those of the first and second embodiments have the same effects as those described in the first and second embodiments. Moreover, the modifications illustrated in the first and second embodiments are also applicable to the third embodiment.

(Invention of characteristic part 053SG)
As described above, the characteristic portion 053SG includes the following inventions. That is, conventionally, for example, as described in JP-A-2016-93428, etc., game machines such as pachinko game machines and slot machines generally include a board on which electronic devices are mounted, A substrate of this type has been proposed in which data is input/output using a single data bus between control means such as a CPU and other electronic equipment. In this type of substrate, there are various problems regarding the design of wiring patterns. Therefore, for the purpose of providing a game machine in which the wiring pattern of the substrate is preferably formed, the game machine of (1) of the characteristic part 053SG is
A game machine capable of playing,
Control means (game control microcomputer) and electronic components (input components) used for controlling the control means (game control microcomputer) Input data based on input signals from the control means (game control microcomputer) ), and an output circuit that outputs an output signal to an electronic component (output component) based on the output data transmitted from the control means (game control microcomputer) is mounted. , equipped with a board (game control board) on which a wiring pattern is formed,
The wiring pattern is shared for transmission of input data from the input circuit to the control means (game control microcomputer) and transmission of output data from the control means (game control microcomputer) to the output circuit. including a data bus that
The input circuit is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the control means (game control microcomputer) is shorter than the output circuit.
According to this feature, the input circuit that transmits input data based on the input signal from the electronic component used for controlling the control means to the control means outputs to the electronic component based on the output data transmitted from the control means. Since the data bus is connected so that the wiring pattern to the control means is shorter than the output circuit for outputting the signal, it is possible to prevent the input data from being affected by noise or the like.

The gaming machine of (2) of the characteristic part 053SG is the gaming machine according to (1),
The board (game control board) is characterized in that electronic components are mounted only on the first surface (mounting surface), and the data bus is formed on the second surface (solder surface).
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the influence of noise from electronic components on the data bus.

The gaming machine of (3) of the characteristic part 053SG is the gaming machine according to (1) or (2),
The data bus, the input circuit, and the output circuit are connected through a through-hole to a surface (mounting surface) opposite to the surface on which the data bus is formed (solder surface) by a branched wiring pattern. Characterized by
According to this feature, since the distance of the wiring pattern from the data bus to the input circuit and the output circuit is shortened, the influence of noise can be reduced.
The gaming machine of (4) of the characteristic part 053SG is the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3),
Connectors (connectors CN10 to CN17) for attaching wiring from the outside of the board are mounted near one side (upper side) of the board (game control board), and the data bus is connected to the board (game control board). It is characterized in that it is formed in a region near the other side (lower side) opposite to the one side of the control board).
According to this feature, since an area for mounting electronic components such as an input circuit and an output circuit can be secured between the connector and the data bus, the board area can be effectively utilized.

The gaming machine of (5) of the characteristic part 053SG is the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (4),
A performance indicator for displaying the performance of the game machine is mounted on the board (game control board),
The output circuit (third output circuit) that outputs an output signal to the performance indicator is more likely than the output circuit (second output circuit) that outputs an output signal to another indicator. (microcomputer) is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern is short.
According to this feature, the output circuit for outputting the output signal to the performance indicator has a shorter wiring pattern to the control means than the output circuit for outputting the output signal to the other indicators. It is possible to make it difficult to illegally alter the display content by arranging the

The gaming machine of (6) of the characteristic part 053SG is the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5),
The input circuit and the output circuit are mounted on the board so that the components are oriented in different directions.
According to this feature, it is possible to easily grasp the difference between the input circuit and the output circuit.

The gaming machine of (7) of the characteristic part 053SG is the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (6),
The data bus is connected to the noise elimination circuit at a position closer to the control means (game control microcomputer) than the input circuit and the output circuit.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the influence of noise on the control means.

The game machine of (8) of the characteristic part 053SG is
A game machine capable of playing,
Control means (game control microcomputer) and electronic components (input components) used for controlling the control means (game control microcomputer) Input data based on input signals from the control means (game control microcomputer) ), and an output circuit that outputs an output signal to an electronic component (output component) based on the output data transmitted from the control means (game control microcomputer) is mounted. , equipped with a board (game control board) on which a wiring pattern is formed,
The wiring pattern is shared for transmission of input data from the input circuit to the control means (game control microcomputer) and transmission of output data from the control means (game control microcomputer) to the output circuit. including a data bus that
The output circuit outputs to the first electronic component (first output component) that operates the movable portion according to the progress of the game based on the output data transmitted from the control means (game control microcomputer) A first output circuit (first output circuit) for outputting a signal, and a second electronic component (second a second output circuit (second output circuit) that outputs an output signal to the second output component),
The first output circuit (first output circuit) is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the control means (game control microcomputer) is shorter than the second output circuit (second output circuit) It is characterized by being
According to this feature, the first output circuit that outputs the output signal to the first electronic component that operates the movable portion according to the progress of the game is connected to the second electronic component that displays the display according to the progress of the game. On the other hand, since the wiring pattern to the control means is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the control means is shorter than the second output circuit that outputs the output signal, the output data is affected by noise etc. It is possible to prevent the operation of the unit from being affected.

The game machine of (9) of the characteristic part 053SG is
A game machine capable of playing,
Control means (game control microcomputer) and electronic components (input components) used for controlling the control means (game control microcomputer) Input data based on input signals from the control means (game control microcomputer) ), and an output circuit that outputs an output signal to an electronic component (output component) based on the output data transmitted from the control means (game control microcomputer) is mounted. , equipped with a board (game control board) on which a wiring pattern is formed,
The wiring pattern is shared for transmission of input data from the input circuit to the control means (game control microcomputer) and transmission of output data from the control means (game control microcomputer) to the output circuit. including a data bus that
The board (game control board) has electronic components mounted only on the first surface (mounting surface), and the data bus is formed on the second surface (solder surface), and is connected from the data bus through through holes. A first wiring pattern (wiring pattern connected to a second output circuit) for outputting the wiring pattern on the first surface (mounting surface) according to the progress of the game on the first surface (mounting surface). and a second wiring pattern (wiring pattern connected to the external output terminal) for outputting an output signal according to the progress of the game to an external device.
According to this feature, the wiring pattern on the first surface connected to the data bus formed on the second surface through the through-hole is used to output the output according to the progress of the game on the first surface side. Since the output signal corresponding to the wiring pattern and the progress of the game is branched to the second wiring pattern for outputting to the external device, it is formed on the second surface to branch to the first wiring pattern and the second wiring pattern respectively. Since there is no need to branch the data bus to the first surface side, the wiring pattern can be formed simply.

The game machine of (10) of the characteristic part 053SG is
A game machine capable of playing,
Control means (game control microcomputer) and electronic components (input components) used for controlling the control means (game control microcomputer) Input data based on input signals from the control means (game control microcomputer) ), and an output circuit that outputs an output signal to an electronic component (output component) based on the output data transmitted from the control means (game control microcomputer) is mounted. , equipped with a board (game control board) on which a wiring pattern is formed,
The wiring pattern is shared for transmission of input data from the input circuit to the control means (game control microcomputer) and transmission of output data from the control means (game control microcomputer) to the output circuit. including a data bus that
A first input for transmitting input data based on an input signal from a first electronic component (first input component) used for controlling the control means (game control microcomputer) to the control means (game control microcomputer) Input data based on input signals from a circuit (first input circuit) and a second electronic component (second input component) used for controlling the control means (game control microcomputer) is transmitted to the control means (game control Based on the output data transmitted from the second input circuit (second input circuit) and the control means (game control microcomputer) transmitted to the microcomputer), the third electronic component (first output component, second output an output circuit (first output circuit, second output circuit) that outputs an output signal to the component),
The first input circuit (first input circuit) and the output circuit (first output circuit, second output circuit) are connected to the control means (game control microcomputer) via the data bus,
The second input circuit (second input circuit) is connected to the control means (game control microcomputer) without passing through the data bus.
According to this feature, the input data based on the input signal from the second electronic component is transmitted to the control means without passing through the data bus through which the input data from other input circuits and the output data to the output circuit are transmitted. Therefore, input data based on important input signals can be transmitted to the control means without being affected by input data from other input circuits or output data to the output circuit.

The game machine of (11) of the characteristic part 053SG is
A game machine capable of playing,
Input data based on input signals from control means (game control microcomputer) and electronic components (input components) used for controlling the control means (game control microcomputer) to the control means (game control microcomputer) ), and an output circuit that outputs an output signal to an electronic component (output component) based on the output data transmitted from the control means (game control microcomputer) is mounted. , equipped with a board (game control board) on which a wiring pattern is formed,
The wiring pattern is shared for transmission of input data from the input circuit to the control means (game control microcomputer) and transmission of output data from the control means (game control microcomputer) to the output circuit. including a data bus that
The output circuit is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the control means (game control microcomputer) is shorter than the input circuit.
According to this feature, the output circuit for outputting an output signal to the electronic component based on the output data transmitted from the control means outputs the input data based on the input signal from the electronic component used for controlling the control means. Since the wiring pattern to the control means is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the control means is shorter than the input circuit for transmission to the control means, it is possible to prevent the output data from being affected by noise or the like.

The gaming machine (12) of the characteristic part 053SG is
A game machine capable of playing,
Control means (game control microcomputer) and electronic components (input components) used for controlling the control means (game control microcomputer) Input data based on input signals from the control means (game control microcomputer) ), and an output circuit that outputs an output signal to an electronic component (output component) based on the output data transmitted from the control means (game control microcomputer) is mounted. , equipped with a board (game control board) on which a wiring pattern is formed,
The wiring pattern is shared for transmission of input data from the input circuit to the control means (game control microcomputer) and transmission of output data from the control means (game control microcomputer) to the output circuit. including a data bus that
The output circuit outputs to the first electronic component (first output component) that operates the movable portion according to the progress of the game based on the output data transmitted from the control means (game control microcomputer) A first output circuit (first output circuit) for outputting a signal, and a second electronic component (second a second output circuit (second output circuit) that outputs an output signal to the second output component),
The second output circuit (second output circuit) is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the control means (game control microcomputer) is shorter than the first output circuit (first output circuit) It is characterized by being
According to this feature, the second output circuit for outputting an output signal to the second electronic component that performs display according to the progress of the game is connected to the first electronic component that operates the movable portion according to the progress of the game. On the other hand, since the wiring pattern to the control means is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the control means is shorter than the first output circuit for outputting the output signal, the output data is affected by noise and the like, so that the display corresponding to the progress of the game is displayed. can be prevented from affecting

In the above embodiment, the pachinko game machine 1 is exemplified as an example of the game machine, but the present invention is not limited to this. The number of balls circulated and lent out according to the player's request for lending and the number of prize balls awarded according to winning are added, while the number of game balls used in the game is subtracted. The present invention can also be applied to a so-called enclosed game machine. Since scores and points are given to the player instead of game balls in these enclosed type game machines, the given scores and points correspond to game value.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a spherical game ball (pachinko ball) is used as an example of the game medium, but the game medium is not limited to a spherical game medium. It may be a medium.

Further, in the above embodiment, a pachinko gaming machine is used as an example of a gaming machine. In addition, one game is completed by deriving a variable display result to a variable display device capable of variable display of a plurality of types of individually identifiable symbols, and according to the variable display result derived to the variable display device. It can also be applied to slot machines in which prizes can be generated.

The gaming machine of the present invention can also be applied to enclosed gaming machines, slot machines, etc., in which game media are enclosed and points are awarded based on the occurrence of winnings. Also, the gaming machine capable of playing a game is at least one that performs a game, and is not limited to a pachinko gaming machine or a slot machine, and may be a general gaming machine.

The present invention is not limited to what has been described above. In addition to the above-described embodiment and other embodiments described later, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if it is modified or added without departing from the scope of the present invention.

Moreover, among the configurations shown in the above-described embodiment and each modified example, and the configurations shown in later-described embodiment examples and each modified example, all or part of the configurations may be arbitrarily combined.

In addition, it should be considered that the above-mentioned embodiment disclosed this time and the below-mentioned form are examples in all respects, and are not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the scope of the claims rather than the above description and the description below, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the scope of the claims.

The gaming machine of the present invention also includes a gaming machine (eg, pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of playing a game, and a storage section (eg, a ball tank) capable of storing game media (eg, game balls P). a forming unit 201), a payout unit (for example, a payout device 200) capable of paying out game media, and a guide passage (for example, a second 1 guiding passage and second guiding passage), and a guide passage forming portion (for example, a first guiding passage forming portion 202 and a second guiding passage forming portion 204), and a part of the upper surface of the guiding passage forming portion. and a cover portion (for example, the first cover body 310, the second cover body 320, and the third cover body 330) provided on the cover portion, and a screw member (for example, a screw Predetermined limiting portions (for example, long holes 316A to 316C, concave grooves 326A to 326C, concave portions 336) are provided for limiting the dropping of the members N1 to N6, N11 to N16) into the guide passage forming portion (FIG. 22). , FIG. 24), a plurality of specific restricting portions (for example, holes 271A to 271H) are provided in the guiding passage forming portion for restricting the movement of the screw member that has fallen into the guiding passage forming portion to the dispensing portion. (See FIGS. 11, 12, and 27), and the predetermined restriction portions (for example, long holes 316A to 316C, grooves 326A to 326C, and recess 336) retain game media that have fallen on the cover portion. Further, sound output means (for example, speakers 8L and 8R and voice synthesis IC079SG132 mounted on the voice control board 13, voice data ROM 079SG133, amplifier circuit 079SG134); display means (for example, image display device 5) capable of displaying a dynamic animation; Effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a predetermined effect (for example, ready-to-win effect) for outputting effect sound by sound output means, and the effect execution means is a first period of the predetermined effect In the above, it is possible to display on the display means an effect animation whose effect progress speed is the first speed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 40-19 to 40-25, a first reach effect, a second reach effect, The portion where the animation of each ready-to-win effect is displayed on the image display device 5 at the progress speed V1 during the first half execution period of each of the third ready-to-win effect and the fourth ready-to-win effect) , in a second period of the predetermined effect after the first period, the display means can display a effect moving image in which the progress speed of the effect is a second speed slower than the first speed (for example, FIG. As shown in 40-19 to FIG. 40-25, during the second half execution period of each of the first ready-to-reach effect, the second ready-to-reach effect, the third ready-to-reach effect, and the fourth ready-to-reach effect, the moving image of each ready-to-win effect progresses at a speed V2. The portion displayed on the image display device 5 in ), for the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect, the speed of the effect sound is set at the same speed in both the first period and the second period. It can be output by the sound output means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 40-19 to 40-25, the first half of each of the first ready-to-win effect, the second ready-to-win effect, the third ready-to-win effect, and the fourth ready-to-win effect During the period and during the execution period of the second half, BGM and effect sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R at the normal reproduction speed of V4.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen on the cover portion from falling into the guide passage forming portion. Further, it is possible to prevent the threaded member that has entered the guide passage forming portion from entering the delivery portion. In addition, since the game medium does not stay in the predetermined restricting portion and the screw member can be kept in a state where it can always stay, the screw member that has fallen on the cover portion is prevented from falling into the guide passage forming portion. can do. Further, although the progress speed of the effect animation of the predetermined effect changes between the first period and the second period, the speed of the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect does not change between the first period and the second period, so that the player can It is possible to prevent giving a sense of incongruity.

In other words, it is possible to make the game machine less likely to break down by preventing the screw member from falling and being mixed into the guide passage forming portion and the payout portion, and to prevent the speed of the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect from changing. As a result, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is less likely to give the player a sense of discomfort. That is, it is possible to provide a game machine that is less likely to break down when installed in a game arcade and less likely to give the player a sense of discomfort.

Furthermore, as an example of a form of a game machine that can prevent the screw member from falling and being mixed in the guide passage forming part and the payout part, and that does not give the player a sense of discomfort in the performance, a game machine that can be played ( For example, pachinko game machine 1), sound output means capable of outputting effect sound (for example, IC079SG132 for voice synthesis mounted on speakers 8L and 8R and voice control board 13, voice data ROM079SG133, amplifier circuit 079SG134) a display means (for example, an image display device 5) capable of displaying a dynamic animation; and a dynamic animation of a character is displayed on the display means, and a dynamic sound is generated by the sound output means in accordance with the display of the dynamic animation of the character. Effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a predetermined effect (for example, ready-to-win effect) to be output. It is possible to display the effect animation that is the first speed on the display means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 40-19 to 40-25, the first reach effect, the second reach effect, the During the execution period of the first half of each ready-to-win effect, the animation of each ready-to-win effect is displayed on the image display device 5 at the progress speed V1), in the second period of the predetermined effect after the first period , the effect moving image whose progress speed of the effect is a second speed slower than the first speed can be displayed on the display means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 40-19 to 40-25, the first reach effect , the part where the animation of each ready-to-win effect is displayed on the image display device 5 at the progress speed V2 during the execution period of the latter half of each of the second ready-to-win effect, the third ready-to-win effect, and the fourth ready-to-win effect), the predetermined effect With respect to the effect sound corresponding to , the speed of the effect sound can be output by the sound output means at the same speed in both the first period and the second period (for example, FIG. 40-19 to FIG. As shown in 40-25, during the first half performance period and the second half performance period of each of the first reach performance, the second reach performance, the third reach performance, and the fourth reach performance, BGM and the like are played from the speakers 8L and 8R. A part) game machine in which the effect sound is output at V4, which is the normal reproduction speed, can be mentioned. An example of the form of these gaming machines will be described below as another form.

[form]
The game machine of form A1 is
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of playing,
Sound output means capable of outputting dramatic sound (for example, IC079SG132 for voice synthesis mounted on speakers 8L and 8R and voice control board 13, voice data ROM079SG133, amplifier circuit 079SG134);
Display means (for example, image display device 5) capable of displaying effect moving images;
Effect executing means (for example, Production control CPU 120) and
with
The production executing means is
In the first period of the predetermined effect, the effect moving image whose progress speed of the effect is the first speed can be displayed on the display means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 40-19 to 40-25, the first reach During the execution period of the first half of each of the production, the second ready-to-reach production, the third ready-to-reach production, and the fourth ready-to-reach production, the animation of each ready-to-reach production is displayed on the image display device 5 at the progress speed V1),
In the second period of the predetermined effect after the first period, the effect moving image in which the progress speed of the effect is a second speed slower than the first speed can be displayed on the display means (for example, FIG. 40 -19 to FIG. 40-25, during the second half execution period of each of the first reach effect, the second reach effect, the third reach effect, and the fourth reach effect, the animation of each reach effect moves to the progress speed V2 the part displayed on the image display device 5),
Regarding the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect, the speed of the effect sound can be output by the sound output means at the same speed in both the first period and the second period (for example, FIG. 40- 19 to FIG. 40-25, during the first half execution period and the second half execution period of the first reach effect, the second reach effect, the third reach effect, and the fourth reach effect, the speakers 8L and 8R (The part where BGM and production sounds are output at V4, which is the normal playback speed)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the progress speed of the effect animation of the predetermined effect changes between the first period and the second period, but the speed of the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect does not change between the first period and the second period. , it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

The gaming machine of form A2 is the gaming machine according to form A1,
The sound output means includes a reproduction circuit (for example, an IC079SG132 for speech synthesis) that reproduces sound, an amplifier circuit (for example, an amplifier circuit 079SG134) that amplifies the sound reproduced by the reproduction circuit, and a sound that is amplified by the amplifier circuit. and speakers (for example, speakers 8L and 8R) that output sound.
According to this feature, the highly reproducible effect sound can be output from the speaker at an appropriate volume.

The gaming machine of form A3 is the gaming machine according to form A1 or form A2,
The effect executing means can output the speed of the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect by the sound output means during a predetermined period of the second period at the same speed as the first period, and In a specific period after the period, it is possible to output by the sound output means at a speed different from that in the first period (for example, as shown in modification 079SG-1, first reach effect, second reach effect, first In the first half of each reach performance second half execution period of the third reach performance and fourth reach performance, the speaker is the same as the first half of each reach performance execution period of the first reach performance, second reach performance, third reach performance, and fourth reach performance. While the effect sound is output from 8L and 8R at the reproduction speed V4, in the latter half of each reach effect latter half execution period of the first reach effect, the second reach effect, the third reach effect, and the fourth reach effect, V4. The part that outputs the effect sound at a different playback speed (for example, V5, which is slower than the playback speed V4)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the speed of the sound effect can be changed for a specific period of the second period in which the moving picture effect is displayed at the second speed, so that the effect of the sound effect corresponding to the predetermined effect can be improved. Therefore, the game interest can be improved.

The gaming machine of form A4 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A3,
The effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect includes music and sound effects (for example, a portion capable of outputting BGM (music) and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R).
According to this feature, the entertainment of the game can be improved by the production sound including the music and the sound effect.

The gaming machine of form A5 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A4,
A light emitting means (for example, a game effect lamp 9) capable of emitting light in at least the first period and the second period and capable of changing the light emitting mode,
The effect executing means can change the light emitting mode of the light emitting means in the second period at a period shorter than that in the first period (for example, FIGS. 40-20, 40-21, 40-24, and As shown in 40-25, during the execution period of the second reach production second half and during the execution period of the second reach production second half part execution period, each execution period of the first reach production, the second reach production, the third reach production and the fourth The part where the game effect lamp 9 blinks at a period shorter than the execution period of the first half of the ready-to-win effect)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the change period of the light emission mode of the light emitting means becomes shorter (faster) in the second period in which the speed of progress of the presentation is slow, so that the presentation effect in the second period can be improved.

The gaming machine of form A6 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A5,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing variable display of identification information and capable of playing games,
Sound output means capable of outputting dramatic sound (for example, IC079SG132 for voice synthesis mounted on speakers 8L and 8R and voice control board 13, voice data ROM079SG133, amplifier circuit 079SG134);
As display areas that can display effect moving images, a first display area (for example, the first display area 079SG005F shown in FIG. 40-2 (A)) and a second display area closer to the periphery than the first display area (for example, , second display area 079SG005Sa);
a predetermined effect (e.g., ready-to-win effect) in which a character effect animation is displayed in the first display area and a effect sound is output by the sound output means in accordance with the display of the character effect animation; Information production that operates information display related to variable display (for example, rotating display of the reserved display in the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D and the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U shown in FIG. 40-2 (B), 2 (C) telop movement display in the telop display area 079SG005T) effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120) capable of executing,
with
The production executing means is
In the first period of the predetermined effect, the effect moving image whose progress speed of the effect is the first speed can be displayed on the display means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 40-19 to 40-25, the first reach During the execution period of the first half of each of the production, the second ready-to-reach production, the third ready-to-reach production, and the fourth ready-to-reach production, the animation of each ready-to-reach production is displayed on the image display device 5 at the progress speed V1),
In the second period of the predetermined effect after the first period, the effect moving image in which the progress speed of the effect is a second speed slower than the first speed can be displayed on the display means (for example, FIG. 40 -19 to FIG. 40-25, during the second half execution period of each of the first reach effect, the second reach effect, the third reach effect, and the fourth reach effect, the animation of each reach effect moves to the progress speed V2 the part displayed on the image display device 5),
Regarding the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect, the speed of the effect sound can be output by the sound output means at the same speed in both the first period and the second period (for example, FIG. 40- 19 to FIG. 40-25, during the first half execution period and the second half execution period of the first reach effect, the second reach effect, the third reach effect, and the fourth reach effect, the speakers 8L and 8R From the part where BGM and production sounds are output at normal playback speed V4),
Regarding the information effect, it is possible to execute the information effect in which the information display is operated at the same operation speed in both the first period and the second period (for example, FIGS. 40-19 to 40- As shown in 25, during the first half execution period and the second half execution period of each of the first ready-to-win effect, the second ready-to-win effect, the third ready-to-win effect, and the fourth ready-to-win effect, the rotating display of the pending display is rotated at a rotation speed of V3. , the part where the moving display of the telop is displayed at the moving speed V3)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the progress speed of the effect moving image of the predetermined effect changes between the first period and the second period, but the operating speed of the information display and the speed of the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect change between the first period and the second period. Since it does not change with the period, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

The gaming machine of form A7 is the gaming machine according to form A6,
The total area of the first display region is larger than the total area of the second display region (for example, as shown in FIG. A portion larger than the combined area of the area of and the third display area 079SG005Sb)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the player can more easily recognize the predetermined effect than the information effect, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of form A8 is the gaming machine according to form A6 or form A7,
The effect executing means can execute an information effect that always operates the information display at the same operating speed during at least a period during which variable display is being performed other than the first period and the second period (for example, FIG. 40). -18 to FIG. 40-25, in the period other than during the ready-to-win effect, the rotating display of the suspended display is executed at the rotation speed V3 in the first suspended memory display area 079SG005D and the second suspended memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop In the display area 079SG005T, the moving display of the telop is executed at the moving speed V3)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the operation speed of the information display does not change, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming difficult to recognize the information presentation.

The gaming machine of form A9 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A6 to A8,
The information effect is a moving display effect for sequentially moving and displaying the information display suggesting the state of the effect in the variable display being executed in the second display area (for example, moving display of a message corresponding to the game state in the telop display area 079SG005T). the part that executes
The effect executing means can execute a moving display effect for moving and displaying the information display so that at least part of the information display is always visible to the player (for example, in FIG. 40-2(C) As shown, the characters included in the message in the telop display area 079SG005T reach the right end of the telop display area 079SG005T and are displayed again at the left end of the telop display area 079SG005T at the same time they are displayed again to the left. (the part that is moved to the right from
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since at least part of the information display is always visible to the player, the player can easily recognize that the moving display effect is being executed.

The gaming machine of form A10 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A9,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of playing,
Sound output means capable of outputting dramatic sounds, such as speakers 8L and 8R and voice synthesis IC079SG132, voice data ROM079SG133, amplifier circuit 079SG134 mounted on voice control board 13,
Display means (for example, image display device 5) capable of displaying effect moving images;
Benefit granting means (eg, CPU 103) that grants benefits (eg, jackpot gaming state);
A predetermined effect (for example, ready-to-win effect) suggesting that a privilege is given by displaying the effect animation of the character on the display means and outputting the effect sound by the sound output means along with the display of the effect animation of the character. ) and a notification effect (for example, a big hit notification effect and a deviation notification effect) for notifying whether or not a privilege is given after the execution of the predetermined effect (for example, effect control CPU 120). ,
with
The production executing means is
In the first period of the predetermined effect, it is possible to display the effect moving image in which the progress speed of the effect is the first speed on the display means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 40-19 to 40-25, the first reach During the execution period of the first half of each of the production, the second ready-to-reach production, the third ready-to-reach production, and the fourth ready-to-reach production, the animation of each ready-to-reach production is displayed on the image display device 5 at the progress speed V1),
In the second period of the predetermined effect after the first period, the effect moving image whose progression speed of the effect is a second speed slower than the first speed can be displayed on the display means (for example, FIG. 40 -19 to FIG. 40-25, during the second half execution period of each of the first reach effect, the second reach effect, the third reach effect, and the fourth reach effect, the animation of each reach effect moves to the progress speed V2 the part displayed on the image display device 5),
Regarding the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect, the speed of the effect sound can be output by the sound output means at the same speed in both the first period and the second period (for example, FIG. 40- 19 to FIG. 40-25, during the first half execution period and the second half execution period of the first reach effect, the second reach effect, the third reach effect, and the fourth reach effect, the speakers 8L and 8R From the part where BGM and production sounds are output at normal playback speed V4),
During the second period, it is possible to execute an effect rendering that is different from the predetermined rendering and that enhances the rendering effect of the predetermined rendering (for example, FIGS. 40-20, 40-21, and As shown in 40-28, the part that executes the effect production of displaying the concentration line on the image display device 5 in the second reach production second half execution period)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the progress speed of the effect animation of the predetermined effect changes between the first period and the second period, but the speed of the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect does not change between the first period and the second period. Thus, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling a sense of incongruity, further enhance the performance effect in the second period, and allow the player to recognize by the effect performance that the second period is over and the notification performance is to be executed. can be done easily.

The gaming machine of form A11 is the gaming machine according to form A10,
The production executing means is
The effect rendering is performed in a plurality of modes with different degrees of effect for increasing the rendering effect of the predetermined rendering (for example, the mode in which the concentration line shown in FIG. 40-28 (C) is displayed, and the mode shown in FIG. 40-28 (D) As shown in FIG. 40-28 (C), it can be executed in a mode in which the number of displayed concentration lines is larger than that in FIG.
As the second period progresses from the start point to the end point, it is possible to execute the effect rendering in which the degree of effect of enhancing the rendering effect increases sequentially (for example, FIGS. 40-28 (C) and 40-28 ( As shown in D), the portion where the number of concentration lines displayed increases as the battle production progresses)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the mode of the effect production changes to a mode in which the degree of effect of increasing the effect of the predetermined production is successively increased, the execution of the notification production after the second period ends is played by the effect production. make it easier for people to recognize

The gaming machine of form A12 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A11,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing variable display of identification information and capable of playing games,
Sound output means capable of outputting dramatic sound (for example, IC079SG132 for voice synthesis mounted on speakers 8L and 8R and voice control board 13, voice data ROM079SG133, amplifier circuit 079SG134);
As display areas that can display effect moving images, a first display area (for example, the first display area 079SG005F shown in FIG. 40-2 (A)) and a second display area closer to the periphery than the first display area (for example, , second display area 079SG005Sa);
Benefit granting means (eg, CPU 103) that grants benefits (eg, jackpot gaming state);
A predetermined effect (for example, ready-to-reach effect), a notification effect for informing whether or not a privilege is given after the execution of the predetermined effect (for example, a big hit notification effect and a loss notification effect), and specific information related to variable display in the second display area Effect (for example, the rotating display of the pending display in the first pending memory display area 079SG005D and the second pending memory display area 079SG005U shown in FIG. 40-2 (B), and the telop display area 079SG005T shown in FIG. 40-2 (C) Effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120) capable of executing telop movement display),
with
The production executing means is
In the first period of the predetermined effect, a effect moving image whose progress speed of the effect is the first speed can be displayed in the first display area (for example, as shown in FIGS. 40-19 to 40-25, the During the first half execution period of each of the first reach performance, the second reach performance, the third reach performance, and the fourth reach performance, the animation of each reach performance is displayed on the image display device 5 at the progress speed V1),
In the second period of the predetermined effect after the first period, a effect moving image whose progression speed of the effect is a second speed slower than the first speed can be displayed in the first display area (for example, As shown in FIGS. 40-19 to 40-25, during the second half execution period of each of the first reach effect, the second reach effect, the third reach effect, and the fourth reach effect, the animation of each reach effect is progressing speed The part displayed on the image display device 5 in V2),
Regarding the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect, the speed of the effect sound can be output by the sound output means at the same speed in both the first period and the second period (for example, FIG. 40- 19 to FIG. 40-25, during the first half execution period and the second half execution period of the first reach effect, the second reach effect, the third reach effect, and the fourth reach effect, the speakers 8L and 8R From the part where BGM and production sounds are output at normal playback speed V4),
The notification effect can be executed in the first display area and the second display area (for example, FIGS. 40-26 (G), 40-29 (E), 40-30 (D), FIG. 40-31 (G), as shown in FIG. 40-35 (C), when the decorative symbols are stopped in a combination of the big hit as the big hit notification effect, the big hit occurs in the first display area 079SG005F and the second display area 079SG005Sa. The part that displays the image of the notification effect)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the progress speed of the effect animation of the predetermined effect changes between the first period and the second period, but the speed of the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect does not change between the first period and the second period. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling a sense of incompatibility, and furthermore, by executing the notification effect in a wide display area including the first display area and the second display area, it is possible to notify that the privilege has been given. It can be easily recognized by the player.

Form A13 is the gaming machine according to form A12,
The production executing means is
A first display that operates within the second display area (for example, a reserved display) and a second display that does not operate within the second display area (for example, a first reserved memory display area 079SG005D and a second reserved memory display area 079SG005U). ) can be displayed in the specific information presentation,
The notification effect can be executed in the second display area where the first display and the second display are erased (for example, FIGS. 40-26 (G), 40-29 (E), 40-30 (D), Figure 40-31 (G), Figure 40-35 (C), as shown in Figure 40-35 (C), when executing the jackpot notification effect, the suspension display and the first suspension storage display area 079SG005D, the second suspension storage display area 079SG005U and the telop display area 079SG005T are hidden, and the image of the big hit notification effect is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F and the second display area 079SG005Sa)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the notification effect is executed in the second display area in which not only the first display that operates but also the second display that does not operate are erased, so that the visibility of the notification effect in the second display area is further enhanced. be able to.

The gaming machine of form A14 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A13,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing variable display of identification information and capable of playing games,
Sound output means capable of outputting dramatic sound (for example, IC079SG132 for voice synthesis mounted on speakers 8L and 8R and voice control board 13, voice data ROM079SG133, amplifier circuit 079SG134);
As display areas capable of displaying effect moving images, a first display area (for example, first display area 079SG005F), a second display area closer to the periphery than the first display area (for example, second display area 079SG005Sa), a display means (for example, an image display device 5) including
Benefit granting means (eg, CPU 103) that grants benefits (eg, jackpot gaming state);
A predetermined effect (for example, a ready-to-win effect), a notification effect for notifying whether or not a privilege is awarded after the execution of the predetermined effect (for example, a big hit notification effect and a loss notification effect), and an information effect related to variable display in the second display area. (For example, the rotating display of the suspended display in the first suspended storage display area 079SG005D and the second suspended storage display area 079SG005U shown in FIG. 40-2 (B), or the telop in the telop display area 079SG005T shown in FIG. Effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120) capable of executing the movement display of
with
The display means can change the visibility of the first display area and the second display area (for example, as shown in the modification 079SG-2, in addition to the first display area 079SG005F, the second display area A portion that can reduce the visibility of the area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb),
The production executing means is
In the first period of the predetermined effect, a effect moving image whose progress speed of the effect is the first speed can be displayed in the first display area (for example, as shown in FIGS. 40-19 to 40-25, the A part where the animation of each ready-to-win effect is displayed on the image display device 5 at the progress speed V1 during the first half execution period of each of the first ready-to-win effect, the second ready-to-win effect, the third ready-to-win effect, and the fourth ready-to-win effect),
In the second period of the predetermined effect after the first period, a effect moving image whose progression speed of the effect is a second speed slower than the first speed can be displayed in the first display area (for example, As shown in FIGS. 40-19 to 40-25, during the second half execution period of each of the first reach effect, the second reach effect, the third reach effect, and the fourth reach effect, the animation of each reach effect progresses at a speed The part displayed on the image display device 5 in V2),
Regarding the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect, the speed of the effect sound can be output by the sound output means at the same speed in both the first period and the second period (for example, FIG. 40- 19 to FIG. 40-25, during the first half execution period and the second half execution period of the first reach effect, the second reach effect, the third reach effect, and the fourth reach effect, the speakers 8L and 8R From the part where BGM and production sounds are output at normal playback speed V4),
In the pre-notification period from the end of the predetermined effect to the execution of the notification effect, the visibility of the first display area changes but the visibility of the second display area does not change (for example, modification 079SG -2, as shown in FIGS. 40-36 and 40-37, the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F is reduced by the effect image 079SG005Ea, but the visibility of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb does not change. part)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the progress speed of the effect animation of the predetermined effect changes between the first period and the second period, but the speed of the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect does not change between the first period and the second period. In addition, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling a sense of incongruity, and the change in the visibility of the first display area in the pre-notification period allows the player to easily recognize the timing at which the notification effect is executed. Also, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming difficult to recognize the information presentation because the visibility of the second display area does not change.

Form A15 is the gaming machine according to form A14,
The display means is means capable of generating an image to be displayed, and includes a first drawing layer (for example, second image data) capable of drawing an image to be displayed in the first display area, and an image generation means (for example, display including a control unit 123),
The visibility of the first display area is changed by changing the visibility of the image drawn in the first drawing layer by the image generating means (for example, as shown in Modification 079SG-2, the second image data A portion that changes the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F by enlarging and displaying the effect image 079SG005Ea drawn as the image of
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to accurately change only the visibility of the first display area without changing the visibility of the second display area.

Form A16 is the gaming machine according to form A15,
The image generation means adjusts the visibility of the image to be drawn in the first drawing layer from a specific position away from the area corresponding to the second display area in the first drawing layer to the area corresponding to the second display area. over a predetermined period (for example, as shown in the modification 079SG-2, the effect image 079SG005Ea drawn as the image of the second image data is drawn from the center of the first display area 079SG005F to the second display area 079SG005Sa and a part that changes the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F by drawing so as to enlarge and display toward the third display area 079SG005Sb)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the change in visibility of the first rendering layer changes over a predetermined period from the specific position toward the area corresponding to the second display area. The visibility of the area can be made difficult to change.

Form A17 is a gaming machine according to any one of forms A14 to A16,
Equipped with motion detection means (for example, push button 31B) capable of detecting the motion of the player,
The production executing means is
It is possible to execute the notification effect based on the detection of the action of the player by the action detection means (for example, control to the big win game state based on the operation of the push button 31B by the player, or parts that can signal that they are not controlled by the state),
An action promoting effect (for example, an operation promoting effect) that prompts a player's action by displaying an action promoting image for executing the notification effect in the first display area is executable,
Although the visibility of the effect moving image of the predetermined effect is reduced, the visibility of the action promotion effect is not reduced (for example, the enlarged display of the effect image 079SG005Ea reduces the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F, but the visibility of the first image The part where the visibility of the operation prompting image 079SG005Ba and the meter 079SG005M displayed as an image of data does not decrease)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to make the action promoting effect stand out from the predetermined effect, so that the player can be effectively encouraged to perform the action.

Form A18 is a gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A17,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing variable display of identification information and capable of playing games,
Sound output means capable of outputting dramatic sound (for example, IC079SG132 for voice synthesis mounted on speakers 8L and 8R and voice control board 13, voice data ROM079SG133, amplifier circuit 079SG134);
As display areas capable of displaying effect moving images, a first display area (for example, the first display area 079SG005F shown in FIG. 40-2 (A)) and a second display area closer to the periphery than the first display area (for example, , second display area 079SG005Sa);
Benefit granting means (eg, CPU 103) that grants benefits (eg, jackpot gaming state);
A predetermined effect (for example, reach effect), a notification effect for informing whether or not a privilege is given after the end of the predetermined effect, and an information effect for operating information display related to variable display in the second display area (for example, FIG. 40- 2(B) shown in the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D and the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U rotating display of the reserved display, and movement display of the telop in the telop display area 079SG005T shown in FIG. Possible effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120),
with
The production executing means is
In the first period of the predetermined effect, a effect moving image whose progress speed of the effect is the first speed can be displayed in the first display area (for example, as shown in FIGS. 40-19 to 40-25, the A part where the animation of each ready-to-win effect is displayed on the image display device 5 at the progress speed V1 during the first half execution period of each of the first ready-to-win effect, the second ready-to-win effect, the third ready-to-win effect, and the fourth ready-to-win effect),
In the second period of the predetermined effect after the first period, a effect moving image whose progression speed of the effect is a second speed slower than the first speed can be displayed in the first display area (for example, As shown in FIGS. 40-19 to 40-25, during the second half execution period of each of the first reach effect, the second reach effect, the third reach effect, and the fourth reach effect, the animation of each reach effect progresses at a speed The part displayed on the image display device 5 in V2),
Regarding the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect, the speed of the effect sound can be output by the sound output means at the same speed in both the first period and the second period (for example, FIG. 40- 19 to FIG. 40-25, during the first half execution period and the second half execution period of the first reach effect, the second reach effect, the third reach effect, and the fourth reach effect, the speakers 8L and 8R From the part where BGM and production sounds are output at normal playback speed V4),
In a pre-notification period from the end of the predetermined effect to the execution of the notification effect, a pre-notification effect of displaying a specific still image corresponding to the stoppage of progress of the predetermined effect being executed in the first display area. (For example, still image display effect) can be executed,
The information display operation in the second display area continues even in the pre-notification period (for example, as shown in FIGS. 40-20 and 40-21, the first suspension Part where rotating display of reserved display in memory display area 079SG005D and second reserved memory display area 079SG005U and moving display of telop in telop display area 079SG005T shown in FIG. 40-2(C) continue)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the progress speed of the effect animation of the predetermined effect changes between the first period and the second period, but the speed of the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect does not change between the first period and the second period. Furthermore, the player can recognize that the notification effect will be executed by displaying the specific still image in the first display area in the pre-notification period. In addition, since the information display operation in the second display area continues, it is possible to prevent the information presentation from becoming difficult to recognize due to the information display operation being stopped.

Form A19 is the gaming machine according to form A18,
The specific still image is an image obtained by changing the color of the still image of the predetermined effect whose progress has been stopped (for example, As shown, the part where the color of the still image is inverted by executing the still image display effect in pattern SG-2)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the specific still image displayed in the first display area is different in color from the still image of the predetermined effect, so that the player can more easily recognize that the notification effect will be executed.

Form A20 is the gaming machine according to form A19,
Regarding the image of the information effect displayed in the second display area, the color does not change in the pre-notification period (for example, as shown in FIG. 40-29(B), the still image display effect is pattern SG- 2, the color of the still image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F is reversed, but the suspended display and telop displayed in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb are displayed. The part where the color of the 4th pattern that is attached is not reversed)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming difficult to recognize the information effect when the pre-notification effect is executed (since the color of the image of the information effect does not change, the color does not change). It is possible to easily recognize that it is a specific still image).

Form A21 is a gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A20,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of playing,
Sound output means capable of outputting dramatic sound (for example, IC079SG132 for voice synthesis mounted on speakers 8L and 8R and voice control board 13, voice data ROM079SG133, amplifier circuit 079SG134);
a display means (for example, an image display device 5) capable of displaying a moving image,
Benefit granting means (eg, CPU 103) that grants benefits (eg, jackpot gaming state);
A predetermined effect (for example, ready-to-win effect) suggesting that a privilege is given by displaying the effect animation of the character on the display means and outputting the effect sound from the sound output means in accordance with the display of the effect animation of the character. ), and an effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a notification effect (for example, a big hit notification effect and a deviation notification effect) for informing whether or not a privilege is given after the execution of the predetermined effect,
with
The predetermined effect includes a first section (e.g., first reach effect and third reach effect) and a second section (e.g., second reach effect and fourth reach effect) after the first section,
Each of the first section and the second section is a first period (for example, the first half of the ready-to-reach effect first half execution period, the first half of the second ready-to-win effect part of the execution period, the first half of the third ready-to-win effect part of the executing period, and the fourth ready-to-reach effect. production first half execution period) and a second period after the first period (for example, first reach production second half execution period, second reach production second half execution period, third reach production second half execution period, fourth Reach production second half execution period) and
The production executing means is
In the first period, the effect moving image whose progress speed of the effect is the first speed can be displayed on the display means (for example, as shown in FIGS. A part in which moving images of each ready-to-win effect are displayed on the image display device 5 at the progress speed V1 during the first half execution period of each of the second ready-to-win effect, the third ready-to-win effect, and the fourth ready-to-win effect),
During the second period, the effect moving image whose progress speed of the effect is a second speed slower than the first speed can be displayed on the display means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 40-19 to 40-25 , the second half of the first ready-to-win effect, the second ready-to-win effect, the third ready-to-win effect, and the fourth ready-to-win effect are displayed on the image display device 5 at the progress speed V2 during the execution period of the animation of each ready-to-win effect. ),
Regarding the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect, the speed of the effect sound can be output by the sound output means at the same speed in both the first period and the second period (for example, FIG. 40- 19 to FIG. 40-25, during the first half execution period and the second half execution period of the first reach effect, the second reach effect, the third reach effect, and the fourth reach effect, the speakers 8L and 8R From the part where BGM and production sounds are output at normal playback speed V4),
The predetermined effect is a first pattern that shifts to the second section after the execution of the first section (for example, variable display of super reach α3 shown in FIGS. 40-20 and 40-21, FIGS. 40-24 and Variable display of super reach β3 shown in 40-25) and a second pattern that ends without transitioning to the second section after execution of the first section (for example, super reach shown in FIGS. 40-18 and 40-19 variable display of α1 and super reach α2, and variable display of super reach β1 and super reach β2 shown in FIGS. 40-22 and 40-23).
According to this feature, the progress speed of the effect animation of the predetermined effect changes between the first period and the second period, but the speed of the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect does not change between the first period and the second period. Further, the predetermined performance is executed at the second speed in the first section and the predetermined performance is executed without shifting to the second section or the second section is executed. Since the player can be made to pay attention to whether or not the game ends or whether or not the privilege is given by executing the predetermined performance at the second speed in the second section, the interest in the game can be improved.

Form A22 is the gaming machine according to form A21,
The production executing means is
An end suggesting effect suggesting that the predetermined effect ends in the first interval without transitioning to the second interval (for example, during the second half of the first reach effect execution period or the second half of the third reach effect) is defeated by an enemy character) can be executed,
The end-suggesting effect and the predetermined effect when transitioning from the first section to the second section can be executed at the same progress speed (for example, FIGS. 40-19, 40-20, and 40-21 , FIGS. 40-23, 40-24, and 40-25, during the execution period of the latter half of the first reach effect and the latter half of the third reach effect, the effect in which the friend character is defeated by the enemy character and the first A portion in which the reach performance second half execution period or the third reach performance second half execution period is executed at the progress speed V1),
When notifying that a privilege is given in the notification effect, the display means can display the effect moving image in which the progress speed of the effect is the third speed in the first notification period of the notification effect, and In the second notification period after the first notification period, the effect moving image, which is the fourth speed slower than the third speed, can be displayed on the display means (for example, FIGS. 40-18, 40-20, and 40 -22, Figure 40-24, Figure 40-25 and Figure 40-26 (E) to Figure 40-26 (G), Figure 40-29 (C) to Figure 40-29 (E), Figure 40-30 ( B) ~ Figure 40-30 (D), Figure 40-31 (E) ~ Figure 40-31 (G), Figure 40-35 (A) ~ Figure 40-35 (C), as shown in A part that displays a moving image when the enemy character falls down due to the attack being hit at the progress speed V2),
When notifying that the privilege is not granted in the notification effect, the effect moving image of the third speed can be displayed on the display means without displaying the effect moving image of the fourth speed during the second notification period. (for example, FIGS. 40-19, 40-21, 40-23, 40-25 and 40-27 (E) to 40-27 (G), 40-30 (F) to 40 -30 (H), Figures 40-32 (E) to Figure 40-32 (G), Figures 40-35 (D) to Figure 40-35 (F), animation when the friendly character falls down The part where the display is executed at the progress speed V1)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the progress speed of the predetermined effect when shifting to the second section is the same as the progress speed of the end suggesting effect, the progress speed when shifting to the second zone is the same as the progress speed of the end suggesting effect. By being different, it is possible to prevent excessively increasing expectations for the granting of the privilege, and when it is notified that the privilege will not be granted, the fourth-speed effect moving image is not displayed. Since it is possible to prevent the player's dissatisfaction from becoming excessively high, the amusement of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of form A23 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A22,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of playing,
Sound output means capable of outputting dramatic sound (for example, IC079SG132 for voice synthesis mounted on speakers 8L and 8R and voice control board 13, voice data ROM079SG133, amplifier circuit 079SG134);
Display means (for example, image display device 5) capable of displaying effect moving images;
Benefit granting means (eg, CPU 103) that grants benefits (eg, jackpot gaming state);
Action detection means (for example, push button 31B) capable of detecting actions of the player;
A predetermined effect (for example, ready-to-win effect) suggesting that a privilege is given by displaying the effect animation of the character on the display means and outputting the effect sound from the sound output means in accordance with the display of the effect animation of the character. ), an action-promoting effect (for example, an operation-promoting effect) that prompts the player to act, and a notification effect (for example, , jackpot notification effect and loss notification effect) and effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120),
with
The production executing means is
In the first period of the predetermined effect, it is possible to display the effect moving image in which the progress speed of the effect is the first speed on the display means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 40-19 to 40-25, the first reach During the execution period of the first half of each of the production, the second ready-to-reach production, the third ready-to-reach production, and the fourth ready-to-reach production, the animation of each ready-to-reach production is displayed on the image display device 5 at the progress speed V1),
In the second period of the predetermined effect after the first period, the effect moving image whose progression speed of the effect is a second speed slower than the first speed can be displayed on the display means (for example, FIG. 40 -19 to FIG. 40-25, during the second half execution period of each of the first reach effect, the second reach effect, the third reach effect, and the fourth reach effect, the animation of each reach effect moves to the progress speed V2 the part displayed on the image display device 5),
Regarding the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect, the speed of the effect sound can be output by the sound output means at the same speed in both the first period and the second period (for example, FIG. 40- 19 to FIG. 40-25, during the first half execution period and the second half execution period of the first reach effect, the second reach effect, the third reach effect, and the fourth reach effect, the speakers 8L and 8R From the part where BGM and production sounds are output at normal playback speed V4),
When the effect animation of the predetermined effect is being displayed at the second speed in the second period, the action promotion effect can be executed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 40-24 and 40-25, the 4 Part where the operation promotion effect is executed when the display of the animation of the reach effect is executed at the progress speed V2 during the execution period of the second half of the reach effect)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to this feature, the progress speed of the effect animation of the predetermined effect changes between the first period and the second period, but the speed of the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect does not change between the first period and the second period. Thus, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling a sense of incompatibility, and furthermore, since the predetermined performance progresses at the second speed during execution of the action promotion performance during the second period, the performance effect of the predetermined performance can be enhanced. can.

The gaming machine of form A24 is the gaming machine according to form A23,
The action promotion effect includes an effective detection period notification effect (for example, display of a meter 079SG005M indicating the operation inheritance period of the push button 31B) for notifying the effective detection period for receiving the detection of the player's action by the action detection means. ,
When the validity detection period ends, the effect execution means detects the action of the player by the action detection means within the validity detection period from the timing after the end of the validity detection period. 40-33 (E), 40-34 (E), and 40-35 (A) to 40-35 (F), the same notification effect as in the case can be executed (for example, push A part that executes the same jackpot notification effect or loss notification effect based on the end of the operation acceptance period of the button 31B or the player's operation of the push button 31B)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to this feature, when the action detection means does not detect the action of the player, the notification effect is not executed at the timing before the effective detection period elapses, so the action detection means detects the action of the player. By not doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing whether or not the privilege is granted during the validity detection period.

The gaming machine of form A25 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A24,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of playing,
Sound output means capable of outputting dramatic sound (for example, IC079SG132 for voice synthesis mounted on speakers 8L and 8R and voice control board 13, voice data ROM079SG133, amplifier circuit 079SG134);
Display means (for example, image display device 5) capable of displaying effect moving images;
Benefit granting means (eg, CPU 103) that grants benefits (eg, jackpot gaming state);
A predetermined effect (for example, ready-to-win effect) suggesting that a privilege is given by displaying the effect animation of the character on the display means and outputting the effect sound from the sound output means in accordance with the display of the effect animation of the character. ), an effect executing means (for example, effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a notification effect (for example, a notification effect that is not a big hit notification effect) for notifying whether or not a privilege is given after the predetermined effect is completed;
with
The production executing means is
In the first period of the predetermined effect, it is possible to display the effect moving image in which the progress speed of the effect is the first speed on the display means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 40-19 to 40-25, the first reach During the execution period of the first half of each of the production, the second ready-to-reach production, the third ready-to-reach production, and the fourth ready-to-reach production, the animation of each ready-to-reach production is displayed on the image display device 5 at the progress speed V1),
In the second period of the predetermined effect after the first period, the effect moving image whose progression speed of the effect is a second speed slower than the first speed can be displayed on the display means (for example, FIG. 40 -19 to FIG. 40-25, during the second half execution period of each of the first reach effect, the second reach effect, the third reach effect, and the fourth reach effect, the animation of each reach effect moves to the progress speed V2 the part displayed on the image display device 5),
Regarding the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect, the speed of the effect sound can be output by the sound output means at the same speed in both the first period and the second period (for example, FIG. 40- 19 to FIG. 40-25, during the first half execution period and the second half execution period of the first reach effect, the second reach effect, the third reach effect, and the fourth reach effect, the speakers 8L and 8R From the part where BGM and production sounds are output at normal playback speed V4),
When notifying that a privilege is given in the notification effect, the display means can display the effect moving image in which the progress speed of the effect is the third speed in the first notification period of the notification effect, and In the second notification period after the first notification period, the effect moving image, which is the fourth speed slower than the third speed, can be displayed on the display means (for example, FIGS. 40-18, 40-20, and 40 -22, Figure 40-24 and Figure 40-26 (E) to Figure 40-26 (G), Figure 40-29 (C) to Figure 40-29 (E), Figure 40-30 (B) to Figure 40 -30 (D), Figures 40-31 (E) to Figures 40-31 (G), Figures 40-35 (A) to Figures 40-35C), the attack of the ally character in the big hit notification effect The animation of the part where hits the enemy character is displayed at the progressing speed V1, while the animation of the part where the enemy character falls down is displayed at the progressing speed of V2),
When notifying that the privilege is not given in the notification effect, the effect moving image of the third speed can be displayed on the display means without displaying the effect moving image of the fourth speed during the second notification period. (for example, FIGS. 40-19, 40-21, 40-23, 40-25 and 40-27 (E) to 40-27 (G), 40-30 (F) to 40 -30 (H), Figures 40-32 (E) to Figure 40-32 (G), Figures 40-35 (D) to Figure 40-35 (F), as shown in Figures 40-35 (D) to Figure 40-35 (F), the moving speed The part displayed in V1)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to this feature, the progress speed of the effect animation of the predetermined effect changes between the first period and the second period, but the speed of the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect does not change between the first period and the second period. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling a sense of incongruity, and furthermore, when the provision of the privilege is notified as the notification performance, the performance moving image with the progress speed of the fourth speed is displayed, so that the privilege is granted. It is possible to impress the player with the performance moving image of the notification performance.

The gaming machine of form A26 is the gaming machine according to form A25,
The effect executing means performs a special effect during the second period only when a privilege is given (for example, a still image display effect in which the color of the still image is inverted as shown in FIG. 40-16 (pattern SG- 2. Still image display effect))).
According to this feature, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the special effect is executed.

The gaming machine of form A27 is the gaming machine according to form A26,
The privilege providing means provides a first privilege (for example, a non-variable big hit jackpot game state) as the privilege and a second privilege (for example, a probability variable big win big hit game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege. is grantable and
The effect execution means is capable of executing a special effect (for example, a resurrection effect shown in Modification 079SG-4) for notifying that a privilege will be granted after once notifying that the privilege will not be granted in the notification effect. ,
When the special effect is executed during the second period and it is notified that the privilege is granted in the notification effect, the second privilege is granted (for example, as shown in modification 079SG-4, When the static image display effect is executed in the pattern SS-2 and the big hit notification effect is executed, the part controlled to the big hit game state of the probability variable big win),
When the special performance is executed during the second period and the special performance is executed after the notification performance informs that the privilege is not granted, the first privilege or the second privilege is granted. (For example, as shown in the modification 079SG-4, when the still image display effect is executed in the pattern SS-2 and the resurrection effect is executed after the deviation notification effect is executed, the non-probable variable jackpot Part where there is a case where it is controlled to the game state and a case where it is controlled to the jackpot game state of the probability variable jackpot)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to this feature, after the special effect is executed, the player can be made to pay attention to whether or not the provision of the privilege is notified by the notification effect, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of form A28 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A27,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of playing a game,
Sound output means capable of outputting dramatic sound (for example, IC079SG132 for voice synthesis mounted on speakers 8L and 8R and voice control board 13, voice data ROM079SG133, amplifier circuit 079SG134);
Display means (for example, image display device 5) capable of displaying effect moving images;
Benefit granting means (eg, CPU 103) that grants benefits (eg, jackpot gaming state);
Action detection means (for example, push button 31B) capable of detecting actions of the player;
A predetermined effect (for example, ready-to-win effect) suggesting that a privilege is given by displaying the effect animation of the character on the display means and outputting the effect sound from the sound output means in accordance with the display of the effect animation of the character. ), and a first action-promoting image (for example, an operation-promoting image 079SG005Ba) and a second action-promoting image (for example, an operation-promoting image 079SG005Bb) different from the first action-promoting image. is displayed on the display means to prompt the player's action (for example, an operation promotion effect), and whether or not the privilege is given based on the detection of the player's action by the action detection means is determined. Effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a notification effect to be notified (for example, a big hit notification effect and a losing notification effect);
with
The production executing means is
In the first period of the predetermined effect, it is possible to display the effect moving image in which the progress speed of the effect is the first speed on the display means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 40-19 to 40-25, the first reach During the execution period of the first half of each of the production, the second ready-to-reach production, the third ready-to-reach production, and the fourth ready-to-reach production, the animation of each ready-to-reach production is displayed on the image display device 5 at the progress speed V1),
In the second period of the predetermined effect after the first period, the effect moving image whose progression speed of the effect is a second speed slower than the first speed can be displayed on the display means (for example, FIG. 40 -19 to FIG. 40-25, during the second half execution period of each of the first reach effect, the second reach effect, the third reach effect, and the fourth reach effect, the animation of each reach effect moves to the progress speed V2 the part displayed on the image display device 5),
Regarding the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect, the speed of the effect sound can be output by the sound output means at the same speed in both the first period and the second period (for example, FIG. 40- 19 to FIG. 40-25, during the first half execution period and the second half execution period of the first reach effect, the second reach effect, the third reach effect, and the fourth reach effect, the speakers 8L and 8R From the part where BGM and production sounds are output at normal playback speed V4),
After the start of the second period, the operation promotion effect can be executed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 40-24 and 40-25, the operation promotion effect is executed during the second half execution period of the fourth reach effect part),
When the action-promoting effect is executed by the first action-promoting image, the first action-promoting image is displayed while visibly displaying the effect moving image of the predetermined effect on the display means (for example, FIG. 40-33 shows As shown, when the operation promoting image 079SG005Ba is displayed, the effect image 079SG005E having transparency is also displayed, so that the player can visually recognize the battle effect through the effect image 079SG005E).
When the action promoting effect is executed by the second action promoting image, the effect moving image of the predetermined effect is displayed on the display means so that the effect moving image of the predetermined effect is more difficult to see than when the first action promoting image is displayed. , displaying the second action-promoting image in a display area wider than the display area of the first action-promoting image (for example, as shown in FIGS. is displayed, the transparency of the operation prompting image 079SG005Bb is 0%, so that the visibility of the battle effect is lower than when the operation prompting image 079SG005Ba is displayed),
The rate at which the privilege is given when the second action promoting image is displayed is higher than when the first action promoting image is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 40-17, the operation promoting image 079SG005Bb The ratio of the variable display result to be a big hit when is displayed is lower than the ratio of the variable display result to be a big hit when the operation prompting image 079SG005Ba is displayed)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to this feature, the progress speed of the effect animation of the predetermined effect changes between the first period and the second period, but the speed of the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect does not change between the first period and the second period. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling a sense of incongruity, and to make the player pay attention to whether the first action promotion image or the second action promotion image is displayed as the action promotion effect. It can improve amusement interest.

The gaming machine of form A29 is the gaming machine according to form A28,
The effect execution means is capable of displaying, on the display means, the effect moving image of the predetermined effect whose progress speed is the second speed during the display of the first action promotion image (for example, FIGS. 40-24, FIG. As shown in 40-25 and FIGS. 40-33(C) to 40-33(E), when the operation prompting image 079SG005Ba is displayed as the operation prompting effect, a battle effect is displayed while the operation prompting image 079SG005Ba is being displayed. The part where the display of the effect animation is executed at the progress speed V2)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to this feature, the effect moving image of the predetermined effect is displayed at the second speed while the first action promoting image is being displayed, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of form A30 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A29,
The production executing means is
A first predetermined effect (for example, a first ready-to-reach effect and a third ready-to-reach effect) and a second predetermined effect (for example, a second ready-to-reach effect and a fourth ready-to-reach effect) can be executed as the predetermined effect, and the first After the execution of the first specific section (for example, the first reach production first half execution period and the third reach production first half execution period) in the predetermined production, the second specific section after the first specific section (for example, the first reach It is possible to shift to the second half of the production execution period and the third reach production second half execution period),
The predetermined effect is a first specific pattern (for example, super reach α1 shown in FIG. and variable display of super reach β1 shown in FIG. 40-22), and a second specific pattern (for example, , FIG. 40-20, variable display of super reach α3 shown in FIGS. 40-20 and super reach β3 shown in FIGS. A third specific pattern (for example, variable display of super reach α2 shown in FIG. 40-19 or variable display of super reach β2 shown in FIG. 40-23) that ends the predetermined effect after execution of two specific sections, and is executable and
When shifting from the first specific section of the first predetermined effect to the second specific section and when shifting from the second specific section of the first predetermined effect to the second predetermined effect, the performance The effect moving image whose progress speed is the second speed is displayed on the display means (for example, as shown in FIGS. When shifting to the execution period, when shifting from the first half of the ready-to-win production second half execution period to the first half of the second ready-to-win production execution period, when shifting from the third half of the ready-to-win production first half execution period to the second half of the third ready-to-win production execution period. , a part for executing the effect animation of each ready-to-win effect at the progress speed V2 when shifting from the third ready-to-win effect second half part execution period to the fourth ready-to-win effect first half part execution period),
Regarding the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect, the speed of the effect sound is output at the same speed in both the first specific section and the second specific section of the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect. (For example, as shown in FIGS. 40-18 to 40-25, when shifting from the first reach production first half execution period to the first reach production second half execution period, the first reach production second half execution period to the second When shifting to the first half execution period of the ready-to-win performance, when shifting from the first half execution period of the third ready-to-win performance to the second half execution period of the third ready-to-win performance, from the second half execution period of the third ready-to-win performance to the first half execution period of the fourth ready-to-win performance. , the BGM and sound effects are output from the speakers 8L and 8R at the playback speed V4, the same as in other periods)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to this feature, the progress speed of the effect moving image of the predetermined effect changes when shifting from the first specific section of the first predetermined effect to the second specific section and when shifting from the second specific section to the second predetermined effect. However, since the output speed of the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect does not change when shifting from the first specific section of the first predetermined effect to the second specific effect, and when shifting from the second specific effect to the second specific effect, It is possible to prevent the player from feeling a sense of incongruity, and further, the player can easily recognize the branch of the predetermined effect by changing the progress speed of the effect animation of the predetermined effect to the second speed.

(Configuration of pachinko machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 31 is a front view of the pachinko game machine 1, showing the arrangement layout of the main members. A pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly composed of a game board (gauge board) 2 constituting a game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 supporting and fixing the game board 2 . A game area is formed in the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is shot from a predetermined ball shooting device and hit into the game area.

The "variable display" of special symbols means, for example, that a plurality of types of special symbols are variably displayed (the same applies to other symbols described later). Variations include updating display of a plurality of patterns, scrolling display of a plurality of patterns, deformation of one or more patterns, enlargement/reduction of one or more patterns, and the like. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols, which will be described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative patterns, which will be described later, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that the variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed blinking. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to variable display of other symbols to be described later). Variable display may be expressed as variable display or variation.

The special symbols variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A are also called "first special symbols", and the special symbols variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B are also called "second special symbols". Also, a special game using the first special game is called a "first special game", and a special game using the second special game is called a "second special game". In addition, the number of special symbol display devices that variably display the special symbols may be one.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2 . The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display) or an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5 .

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronism with the first special game and the second special game, a plurality of types of decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers) as decoration identification information different from the special patterns. variable display is performed. Here, in synchronism with the first special game or the second special game, decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, vertically direction scroll display and update display). It should be noted that the variable display of the special game and the decoration pattern that are executed in synchronization are also collectively referred to simply as the variable display.

A display area may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5 for displaying suspended display corresponding to the variable display whose execution is suspended and active display corresponding to the variable display being executed. Suspended display and active display are also collectively referred to as variable display corresponding display corresponding to variable display.

The number of variable representations that are reserved is also referred to as the number of reserved memories. The reserved memory number corresponding to the first special game is also referred to as the first reserved memory number, and the reserved memory number corresponding to the second special game is also referred to as the second reserved memory number. The sum of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number is also referred to as the total reserved memory number.

At predetermined positions on the game board 2, a first suspension indicator 25A and a second suspension indicator 25B each including a plurality of LEDs are provided. The first pending display 25A displays the first pending memory number by the number of lit LEDs. The second pending display 25B displays the number of second pending memories according to the number of lit LEDs.

A winning ball device 6A is provided below the image display device 5, and a variable winning ball device 6B is provided on the right side of the winning ball device 6A.

Winning ball device 6A, for example, forms a first starting winning opening that is kept in a constant open state in which game balls can enter, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the first special game can be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning hole that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 33). The variable winning ball device 6B is provided with, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable winglets. comes close to the winning ball device 6A, and the closed state in which the game balls do not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening being closed). On the other hand, the variable winning ball device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second start winning opening (second start It is also said that the prize-winning mouth is open.). When the game ball enters the second start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the second special game can be started. Note that the variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that changes between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to a device provided with an electric tulip-shaped accessory.

Predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 31, three positions on the lower left side of the game area and one position above the variable winning ball device 6B) are always kept in a constant open state by predetermined ball receiving members. A general winning opening 10 is provided. In this case, when the player enters one of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

A special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided between the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable prize winning ball device 7 has a special prize winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 33), and the special winning prize opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the special prize winning opening door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning door (for the special electric accessory) is in the OFF state, the big winning door closes the big winning door, and the game ball is pushed out. You will not be able to enter (pass through) the prize gate. On the other hand, in the special variable prize winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special prize winning port door is in the ON state, the special prize winning port door opens the big prize winning port, making it easier for the game ball to enter the big prize winning port. Become.

When game balls enter the big winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When the game balls enter the big winning hole, more prize balls are paid out than when the game balls enter the first starting winning hole, the second starting winning hole and the general winning hole 10, for example.

Entering a game ball into each winning hole including the general winning hole 10 is also called "winning". In particular, winning a prize in a starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 31, the left lower part of the game area). As an example, the normal symbol display device 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs variable display of normal symbols as a plurality of types of normal identification information different from special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9", lighting patterns such as "-", and the like. The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of normal patterns is also called a normal pattern game.

A passage gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided on the right side of the image display device 5 . Based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41, the normal game is executed.

Below the normal pattern display 20, a normal pattern holding display 25C is provided. The general pattern suspension display 25C includes, for example, four LEDs, and displays the normal pattern suspension storage number, which is the number of general pattern games whose execution is suspended, by the number of lit LEDs.

The surface of the game board 2 is provided with, in addition to the above configuration, a windmill for changing the flowing direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, there is provided an out port into which game balls that have not entered any of the winning ports are taken in.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at upper left and right positions of the frame 3 for a game machine. A main lamp 9a is provided above the image display device 5 in the game machine frame 3, and frame lamps 9b are provided to the left and right of the main lamp 9a so as to surround the game area. Furthermore, an attacker lamp 9c is provided at a position near the special variable winning ball device 7 on the game board 2. As shown in FIG.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (a position above the image display device 5 in FIG. 31), a movable body 32 that operates according to the performance is provided. Further, the movable body 32 is provided with a movable body lamp 9d. The movable body lamp 9d, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, and the attacker lamp 9c are collectively referred to as a game effect lamp 9 in some cases. The main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d include LEDs.

A ball hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to shoot a game ball toward the game area from the ball shooting device is provided at the lower right portion of the game machine frame 3 .

At a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area, game balls paid out as prize balls and game balls lent from a predetermined ball lending machine are held (stored) so as to be supplied to the ball shooting device. ) is provided with a batted ball supply plate (upper plate). In addition to the upper tray, the gaming machine frame 3 may be provided with a payout portion (hit ball supply tray) from which prize balls are paid out when the upper tray is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. An operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 33).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, there is provided a push button 31B that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation. An operation on the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 33).

The pachinko game machine 1 is provided with a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B as detection means for detecting actions (operations, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

32 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine 1. FIG. A main substrate 11 housed in a substrate case 201 is mounted on the back surface of the pachinko game machine 1. - 特許庁A setting key 51 and a setting switch 52 are provided on the main substrate 11 . The setting key 51 functions as a lock switch for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state. The setting changeover switch 52 functions as a setting switch for changing set values such as the probability of winning a big hit and the rate of winning balls in the setting change state. The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 may be attached to the outside of the main board 11 , such as at a predetermined position on the power supply board 17 .

A display monitor 29 is arranged in the center of the back surface of the main board 11 , and a display changeover switch 31 is arranged on the side of the display monitor 29 . The display monitor 29 may be configured using, for example, a 7-segment LED display device. The display monitor 29 and the display changeover switch 31 are arranged in front of the main board 11 when viewing the back side of the game board 2 with the gaming machine frame 3 opened.

The display monitor 29 can display winning information such as consecutive ratios, role ratios, and bases. Consecutive ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls in the big prize opening (attacker) to the total number of prize balls. The role ratio is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of prize balls awarded to the second starting prize opening (electric chew) and the number of prize balls awarded to the large prize opening (attacker). The base is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of game balls launched. The display monitor 29 can display the setting values in the pachinko game machine 1 when it is in the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. The display monitor 29 only needs to be able to display setting values to be changed or checked when in the setting change state or setting confirmation state.

The setting key 51 and the setting switch 52 cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko game machine 1 when the game machine frame 3 is closed. A glass door frame 3a having a glass window is rotatably provided in the game machine frame 3, and the game area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 3a. When the glass door frame 3a is closed, the game area can be seen through the glass window.

In the pachinko game machine 1, a security cover 500A is attached to the right end of the outer frame 1a formed in the shape of a vertically long square frame. When the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the security cover 500A covers the right side of the substrate case 201 including the setting keys 51 and the setting changeover switches 52 from the rear side. The security cover 500A is a substantially L-shaped member including short pieces 500Aa and long pieces 500Ab, and may be made of transparent synthetic resin.

(Overview of Game Progress)
A game ball is shot toward a game area by a player's rotation operation of a ball hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko game machine 1 . When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the normal pattern display device 20 starts the normal pattern game. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the period during the execution of the previous normal game (when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 but the normal game based on the passage cannot be immediately executed) , the normal game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In this normal pattern game, if a specific normal pattern (normal pattern per pattern) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern per pattern". On the other hand, if a normal pattern (normal pattern losing pattern) other than the normal pattern per pattern is stop-displayed as the determined normal pattern, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern losing". When it comes to "normal game", the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period of time and the opening control is performed (the second start winning opening is opened).

When a game ball enters the first starting winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during which the special game is running, or during the period when it is controlled to the big win game state or the small win game state described later (although the start win has occurred If the special game based on the starting prize cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special game based on the entry is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (a big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the type of the big hit described below) is stopped and displayed as a fixed special symbol, it becomes a "big win" and a big winning symbol. If a predetermined special symbol (a small winning symbol, for example, "2") different from the symbol is stop-displayed, it becomes a "small winning". Also, if a special symbol (losing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big-hit symbol or the small-hit symbol is stop-displayed, it becomes "losing".

After the display result in the special game becomes "big win", the game is controlled to a big win game state as an advantageous state for the player. After the display result in the special game becomes "minor win", it is controlled to the small win game state.

In the jackpot game state, the jackpot formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state is the timing of elapse of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls entering the big winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). It will continue until whichever comes first. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which the big winning opening can be opened in one round, and is hereinafter also referred to as an upper limit opening period. One cycle in which the big winning hole is open in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until it reaches a predetermined upper limit number of times (15 times or 2 times).

In the jackpot game state, the player can get a prize ball by entering the game ball into the big winning hole. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the upper limit period of opening, the more advantageous the player is.

In addition, a jackpot type is set in the "jackpot". For example, multiple types of opening modes (number of rounds and upper limit period of opening) of the big winning opening and game states after the jackpot game state (normal state, time saving state, variable probability state, etc.) are prepared, and the jackpot type is set according to these It is As the jackpot types, there may be provided a jackpot type with which many prize balls can be obtained, a jackpot type with few prize balls, or a jackpot type with which few prize balls can be obtained.

In the small winning game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small winning game state, the same opening mode as the big winning game state when some jackpot types etc.), the big prize opening is opened. In addition, you may provide a small-hit classification also in a "small-hit" like a big-hit classification.

After the jackpot game state is finished, depending on the jackpot type, it may be controlled to a time-saving state or a variable probability state.

In the time saving state, the control (time saving control) that shortens the average special figure fluctuation time (period of varying the special figure) than the normal state is executed. In the time-saving state, by shortening the average normal figure fluctuation time (period of changing the normal figure) than in the normal state, or by improving the probability of becoming a "normal figure hit" in the general figure game than in the normal state, etc. Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for game balls to enter the second start winning opening is also executed. Since the time-saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols (especially the second special symbols) is improved, it is an advantageous state for the player.

In the variable probability state (probability variable state), in addition to the time-saving control, the variable probability control in which the probability that the display result is a "jackpot" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The variable probability state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols is improved, and in addition, a "big hit" is likely to occur, so it is a further advantageous state for the player.

The time saving state and the variable probability state are continued until one of the end conditions such as execution of the special game for a predetermined number of times and start of the next big win game state is established first. The end condition that the special figure game of a predetermined number of times has been executed is also referred to as a number cut (number cut time reduction, number cut probability variable, etc.).

The normal state means a game state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, a time saving state, a variable probability state, etc., and the display result in the normal game is "normal game". The pachinko gaming machine 1, such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special game will be a "jackpot", returns to the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, a predetermined return after power-on, such as when the system is reset) It is the state controlled in the same way as when processing is not executed).

The state in which probability variable control is executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which probability variable control is not executed is also called a low probability state. A state in which time-saving control is performed is also referred to as a high-based state, and a state in which time-saving control is not performed is also referred to as a low-based state. Combining these, the short-time state is also called a low-probability-high base state, the probability-variable state is a high-probability-high base state, and the normal state is a low-probability-low base state. The high probability state and the low base state are also referred to as the high probability low base state.

After the small win game state is over, the game state is not changed, and the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes "small win" is continuously controlled (however, "small win" occurs). If the special game at the time is the special game for the predetermined number of times in the above cut, the game state is naturally changed). In addition, there may not be a "small hit" as a display result of a special figure game.

In addition, the game state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area within the big winning opening) during the jackpot game state. For example, when the game ball passes through the specific area, it may be controlled to the probability variable state after the big hit game state.
(Progress of production, etc.)

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects such as notifying the progress of the game and exciting the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5. In addition to or instead of the display, sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and the game effect lamp 9 are provided. lighting or extinguishing, the movement of the movable body 32, or a performance using any performance device including a part or all of these.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R provided on the image display device 5, the first special game or the second In response to the start of the 2 special figure game, the variable display of the decoration pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also called fixed special pattern) is stopped and displayed in the first special game or the second special game, a fixed decorative pattern (combination of three decorative patterns), which is the display result of variable display of decorative patterns, is displayed. ) is also stopped (derived).

During the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative design to the end of the variable display, the variable display of the decorative design may be in a predetermined ready-to-win state (ready-to-win state is established). Here, the ready-to-win mode means that when the decorative symbols stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitute a part of the jackpot combination described later, the decorative symbols that are not stopped and displayed are displayed in a variable manner. It is the aspect that is continuing.

Further, a ready-to-win effect is executed in response to the above-described ready-to-win mode during the variable display of decorative symbols. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (the display result of the special game or the display result of the variable display of the decoration pattern) to the "big win" (also called the "big win reliability" or "big win expectation") depends on the performance mode. A plurality of different types of ready-to-win effects are executed. The ready-to-win performance includes, for example, a normal reach and a super-to-win with higher reliability than the normal reach.

When the display result of the special game is a "big hit", a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined big hit combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration The display result of the variable display of the pattern becomes a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decoration patterns (for example, "7" etc.) are stop-displayed together on predetermined effective lines in the "left", "middle" and "right" decoration pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. .

In the case of a ``variable probability big hit'' controlled to a variable probability state after the end of the big win game state, odd decorative patterns (for example, "7" etc.) are stopped and displayed together, and the variable probability state is entered after the end of the big win game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", even-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be stopped and displayed together. In this case, odd-numbered decorative patterns are also called probability variable patterns and even-numbered decorative patterns are also called non-probable variable patterns (normal patterns). After becoming a ready-to-win mode with non-probability variation symbols, a promotion performance may be executed to finally become a "probability variation big hit".

When the display result of the special figure game is "small hit", on the screen of the image display device 5, as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns, a fixed decorative pattern (for example, " 1, 3, 5", etc.) are derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a "minor hit"). As an example, decoration symbols constituting a chance eye are stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the “left”, “middle” and “right” decoration symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. In addition, when the display result of the special game is a "big hit" of some jackpot types (jackpot types in the same manner as the small win game state), and when it becomes a "minor hit" , a common fixed decoration pattern may be derived and displayed.

If the display result of the special game is "Loss", the variable display mode of the decorative pattern does not become the ready-to-win mode, and the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination (" Also referred to as "non-reach loss".) may be stopped (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes "non-reach loss"). In addition, when the display result is "losing", after the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern becomes the ready-to-win mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a predetermined ready-to-win combination ("reach losing") that is not a big hit combination. (Also called) fixed decorative pattern is displayed stop (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is "reach lost").

The effects that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 include displaying the variable display corresponding display (suspended display and active display). In addition, as other effects, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big hit is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols. The notice effect includes a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display during execution and a pre-reading notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is suspended). As the pre-reading advance notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the display corresponding to variable display (suspended display or active display) to a mode different from normal may be executed.

Also, in the image display device 5, the decorative patterns are temporarily stopped during the variable display of the decorative patterns, and then the variable display is restarted, so that one variable display is simulated as a plurality of variable displays. A pseudo continuous effect may be executed.

During the big winning game state, the performance during the big winning is executed to report the big winning game state. As the effect during the big win, the effect of notifying the number of rounds or the promotion effect indicating that the value of the big win game state is improved may be executed. Also, during the small-hit game state, an effect during the small-hit game for notifying the small-hit game state is executed. It should be noted that during the small winning game state, some of the jackpot types (jackpot types in the jackpot game state in the same manner as the small hit game state, for example, the jackpot type in the subsequent game state high probability state) jackpot game By executing a common performance in both states, the player may not know whether the current state is a small win game state or a big win game state. In such a case, by executing a common performance after the end of the small winning game state and after the end of the big winning game state, it is made impossible to distinguish whether the state is a high probability state or a low probability state. may

Further, for example, when a special game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc. as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, and a launch control board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko game machine 1 . Furthermore, a power supply board 17 is also mounted. Various control boards are not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards on which conductive patterns are formed and on which electrical components can be mounted, but are also configured to implement specific electrical functions by mounting electrical components on electronic circuit boards. It is a concept that includes an electronic circuit mounting board that has been manufactured.

In the pachinko game machine 1, the power supply board 17 can supply power from an AC 100V external power supply such as a commercial power supply to electrical components including various control boards such as the main board 11 and the performance control board 12. The power supply board 17 includes, for example, a rectifier circuit for converting alternating current (AC) into direct current (DC), a power circuit for converting a predetermined DC voltage into a specific DC voltage (eg, 12 V DC or 5 V DC), and the like. I have.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of a special game (including management of suspension), execution of a general-purpose game (including management of suspension), jackpot game state, small hit game state, game state, etc.) has a function to control. The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , a random number circuit 104 and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105 .

The CPU 103 executes a program stored in the ROM 101 to perform processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the functions of the main substrate 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described later, effect control commands described later, data such as various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. . The RAM 102 is a backup RAM that retains stored contents for a predetermined period of time even if the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped in part or in its entirety. All or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be developed in the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102 .

The random number circuit 104 counts updatably numerical data representing various random numbers (game random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. The game random numbers may be updated (updated by software) when the CPU 103 executes a predetermined computer program.

The I/O 105 includes, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals to be described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, normal symbol display device 20, first reservation It includes an output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the indicator 25A, the second hold indicator 25B, the normal figure hold indicator 25C, and a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 receives detection signals from various switches for game ball detection (gate switch 21, starter switch (first starter switch 22A and second starter switch 22B), count switch 23) (when a game ball passes or A detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on by entering) is captured and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

The switch circuit 110 takes in a reset signal, a power-off signal, and a clear signal from the power board 17 and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100 . The reset signal is an operation stop signal for stopping the operation of the control circuit such as the game control microcomputer 100, and can be output using either the power supply monitoring circuit, the IC with built-in watchdog timer, or the system reset IC. I wish I had. The power-off signal turns off when a predetermined power supply voltage used in the pachinko game machine 1 exceeds a predetermined value, and turns on when the period in which the predetermined power supply voltage is equal to or less than the predetermined value continues for a power-off reference time or longer. Become. The clear signal is turned on, for example, when a clear switch provided on the power supply substrate 17 is pressed.

Solenoid circuit 111, a solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 100 (for example, a signal to turn on the solenoid 81 and the solenoid 82), to the solenoid 81 for normal electric accessories and the solenoid 82 for the big winning entrance door transmit.

A display monitor 29 , a display changeover switch 31 , a setting key 51 , a setting changeover switch 52 , and a door open sensor 90 are connected to the main board 11 . The door open sensor 90 detects opening of the gaming machine frame 3 including the glass door frame 3a.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100), as part of the control of the progress of the game, produces a production control command (a command to specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game. 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. - 特許庁The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, the display result of the special game (including the jackpot type), the variation pattern used when executing the special game (details will be described later). )), game status (for example, start and end of variable display, opening status of big winning slots, occurrence of winning, number of reserved memories, game status), commands specifying error occurrence, and the like.

The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives the effect control command, and produces effects based on the received effect control command (various effects according to the progress of the game, (including various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, power failure recovery notification, etc.).

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to execute a process for executing the effect together with the display control unit 123 (a process for realizing the above function of the effect control board 12, and the effect to be executed (including the decision, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as a main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by the player is detected and appropriately indicates the operation content). The controller 123 may also be instructed.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes an effect based on an effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120 .

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5 based on the performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120 . The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal designating the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on/off the game effect lamp 9 . Also, it supplies a lamp signal (a signal specifying the lighting/extinguishing mode of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14 . Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a driving circuit for driving the movable body 32 .

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on/off the game effect lamp 9 in a manner specified by the lamp signal. do. In this manner, the display control unit 123 controls sound output and lighting/extinguishing of the lamp.

The effect control CPU 120 executes voice output, lamp lighting/extinguishing control (supply of sound designation signals and lamp signals, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of signals for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 counts updatably numerical data indicating various random numbers (random numbers for effects) used for executing various effects. The effect random number may be updated by effect control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

I / O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 has an input port for taking in production control commands transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). and an output port of

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko game machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko game machine 1 will be described.

(Major operations of the main substrate 11)
First, main operations in the main board 11 will be described. When power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes game control main processing. FIG. 34 is a flow chart showing a game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11. As shown in FIG.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 34, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are performed (step S2). Initial settings include stack pointer setting, internal device register setting (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.), setting to make RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the recovery condition is satisfied (step S3). The recovery condition can be satisfied when the clear signal is in the OFF state, there is backup data, and the backup RAM is normal. When the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, for example, if a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed, a clear signal in an ON state is input to the game control microcomputer 100 . If such an on-state clear signal is input, it may be determined in step S3 that the restoration condition is not satisfied. It is sufficient that the backup data can be stored in the RAM 102 serving as a backup RAM for game control. In step S3, the presence or absence of backup data, the presence or absence of data errors, etc. may be confirmed or inspected to determine whether or not the recovery condition can be established.

If the restoration condition is satisfied (step S3; Yes), after executing the restoration process (step S4), the setting confirmation process (step S5) is executed. The work area is set based on the contents stored in the RAM 102 by the recovery process in step S4. By setting the work area using the backup data stored in the RAM 102, the game state when the power supply is stopped can be restored. It is sufficient if the pattern variation can be restarted.

If the recovery condition is not satisfied (step S3; No), the initialization process (step S6) is performed, and then the setting change process (step S7) is performed. The initialization processing in step S6 includes clear processing for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and initial values are set in the work area by executing the clear processing.

In the setting confirmation process of step S5, it is determined whether or not a predetermined setting confirmation condition is satisfied. The setting confirmation condition is established, for example, when the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is ON and the setting key 51 is ON when the power supply is started. The setting confirmation process of step S5 is executed when the recovery condition including the clear signal being in the OFF state is satisfied in step S3. Therefore, since the setting confirmation condition can be satisfied only when the clear signal is in the OFF state, the fact that the clear signal is in the OFF state can also be included in the setting confirmation condition.

When the setting confirmation condition is satisfied in the setting confirmation process of step S5, the setting confirmation state is entered in which the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 can be confirmed, and the main board 11 sets the performance control board 12. A confirmation start command is sent. In the setting confirmation state, the setting values set in the pachinko game machine 1 can be confirmed by the display on the display monitor 29 . When ending the setting confirmation state, a setting confirmation end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 .

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting confirmation state, the pachinko game machine 1 may be in a game stop state to stop the progress of the game. When the game is in the stopped state, shooting of game balls by operating the batted ball operation handle, detection of game balls by various switches, etc. are stopped, and the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the normal symbols are stopped. The display device 20 may be controlled so as to stop-display a lost symbol or the like, or to perform a display corresponding to a game stop state different from the lost symbol. When the setting confirmation state ends, the game stop state associated therewith should also end.

In the setting change process of step S7, it is determined whether or not a predetermined setting change condition is satisfied. The setting change condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is in the ON state and the setting key 51 is turned ON when power supply is started. The setting change condition may include that the clear signal is on.

When the setting change condition is satisfied in the setting change process of step S7, the setting change state is set in which the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 can be changed, and the main board 11 sets to the effect control board 12. A change start command is sent. In the setting change state, the setting values are displayed on the display monitor 29, and each time the operation of the setting changeover switch 52 is detected, the numerical values displayed on the display monitor 29 are sequentially updated and displayed. After that, when the setting key 51 is turned off by an operation by a game hall staff member or the like, the setting value displayed on the display monitor 29 is stored (updated) in the backup area of the RAM 102, and the display monitor 29 is updated. turn off the When ending the setting change state, a setting change end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 .

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting change state, the pachinko game machine 1 may be put in the game stop state as in the setting confirmation state. When the setting change state ends, the game stop state associated therewith should also end.

On the effect control board 12 side, when a setting confirmation start command or a setting change start command is received, control may be performed to notify that the setting is being checked or that the setting is being changed. For example, a predetermined image may be displayed on the image display device 5, a predetermined sound may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, or a light-emitting member such as the game effect lamp 9 may emit light in a predetermined manner.

The clear signal is turned on by pressing a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17, for example. Therefore, if the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is on when the power supply is started, and if the clear switch is on, the initialization process of step S6 and the step The setting change process of S7 is executed to enable control to the setting change state, and if the clear switch is off, the setting confirmation process of step S5 is executed together with the recovery process of step S4 to enable control to the setting confirmation state. If the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is off when the power supply is started, or if the setting key 51 is off, and if the clear switch is on, the initialization process of step S6 is executed. On the other hand, it is not controlled to the setting change state, and if the clear switch is off, the recovery processing of step S4 is executed, but it is not controlled to the setting confirmation state.

After executing the setting confirmation process or the setting change process, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S8). Then, the register of the CTC built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer interrupt is periodically applied every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S9), and the interrupt is permitted (step S10 ). After that, loop processing is entered. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

When the CPU 103 that has executed such game control main processing receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt processing shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not detection signals have been received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Subsequently, by executing predetermined main-side error processing, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko game machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of occurrences of jackpots, etc.), start information (start Data such as information indicating the number of wins, etc.), probability change information (information indicating the number of times the odd state has occurred, etc.) is output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process (step S25). By the CPU 103 executing the special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, execution and suspension management of the special symbol game, control of the big win game state and small win game state, control of the game state, and the like are realized.

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby managing the execution and suspension of the normal symbol game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41), It is possible to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on the "normal game hit". The execution of the normal pattern game is performed by driving the normal pattern display device 20, and the normal pattern reservation number is displayed by lighting the normal pattern reservation display device 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, as part of the game control timer interrupt processing, processing when power failure occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may transmit and set an effect control command in each of the processes described above. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to the sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, after permitting the interrupt, the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

FIG. 36 is a flow chart showing an example of processing executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 35 as the special symbol process processing. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a starting winning determination process (step S101).

In the starting winning determination process, the occurrence of starting winning is detected, and the process of storing the pending information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 and updating the pending storage number is executed. When a starting prize is generated, a random number value for determining the display result (including the jackpot type) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as pending information. Further, based on the extracted random number value, a process of pre-reading and judging the display result and the variation pattern may be executed. After storing the pending information and the number of pending memories, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for specifying the determination result such as the occurrence of the start winning, the number of pending memories, and the prefetch determination is performed on the effect control board 12. will be The effect control command at the time of start winning set to be transmitted in this manner is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. is transmitted to

After executing the starting prize determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM102. In addition, in each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal process of step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal process, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of pending information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random number value for determining the display result, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is a "big hit" or "small hit", and the type of the big hit in the case of "big hit". is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the special symbol normal process, a fixed special symbol (any one of a big hit symbol, a small winning symbol, or a losing symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal process ends. In addition, the special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also called special figure 2 priority digestion). Also, the winning order of the game balls to the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the start condition of the special game may be established in the order of winning (also called winning order).

When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) are referred to. Other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12 are the same. Various tables are stored in the ROM 121 of the effect control board 12 .

The variation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". In this variation pattern setting process, one of a plurality of variation patterns is selected using random numbers for determining the variation pattern based on the result of pre-determination as to whether the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit." including the process of determining In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern is the execution time of the special game (special figure fluctuation time) (also the execution time of variable display of decorative patterns), the form of variable display of decorative patterns (whether or not there is a reach, etc.), and the variable display of decorative patterns. It specifies the content of the production (type of reach production, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol variation processing includes a process of setting for varying the special symbols in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time after the special symbol starts to vary. It includes processing to measure Also, it is determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure variation time corresponding to the variation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation processing ends.

The special symbol stop processing of step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". In this special symbol stop processing, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B stop the variation of the special symbol, and stop display (derivate) the fixed special symbol which is the display result of the special symbol. It includes a process to set for Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". Moreover, when the display result is "losing", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small hit" or "losing", when the time saving state or probability variable state is controlled, and when the end of the number cut is established, the game state is also updated. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot opening preprocessing of step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". This jackpot opening pre-processing includes processing for making settings for starting the execution of the round in the jackpot game state and opening the jackpot, based on the fact that the display result is "jackpot". is When opening the big winning opening, a process of supplying a solenoid driving signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, an upper limit opening period for opening the big winning opening and an upper limit execution number of rounds are set according to the type of the jackpot. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the big hit opening pretreatment is completed.

The process during jackpot opening of step S115 is performed when the value of a special figure process flag is "5". In this process during the opening of the big win, there is a process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the big winning hole, and based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, the big winning hole is counted. It includes processing for determining whether or not it is time to return from the open state to the closed state. Then, when returning the large winning opening to the closed state, after executing processing such as stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6", The process during jackpot opening is terminated.

The jackpot opening post-processing of step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This jackpot opening post-processing includes processing for determining whether or not the number of executions of rounds in which the jackpot is opened has reached a set upper limit number of executions, and processing for judging whether or not the number of executions of rounds in which the jackpot is opened has reached a set upper limit number of executions. It includes processing to make settings for terminating . Then, when the number of executions of the round has not reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of executions of the round reaches the upper limit number of executions, the special process flag The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The jackpot end processing of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". This jackpot end processing includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which an ending production is executed as a production operation for notifying the end of the jackpot game state, and a probability change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing for performing various settings for starting control and time saving control. When such setting is performed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot ending process ends.

Small hit opening pretreatment of step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "8". This small hit opening pre-processing includes a process of setting to open the big winning opening in the small win game state based on the display result being "small win". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit opening preprocessing ends.

Small hit during opening processing of step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "9". In this process during opening of the small prize, there is a process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the big winning opening, and the timing of returning the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. It includes processing for determining whether or not When the big winning opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small winning game state comes, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the small winning open processing is ended.

Small hit end processing of step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "10". This small-hit end processing includes processing of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period in which the performance operation for informing the end of the small-hit game state is executed elapses. Here, when the small winning game state ends, the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 before entering the small winning game state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small winning game state has passed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small winning end processing ends.

The pachinko game machine 1 is configured such that the probability of winning a jackpot and the rate of winning balls are changed according to the set value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, by using the display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value, the probability of winning a big hit and the rate of winning balls are changed. For example, the setting value consists of 6 stages from 1 to 6, and 6 is the highest probability of winning the big win, and the probability of winning the big win decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 as the value decreases. In this example, when 6 is set as the setting value, the advantage for the player is the highest, and the lower the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, the lower the advantage in stages. . If the winning probability of the big win changes according to the set value, the ball payout rate may also change according to the set value. While the winning probability of the big win is constant regardless of the set value, the number of rounds in the big win game state may change according to the set value. The pachinko game machine 1 may be configured so as to be able to set one of a plurality of set values with different degrees of advantage for the player. The set values set in the pachinko game machine 1 are notified by transmitting a set value designation command from the main board 11 side to the effect control board 12 side.

FIG. 37 shows a configuration example of a display result determination table. Figure 37 (A) shows a configuration example of the display result determination table for the first special figure used when the variation special figure is the first special figure, and Figure 37 (B) shows that the variation special figure is the second special figure. It shows a configuration example of the display result determination table for the second special figure used when it is a figure. A display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101 . In the display result determination table, the hit determination value compared with the random number MR1 is assigned to the special symbol display result, which is the variable display result of the special symbol, according to the set value. The random number MR1 is a random number for determining the display result, and the value is randomly updated within the range of 0-65535. As the display result determination table, a common display result determination table may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

In the display result determination table, when the gaming state is a probability variable state (high probability state), more judgment values than when it is a normal state or a time saving state (low probability state), "big hit" special figure display assigned to the result. Thereby, when it is a high probability state such as a probability variable state in which probability variable control is performed in the pachinko game machine 1, the probability that it is determined to control to a big hit game state is higher than when it is a low probability state such as a normal state or a time saving state. get higher

In the first special figure display result determination table, regardless of the game state or set value, the probability of determining that the special figure display result is "small win" and controlled to the small win game state is determined to be the same value. has been assigned a value. In the second special figure display result determination table, regardless of the game state or setting value, the probability that the special figure display result is controlled to the small hit game state as "small hit" is the first special figure display result Determination values are assigned so as to be the same values different from those in the determination table. In addition, depending on the set value, the probability that the special figure display result is controlled to the small hit game state as the "small hit" may be changed. The probability that the special figure display result is controlled to the small winning game state as "small hit" regardless of the variation special figure may be the same probability.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure and the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit judgment value is set regardless of the set value It is set to the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot. When the set value is 1, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to the "jackpot", and only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set, while the set value 2 to set value 6 are set. In this case, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1238 is set as a non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure and the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the game state is the variable probability state, the range from 1020 to 1346 of the hit determination values is a big hit regardless of the set value. It is set to the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for judging. When the set value is 1, by assigning 1020 to 1346 to the "jackpot", only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set, while the set value 2 to the set value In the case of 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1346 is set as the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value.

In the first special figure display result determination table, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33094 of the hit determination values is a small value for determining a small hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the hit judgment value. The small-hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the big-hit determination value, regardless of whether the set value is 1-6. This prevents the numerical range of the small-hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the big-hit determination value that varies according to each set value.

In the first special figure display result determination table, when the gaming state is a variable probability state, the range from 32767 to 33094 in the hit determination value is the set value Regardless, it is set to a common numerical range of the small hit determination value for judging the small hit. The small-hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the big-hit determination value, regardless of whether the set value is 1-6. This prevents the numerical range of the small-hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the big-hit determination value that varies according to each set value.

In the second special figure display result determination table, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit determination values is a small value for determining a small hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the hit judgment value. The small-hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the big-hit determination value, regardless of whether the set value is 1-6. This prevents the numerical range of the small-hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the big-hit determination value that varies according to each set value.

In the second special figure display result determination table, when the gaming state is a variable probability state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit determination value is the set value Regardless, it is set to a common numerical range of the small hit determination value for judging the small hit. The small-hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the big-hit determination value, regardless of whether the set value is 1-6. This prevents the numerical range of the small-hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the big-hit determination value that varies according to each set value.

The set values that can be set in the pachinko game machine 1 may be 5 or less or 7 or more. The smaller the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the more advantageous it is for the player. The playability may be changed according to the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1. - 特許庁For example, when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320, and the probability variable state loops at a rate of 65% (so-called variable loop type). When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/200, and the game ball during the jackpot game is a predetermined value provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7. While controlling the game state after the end of the jackpot game to a probability variable state based on passing through the switch, the game property (so-called V variable probability type), and when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 3, the probability of a big hit is 1/320 and the probability of a small hit is 1/50, and the game is played during a high base (during time reduction control). A game property (a so-called one-type two-type mixed type) that controls a big hit game state based on the passage of a ball through a predetermined switch provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7 may be employed. When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 1 to 3, the game performance is the same, but the big win probability and small win probability are higher than when these set values are any one of 1 to 3. A setting may be provided in which the probability is high and the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the jackpot game is small (for example, the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6). A common switch may be used for different purposes when game characteristics are changed according to a set value. Specifically, when the set value is 1 to 3, a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is set to a production switch (for executing a predetermined production each time a game ball passes through a prescribed area). switch), and when the set value is 4 to 6, the predetermined switch is a game switch (for controlling the game state to a variable probability state or a big hit game state based on the game ball passing through the predetermined switch switch).

The jackpot type may be determined at different ratios depending on the set value based on the assignment of the determination value in the jackpot type determination table. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. The variation pattern may be determined at different ratios according to the set values based on the assignment of the determination values in the variation pattern determination table. Alternatively, the variation pattern may be determined with a common ratio regardless of the set value. A set value may be suggested by the frequency with which normal reach and super reach are performed by having the execution ratio of normal reach and super reach differ according to a set value. Alternatively, regardless of the setting value, the execution ratio of normal reach and super reach may be common. In addition, it may be possible to execute arbitrary setting suggestion effects at different ratios according to the set values.

(Major operations of production control board 12)
Next, main operations in the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated, and the effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 38 is executed. When the production control main processing shown in FIG. Perform register setting of the mounted CTC (counter/timer circuit). Also, an initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial motion control process, control for initial motion of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return it to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined motion, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to ON every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, the CTC register setting. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeated and waits.

Also, on the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that occurs each time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is an interrupt generated when, for example, the effect control INT signal from the main substrate 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets interrupt prohibition, but when using a CPU that does not automatically enter an interrupt prohibition state, interrupt It is desirable to issue a prohibition instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to the interruption caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port for receiving the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15 among the input ports included in the I/O 125 . The effect control command taken in at this time is stored in the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the effect control CPU 120 ends the command reception interrupt process after setting the interrupt permission.

If the timer interrupt flag is ON at step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to be turned off (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands that are transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control command Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read production control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, or the read production control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 so that the content specified by the production control command can be confirmed by the production control process processing or the like. It turns on the provided reception flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background corresponding to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light emitters such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED, and the movable body 32 Control to operate various production devices such as driving operation of is performed. Further, determination, determination, setting, and the like are performed according to the effect control command and the like transmitted from the main substrate 11 regarding the control contents of the effect operation using various effect devices.

Random number update processing for production|presentation is performed following the production|presentation control process processing of step S76 (step S77), and at least one part of the random number for production|presentation used by the production|presentation control board 12 side is updated by software. After that, the process returns to step S73. Other processing may be performed before returning to the processing of step S73.

FIG. 39 is a flow chart showing an example of processing executed in step S76 of FIG. 38 as the effect control process processing. In the effect control process shown in FIG. 39, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a pre-reading notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, based on the effect control command at the time of start winning transmitted from the main substrate 11, determination, determination, setting, etc. for executing the pre-reading notice effect are performed. Also, a process for displaying a pending display is executed based on the number of pending memories specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the processes of steps S170 to S177 as described below according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command designating the start of variable display has been received from the main substrate 11. and so on. When it is determined to start the variable display of the decoration pattern on the image display device 5, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the form of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the ready-to-win effect, and various other Whether or not to execute various effects such as advance notice effects, its mode, execution start timing, etc. are determined. Then, an effect control pattern (collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) reflecting the determination result or the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start execution of variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of the decorative design in response to an instruction to start execution of variable display of the decorative design.

The effect process during variable display in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , driving the movable body 32, outputting voices and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting commands (sound effect signals) to the voice control board 13, and outputting commands (illumination signals) to the lamp control board 14. Various effects are controlled during the variable display of decorative patterns, such as turning on/off/blinking the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs by output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern is read from the effect control pattern, or a command designating to stop display of the fixed decorative pattern is received from the main board 11. Corresponding to the fact that the player has done so, the fixed decoration pattern which becomes the display result of the decoration pattern is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decoration pattern is stopped and displayed, the value of the production process flag is updated to "3", and the production process during variable display ends.

The special figure per waiting process of step S173 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is "3". In this special figure per waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command designating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received from the main substrate 11 . Then, when receiving the production control command designating the start of the jackpot game state or the small hit game state, if the command designates the start of the jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "6". ”. On the other hand, if the command designates the start of the small-hit game state, the value of the production process flag is updated to "4", which is the value corresponding to the small-hit production process. Further, when the waiting time for receiving the command elapses without receiving the command specifying the start of the big win game state or the small win game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is "losing". Then, the value of the production process flag is updated to "0" which is the initial value. When the value of the production process flag is updated, the special figure per waiting process is terminated.

The production process during a small hit in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is "4". In this small-hit mid-performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the small-hit game state, and executes various performance controls in the small-hit game state based on the set content. . Further, in the small-hit middle production process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating to end the small-hit game state from the main board 11, the value of the production process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small-hit end production. It is updated to a certain "5", and the effect processing during the small hit is ended.

The small hit end production process of step S175 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is "5". In this small hit end effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the small win game state, etc., and various effect control at the end of the small win game state based on the setting content. to run. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value of "0", and the small winning end effect process is terminated.

The effect process during the big hit in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "6". In this big-hit production process, the production control CPU 120 sets, for example, production control patterns corresponding to the production contents in the big-hit game state, and executes various production controls in the big-hit game state based on the set contents. Further, in the jackpot middle effect process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating to end the big win game state from the main board 11, the value of the effect process flag is set to "7" which is a value corresponding to the ending effect process. ”, and ends the effect processing during the big hit.

The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, effect control patterns corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, etc., and controls various effects of the ending effect at the end of the jackpot game state based on the set contents. Run. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value of "0", and the ending effect process is terminated.

(Modified example of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko game machine 1 described in the basic description above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the gist of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as prizes based on the occurrence of winning, but the game media are enclosed and points are awarded based on the occurrence of winning. It may be an enclosed game machine.

Only one type of pattern (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special pattern, and the variable display may be performed by repeating the display and extinguishing of the relevant pattern. Further, even if the pattern is displayed during the variable display, the pattern may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as a display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as the gaming machine, but medals are inserted to set a predetermined number of bets. A slot machine capable of executing a game (for example, a big bonus , regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter referred to as a slot machine equipped with one or more bonuses, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form of being distributed/provided on a detachable recording medium to the computer device or the like included in the pachinko game machine 1. It may be distributed by being installed in a storage device possessed by the software. Furthermore, the program and data for realizing the present invention can be distributed by being downloaded from another device on the network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. I don't mind.

The game can be executed not only by inserting a detachable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing programs and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. Alternatively, it may be directly executed using hardware resources of other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, expressions for comparing various ratios such as the execution ratio of effects (expressions such as “high”, “low”, “different”) indicate that one is a ratio of “0%”. may contain. For example, one of them may have a ratio of “0%” and the other may have a ratio of “100%” or less than “100%”.

(Description of Characteristic Portion 079SG)
Next, the characteristic portion 079SG (hereinafter abbreviated as the characteristic portion 079SG) in the embodiment of the present invention will be described. FIG. 40-1 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like installed in the pachinko game machine 1 in the characteristic part 079SG. As shown in FIG. 40-1, the sound control board 13 in the feature part 079SG includes a voice synthesizing board 13 for generating sounds (effect sounds) output from the speakers 8L and 8R in cooperation with the effect control CPU 120. An IC079SG132, an amplifier circuit (amplifier) 079SG134 for amplifying the output sound of the sound generated by the voice synthesis CI079SG132, and a voice data ROM 079SG133 are mounted. Sound number data is output to the voice synthesizing IC079SG132 based on the effect control command to cause the voice synthesizing IC079SG132 to generate a sound corresponding to the sound number data.

When sound number data is input from the effect control CPU 120, the voice synthesis IC 079SG 132 generates voices and effect sounds corresponding to the input sound number data for each of the speakers 8L and 8R and outputs them to the amplifier circuit 079SG 134. Output. The amplifier circuit 079SG134 amplifies the voice and sound effects output from the voice synthesizing IC079SG132, and outputs them to the speakers 8L and 8R.

The sound data ROM 079SG133 stores control data for each of the speakers 8L and 8R for outputting sounds corresponding to the effects executed by the effect command corresponding to the sound number data in association with the sound number data. . In other words, these control data are the output mode (frequency characteristics, timing (delay), etc.) of sounds such as sound effects and BGM (music) output from the speakers 8L and 8R during the performance period (for example, the decorative pattern variable display period). is a collection of data including voice data and the like described in chronological order.

FIG. 40-2(A) is an explanatory diagram showing the image display device 5 in the feature part 079. FIG. The display area of the image display device 5 in the characteristic portion 079SG is formed in a rectangular shape having a height L and a left-right width L when viewed from the front. Most of the display area constitutes a first display area 079SG005F for displaying effects such as a variable display of decoration patterns, a ready-to-win effect, an operation promotion effect and a still image display effect, which will be described later. In addition, the lower end of the image display device 5 has a first reserved storage display area 079SG005D that can display the number of the first special figure reserved storage by the number of the reserved display of the white circle, and the number of the second special figure reserved storage A second display area 079SG005Sa including a second reserved storage display area 079SG005U that can be displayed according to the number of circular reserved displays and a telop display area 079SG005T that can display a telop indicating a game state is configured.

That is, of the entire display area of the image display device 5, the portion excluding the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb is the first display area 079SG005F.

In addition, the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb display information related to the game (holding display, telop display, fourth symbol) at the periphery of the display area of the image display device 5 rather than the first display area 079SG005F. , and the number of reserved memories). That is, the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb in the characteristic portion 079SG are also UI (user interface) display areas in the pachinko gaming machine 1 .

And the upper right end of the image display device 5 includes the display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J indicating that the special symbol is being variably displayed, the number of first special figure pending storage, and the number of second special figure pending storage. 3 display area 079SG005Sb.

Of these, the second display area 079SG005Sa is formed in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and its height is less than half the height H of the entire display area of the image display device 5. The horizontal width is formed to have the same length as the horizontal width L of the entire display area of the image display device 5 . The third display area 079SG005Sb is formed in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, but its height and lateral width are formed extremely shorter than the height H and lateral width L of the entire display area of the image display device 5. there is

Therefore, in the characteristic portion 079SG, the area of the first display area 079SG005F that occupies the entire display area of the image display device 5 is larger than the total area of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb. .

As shown in FIG. 40-2(B), in the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D and the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U, the effect control CPU 120 executes the later-described reserved display operation processing (see FIG. 38-13). As a result, each hold display can be rotated around the vertical axis at a constant speed (for example, rotation speed V3).

As shown in FIG. 40-2(C), in the telop display area 079SG005T, the effect control CPU 120 executes a telop operation process (see FIG. 40-13) described later, so that the game state and the effect being executed are displayed. A message (for example, if a specific ready-to-win effect is in progress, a message corresponding to the state of the effect, such as "In XX mode!") is moved from left to right at a constant speed (e.g., movement speed V3). It is possible to display one

It should be noted that the characters included in the message corresponding to the game state are displayed again at the left end of the telop display area 079SG005T at the same time when the display reaches the right end of the telop display area 079SG005T and is displayed again from the left to the right. is moved in the direction Therefore, when the message corresponding to the game state is displayed while being moved in the telop display area 079SG005T, the entire message corresponding to the game state is always displayed in the telop display area 079SG005T, so that the player can It is easy to recognize the current game state.

In addition, in this characteristic part 079SG, the suspension display in the first suspension memory display area 079SG005D and the second suspension storage display area 079SG005U and the message in the telop display area 079SG005T are rotated and moved at a common constant speed (V3). Although it is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this. It may be possible to rotate and move with

As shown in FIG. 40-2(D), the fourth pattern 079SG005J has an upper pattern 079SG005Ja and a lower pattern 079SG005Jb, and these upper pattern 079SG005Ja and lower pattern 079SG005Jb alternately blink at a constant cycle. , to indicate that the special symbols are being displayed in a variable manner. In addition, the upper pattern 079SG005Ja and the lower pattern 079SG005Jb are both extinguished (turned OFF) at the end timing of the variable display when the variable display result is lost, while the variable display result is a big hit or a loss. In this case, both are lit (turned ON) at the end timing of the variable display.

It should be noted that the display of the first special figure pending memory number and the display of the second special figure pending memory number in the third display area 079SG005Sb are the timing when a new pending memory is generated and the timing when a new variable display is started. is the only display whose number changes. In other words, the display of the first special figure reserved memory number and the display of the second special figure reserved memory number in the third display area 079SG005Sb are the fourth pattern 079SG005J, the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D and the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U , Unlike the telop display area 079SG005T, the display mode does not change except for the start timing of the variable display.

Next, the display control section 123 in the characteristic section 079SG will be described. The CGROM in the display control unit 123 stores a plurality of types of image data for displaying images on the image display device 5 . The display control unit 123 can cause the image display device 5 to display a predetermined image based on one image data stored in the CGROM based on an instruction from the effect control CPU 120, and can display a plurality of types of image data. By arranging and displaying an image on the image display device 5, it is possible to display a predetermined effect screen. When the predetermined image is not to be displayed on the image display device 5, depending on the situation, other image data may be placed in front of the image data of the predetermined image with a transmittance of 0%. In the case of controlling so as not to display the image based on the data on the performance screen, and by displaying the image on the image display device 5 which created the display data not arranging the image data of the prescribed image, the prescribed image is not displayed on the performance screen. may be controlled as follows.

As shown in FIGS. 40-3(A) to 40-3(D), for example, when displaying an image on the image display device 5, a plurality of image data including image data 1 to 3 are arranged. An image is displayed on the image display device 5 based on the created display data.

As shown in FIG. 40-3(A), the image data 1 displays the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T in the second display area 079SG005Sa. Data drawn to display the pattern 079SG005J in the third display area 079SG005Sb. It is also data drawn to display the small pattern of the image data 1 decoration pattern in the first display area 079SG005F (left side of the third display area 079SG005Sb).

As shown in FIG. 40-3(B), the image data 2 is data drawn to display images of a chance-up effect, a still image display effect, and an operation promotion effect, which will be described later, in the first display area 079SG005F. .

As shown in FIG. 40-3(C), the image data 3 is data drawn for displaying the variable display of decorative patterns and the ready-to-win effect in the first display area 079SG005F.

Incidentally, as shown in FIGS. 40-3(A) to 40-3(C), the image data 1, image data 2, and image data 3 have display priorities for displaying images on the image display device 5. is set. The highest display priority is set for image data 1, and the lowest is set for image data 3 (image display priority in image display device 5: image data 1>image data 2>image data 3). . That is, in the image display device 5, the image based on the image data 1 is displayed as the uppermost image, the image based on the image data 2 is displayed as the lower image than the image based on the image data 1, and the image based on the image data 3 is displayed. The image is displayed as an image in a lower layer (bottom layer) than the image based on the image data 1 and the image based on the image data 2 . Therefore, as shown in FIG. 40-3(D), in the image display device 5, the image based on the image data 2 is displayed with priority over the image based on the image data 3, and the image based on the image data 1 is displayed. The image based on the image data 2 and the image based on the image data 3 are preferentially displayed.

When the image based on the image data 1, the image based on the image data 2, and the image based on the image data 3 are simultaneously displayed on the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. is displayed as the lowest hierarchical image, the image based on the image data 3 may be at least partly invisible or invisible due to the image based on the first data or the image based on the image data 2. There is

In this characteristic portion 079SG, although the details will be described later, the images based on the image data 1 and the image data 2 are displayed on the image display device 5 as moving images whose progress speed is always constant, while the image data 3 Based on the data stored in the CGROM in advance, the images are displayed on the image display device 5 as moving images and still images of a plurality of advancing speeds.

In particular, in this feature part 079SG, although the details will be described later, the display of the animation of the reach effect during the reach effect of the super reach can be executed at the normal progress speed V1 and the progress speed V2 (slow motion) slower than V1. It has become. This is because the data for the moving image to be displayed at the advancing speed V1 and the data for the moving image to be displayed at the advancing speed V2 are stored in advance in the CGROM, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, only the data for the effect animation to be displayed at the progress speed V1 is stored in advance in the CGROM, and by performing predetermined processing on the data, part of the effect animation for the ready-to-win effect is displayed at the progress speed V2. It may be possible to display

In this way, in the present characteristic section 079SG, by setting the video progress speed, which is the speed at which the effect moving image changes, to V1, the progress speed of the ready-to-win effect recognized by the player becomes the first speed, and during the non-slow motion period, the video By setting the progressing speed to V2, which is slower than V1, the slow motion period is set in which the progressing speed of the ready-to-win effect recognized by the player is the second slow speed. In other words, the slow-motion moving image, which is the effect moving image whose rendering progress speed is slow in this characteristic portion 079SG, is displayed before the slow-motion moving image, and the image progressing speed is V1 compared to the non-slow-motion moving image. Anything with a slow speed is fine.

In addition, in this characteristic part 079SG, the form in which the slow motion period is provided in all the super reach effects is exemplified (see FIGS. 40-18 to 40-25), but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, for example, as a super reach effect, the contents of the effect animation itself displayed on the image display device 5 are the same as the contents of the super reach effect shown in FIGS. does not change from V1 to V2, that is, by executing a super reach effect that does not become a slow motion period, in the super reach effect shown in FIGS. 40-18 to 40-25, the slow motion period may be made easier for the player to recognize.

That is, in the case of executing the super ready-to-win effect in which the content of the effect moving image is the same as described above but the video progress speed does not change to V2, the effect moving image having the second speed slower than the first speed in the present invention is used. means that the effect moving image of the same content is displayed at a video progressing speed V2 that is slower than the video progressing speed V1 in the non-slow motion super reach effect, so that the duration is longer than that of the non-slow motion super reach effect. The effect moving image to be displayed corresponds.

In addition, as described above, in this feature part 079SG, by slowing down the image progress speed of the effect moving image, a slow motion effect is configured in which the progress speed of the ready-to-win effect that the player feels is slow, and the sound from the speakers 8L and 8R , does not change from the playback speed V3, but the present invention is not limited to this. By accelerating the reproduction speed of the sound output from the game effect lamp 9 and the light emission cycle of the game effect lamp 9, a pseudo slow motion may be constructed in which the player feels that the progress speed of the ready-to-win performance has slowed down.

That is, the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the present characteristic portion 079SG is provided with a plurality of effect output means including display means capable of displaying effect moving images, and among these effect output means, at least one effect output means advances the effect is different between the slow-motion period and the non-slow-motion period so that the player can recognize that the effect being executed is the slow-motion during the slow-motion period.

In addition, in this characteristic part 079SG, the display of the effect moving image of the reach effect is always displayed at the progress speed V2 during the slow motion period, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the slow motion The period may change the progress speed of the display of the effect animation of the ready-to-win effect (for example, the progress speed gradually decreases with the passage of time, or the progress speed increases and decreases within a predetermined range).

FIG. 40-4(A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of the effect control command used in this characteristic portion 079SG. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte configuration, where the first byte indicates MODE (class of command) and the second byte indicates EXT (type of command). The leading bit (bit 7) of MODE data is always set to "1", and the leading bit of EXT data is set to "0". The command form shown in FIG. 40-4(A) is an example, and other command forms may be used. Also, in this example, the control command is made up of two control signals, but the number of control signals that make up the control command may be one, or three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 40-4 (A), the command 8001H is the first variable display start command that designates the start of variable display in the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A. . Command 8002H is a second variable display start command that designates the start of variable display in the special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in each of the "left", "middle" and "right" decoration design display areas 5L, 5C and 5R on the image display device 5 corresponding to the variable display of the special design in the special game. It is a variation pattern specification command that specifies a variation pattern (variation time (variable display time)) such as a design (also referred to as a production design). Here, XXH indicates that it is an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value that is arbitrarily set according to the contents of instructions by the effect control command. In the variation pattern specification command, different EXT data are set according to the specified variation pattern.

Command 8CXXH is a variable display result designation command, and is an effect control command for designating a variable display result such as a special design or a decorative design. In the variable display result designation command, for example, as shown in FIG. 40-4(B), it is determined whether the variable display result (also referred to as variable display result) is "loss" or "big win" or "minor win". Different EXT data are set according to the result (predetermined result) or the determination result (jackpot type determination result) of a plurality of types of jackpot types when the variable display result is "big hit".

Among the variable display result specifying commands, for example, as shown in FIG. 40-4(B), the command 8C00H is the first variable display result specifying command indicating the predetermined result that the variable display result is "no". . The command 8C01H is a second variable display result specification command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probability variable jackpot A" and the jackpot type determination result. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result specifying command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big win type is "probability variable big hit B" and the big win type determination result. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result specification command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probability variable jackpot C" and the jackpot type determination result. The command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the jackpot type is "unprobable variable jackpot". The command 8C05H is a sixth variable display result designation command for notifying a pre-determined result that the variable display result will be a "minor hit".

The command 8F00H is a pattern confirmation command for designating the stoppage (confirmation) of the decorative design in the “left”, “middle” and “right” decorative design display areas 5L, 5C and 5R of the image display device 5 . The command 95XXH is a game state designation command that designates the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. FIG. In the game state designation command, different EXT data are set according to the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. As a specific example, the command 9500H is the first game state designation command corresponding to the game state (low probability low base state, normal state) in which neither the time saving control nor the probability variation control is performed, and the command 9501H is the time saving control. It is a second game state designation command corresponding to a game state (low probability high base state, short working time state) in which probability variation control is not performed while being performed. In addition, the command 9502H is the third game state designation command corresponding to the game state (high probability low base state, time saving no probability change state) where the time saving control is not performed while the probability change control is performed, and the command 9503H is time saving control and probability change The fourth game state designation command corresponds to the game state (high-probability-high base state, time-saving probability-variable state) in which control is performed together.

The command A0XXH is a win start designation command (also called a "fanfare command") for designating display of an effect image indicating the start of a big win game or a small win game. The command A1XXH is a large winning opening open notification command for notifying that the large winning opening is in an open state in the jackpot gaming state. The command A2XXH is a post-opening notification command for the large winning opening to notify that the large winning opening has changed from the open state to the closed state in the jackpot gaming state. The command A3XXH is a win end designation command for designating display of an effect image at the end of a big win game or a small win.

In the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, for example, by setting the same EXT data as the variable display result designation command, different EXT data may be set according to the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result. . Alternatively, in the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, the correspondence relationship between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence relationship in the variable display result designation command. . In the notification command during the opening of the big winning opening and the notification command after opening the big winning opening, for example, different EXT data is set corresponding to the number of rounds executed in the jackpot state described later (for example, "1" to "10"). .

The command B100H is based on the fact that a game ball that has passed through (entered) the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and a starting winning (first starting winning) has occurred. It is a first start winning designation command for notifying that the first starting condition for executing the special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied. The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball passing through (entering) the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and the starting winning (second starting winning) occurs. , It is a second starting opening winning designation command for notifying that the second starting condition for executing the special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B is satisfied.

Command C1XXH is a first reserved storage number notification command for notifying the first special figure reserved storage number in order to be able to specify the special figure reserved storage number. Command C2XXH is a second pending storage number notification command for notifying the second special figure pending storage number in order to be able to specify the special figure pending storage number. The first pending memory number notification command is, for example, based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first starting condition is satisfied, when the first starting opening winning designation command is transmitted , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 . The second pending memory number notification command is, for example, based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second starting condition is satisfied, when the second starting opening winning designation command is transmitted , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 . In addition, the first reserved memory number notification command and the second reserved memory number notification command are used when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the number of reserved memories decreases), the special game It may be transmitted in response to the start of execution or the like.

Instead of the first reserved storage number notification command and the second reserved storage number notification command, a total reserved storage number notification command for notifying the total reserved storage number may be transmitted. That is, a total pending storage number notification command may be used to report an increase (or decrease) in the total pending storage number.

It should be noted that the commands shown in FIG. 40-4(A) are only examples, and some of these commands may be omitted, different commands may be used in place of these commands, and these commands may be used instead of these commands. You can add commands that are different from the commands in For example, a prize ball number notification command for specifying the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the game ball entering each prize hole, or a gate for notifying that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41. You may make it provide the notification command etc. which notify the remaining frequency|count of notification of passage notification command, probability variation control, and time saving control are performed.

FIG. 40-5 is an explanatory diagram illustrating random numbers counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in FIG. 40-5, in this characteristic portion 079SG, on the side of the main board 11, the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, the random number MR2 for jackpot type determination, and the random number MR3 for variation pattern determination. , and the random number MR4 for judging the result of normal/universal figure display are controlled so as to be countable. Random numbers other than these may be used in order to enhance the game effect. Random numbers used to control the progress of such games are also called game random numbers.

The random number circuit 104 may count numerical data representing part or all of these random numbers MR1 to MR4. The CPU 103 uses a random counter different from the random number circuit 104, such as a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 079SG154 shown in FIG. Numerical data indicating part of MR1 to MR4 may be counted.

The random number MR1 for judging the special figure display result is a random number used for determining whether or not to control the variable display result such as the special figure in the special figure game as "big hit" to the big win game state. It takes a value in the range from "1" to "65536". The random number MR2 for judging the type of jackpot is any one of "variable jackpot A", "variable jackpot B", "variable jackpot C", and "variable jackpot" when the variable display result is "jackpot". It is a random value used to determine the , and takes a value in the range of "1" to "100", for example.

The random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern is a random number used to determine one of a plurality of types prepared in advance for the variation pattern in the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols. 997”.

The random number MR4 for judging the result of normal pattern display is used to determine whether the variable display result in the normal pattern display device 20 in the normal pattern display is "win" or "lose". It is a random number that can be set, and takes a value in the range of "3" to "13", for example.

FIG. 40-6 (A) shows a configuration example of the special figure display result determination table 1 stored in the ROM101. In this feature part 079SG, as a special figure display result determination table, a common special figure display result determination table is used for the first special figure and the second special figure, but the present invention is not limited to this , Separate special figure display result determination tables may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

The special figure display result determination table 1 is a variable display result in a special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A and a special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. Before the determined special symbol is derived and displayed, whether or not to control the variable display result as "big hit" to the big hit game state is determined based on the random number MR1 for judging the special figure display result. It is a referenced table.

In the special figure display result determination table 1 in this characteristic portion 079SG, depending on whether the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 is a normal state or a time saving state (low probability state) or a probability variable state (high probability state), A numerical value (judgment value) to be compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment is assigned to the special figure display result of "jackpot" or "loss".

In the special figure display result determination table 1, the table data showing the determination value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for special figure display result determination is whether or not to control the special figure display result as "big win" to the big win game state. It is judgment data assigned to the decision result. In the special figure display result determination table 1 in this characteristic portion 079SG, when the gaming state is a variable probability state (high probability state), more determination values than when it is a normal state or a time saving state (low probability state), It is assigned to the special figure display result of "jackpot". As a result, in the variable probability state (high probability state) where the variable probability control is performed in the pachinko game machine 1, when the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state), the special figure display result is set as "big hit" and controlled to the big hit game state. Then, compared to the determined probability (approximately 1/300 in this characteristic portion 079SG), the probability of being determined when the special figure display result is set as "big hit" and controlled to the big hit game state becomes higher (approximately 1 in this characteristic portion 079SG). /30). That is, in the special figure display result determination table 1, when the game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a probability variable state (high probability state), it is determined to control to a big hit game state compared to when it is a normal state or a time saving state. Judgment data is assigned to the decision result as to whether or not to control to the jackpot game state so that the probability of winning is increased.

In addition, FIG. 40-6 (B) shows a configuration example of the special figure display result determination table 2 stored in the ROM101. The special figure display result determination table 2 is a variable display result in a special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A and a special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. Before the determined special symbol is derived and displayed, it is determined based on the random number MR1 for determining the special symbol display result whether or not to control the variable display result to a small winning game state as a "small win". is a table referenced for

In the special figure display result determination table 2 in this characteristic portion 079SG, regardless of whether the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 is a normal state or a time saving state (low probability state) or a variable probability state (high probability state), A numerical value (determined value) to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is assigned to the special figure display result of "small hit".

In the special figure display result determination table 2, the table data indicating the determination value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for special figure display result determination is whether or not to control the special figure display result as "small hit" to the small hit game state. It is the judgment data assigned to the decision result. In the special figure display result determination table 2 in the characteristic part 079SG, the number of judgment values assigned to the "small hit" differs between the first special figure game and the second special figure. there is Specifically, in the case of the special game of the first special figure, the judgment value is assigned to the "small hit", but in the case of the special figure game of the second special figure, the judgment value is assigned to the "small hit". No judgment value is assigned. Therefore, as will be described later, the variable display of the second special figure is executed with priority over the variable display of the first special figure, and the second start winning prize formed by the variable winning ball device 6B by executing the time saving control In the high base state where the winning to the mouth occurs and the variable display of the second special figure is often executed, the "small hit" almost does not occur, and the second start formed by the variable winning ball device 6B In a high base state in which game balls are likely to enter the prize winning opening, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of small hits in which a large number of game balls cannot be acquired, thereby preventing the game interest from deteriorating.

FIG. 40-7(A) shows a configuration example of a jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. FIG. The jackpot type determination table in this characteristic part 079SG is based on the random number MR2 for jackpot type determination, when it is determined to control the special figure display result as "big hit" to the jackpot game state. It is a table that is referenced to determine whether In the big hit type determination table, the special symbol for which variable display (variable display) is performed in the special symbol game is the first special symbol (special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A) or the second special symbol (second 2 special symbol display device 4B), the numerical value (judgment value) to be compared with the random number MR2 for judging the type of jackpot is "non-probability variable jackpot", "probability variable jackpot A", " It is assigned to a plurality of types of jackpots, such as "probability variable big hit B" and "probability variable big hit C".

Here, the jackpot type in this feature part 079SG will be described with reference to FIG. 40-7 (B). ``Probability variable jackpot A'', ``probability variable jackpot B'', and ``probability variable jackpot C'' that are executed and shifted to a high probability high base state, and only time-saving control is executed after the jackpot game state is completed to a low probability high base state. The "non-probable variable jackpot" to be shifted is set.

The big win game state by the "probability variable big win A" is a big win in which 10 rounds (so-called 10 rounds) of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeated. The big win game state by the "probability variable big win B" is a big win in which 5 rounds (so-called 5 rounds) of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeatedly executed. The big win game state by the "probability variable big win C" is a big win in which two rounds (so-called two rounds) of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeatedly executed. In addition, the big win game state by "non-probability variable big win" is a big win in which two rounds (so-called two rounds) of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeatedly executed. Therefore, "variable big hit A" is called 10 rounds (10R) big hit, "variable big hit B" is called 5 rounds (5R) big hit, and "variable big hit C" is called 2 rounds (2R) big hit. In some cases, the “non-probability variable jackpot” is referred to as a 2-round (2R) non-probability variable jackpot.

In addition, although not shown in the figure, the small winning game state in this characteristic portion 079SG changes the special variable winning ball device 7 twice to the first state that is advantageous for the player, and the opening time is the same as the probability variable big win C. It is an open period (0.1 seconds in this characteristic part 079SG). In addition, after the end of the small winning game, the game state immediately before the small winning game is taken over.

High-precision control and time-saving control executed after the end of the jackpot game state of the variable probability big win A, the variable probability big win B, and the variable probability big win C are continuously executed until the big win occurs again after the end of the big win game state. . Therefore, when the reoccurring big win is the variable probability big win A or the variable probability big win B, the high probability control and the time saving control are executed again after the big win game state ends, so that the big win game state does not go through the normal state. It becomes a so-called continuous state, which occurs continuously.

On the other hand, the time-saving control executed after the end of the jackpot game state by the "non-probable variable jackpot" is that a special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in this feature part 079SG), or the special figure of the predetermined number of times The game ends when a big win game state is entered before the game is executed.

In the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 40-7 (A), depending on whether the special figure to be variably displayed is the first special figure or the second special figure, "probability variable jackpot A", " Assignment of determination values to the jackpot types of "probability variable jackpot B", "probability variable jackpot C", and "non-probability variable jackpot" is different. That is, if the special figure to be variably displayed is the first special figure, the judgment value in the predetermined range (the value in the range of "81" to "100") has a small number of rounds "variable hit B" or "variable probability While assigned to the jackpot type of "jackpot C", when the special figure displayed variably is the second special figure, the judgment value is assigned to the jackpot type of "probability variation jackpot B" or "probability variation jackpot C" Not done. With such a setting, the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the establishment of the first start condition for starting the special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A. When the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the establishment of the second start condition for starting the special pattern game using the second special pattern by the second special pattern display device 4B. , the ratio of determining the jackpot type to the "probability variable jackpot B" or "probability variable jackpot C" with a small number of rounds can be made different. In particular, in the special game using the second special figure, it is not decided to control the jackpot type as "probable variable big hit B" or "probable variable big hit C" to a big hit state with a small number of rounds, so for example, it is associated with time saving control. In a game state in which game balls are likely to enter the second starting prize opening formed by the variable prize ball device 6B, frequent occurrence of a big hit state with few prize balls to be obtained is avoided by the high opening control, and the interest in the game is reduced. It is designed to prevent this from happening.

In addition, in the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 40-7 (A), the allocation of the determination value for the "non-variable" jackpot type is the first special figure special figure game or the second special figure Since it is the same regardless of whether it is a non-variable jackpot or a definite variable jackpot, the probability is the same regardless of whether it is the first special game or the second special game. It is said that

Therefore, as described above, the allocation of the determination value for "variable probability big hit B" and "variable probability big hit C" depends on whether it is a special game of the first special figure or a second special figure. Then, the allocation of the judgment value for the "probable variable jackpot A" also differs depending on whether it is the special game of the first special figure or the second special figure. It is set to be easier to determine in the case of the special game of the special figure than in the case of the first special figure of the special game.

In addition, even in the case of the special game of the second special figure, the judgment value of the predetermined range different from that of the special game of the first special figure is the "variable probability big hit B" or "variable probability big hit C". You may make it assign to a classification. For example, in the case of the special game of the second special figure, the judgment value less than that of the special game of the first special figure is the big hit type of "probable variable big hit B" or "probable variable big hit C". may be assigned. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined by referring to common table data regardless of whether the game is the special game of the first special figure or the second special figure.

FIG. 40-8 shows the variation pattern in this characteristic portion 079SG. In this characteristic portion 079SG, among the cases where the variable display result is "loss", the variable A plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance so as to correspond to cases where the display result is a "big win" or a "minor win". In addition, the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "miss" and the variation display mode of the decoration pattern is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach loss variation pattern"), A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "loss" and the variation display mode of the decoration pattern is "reach" is called a reach variation pattern (also referred to as "reach loss variation pattern"). Also, the non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the loss variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "loss". A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "big hit" is called a big hit variation pattern.

The jackpot variation pattern and reach variation pattern include a normal reach variation pattern in which a normal reach reach effect is executed and a super reach variation pattern in which a super reach reach effect is executed. It should be noted that although only one type of normal reach variation pattern is provided in this characteristic portion 079SG, the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of normal reach variation patterns such as normal reach α, normal reach β, etc. may be provided. Moreover, even in the super reach variation pattern, a plurality of super reach variation patterns such as super reach α, super reach β, . . . may be provided.

It should be noted that the variation pattern in the characteristic portion 079SG also includes a special winning variation pattern (PC1-1) corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "minor winning".

As shown in FIG. 40-8, the special figure variable display time of the normal reach variation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach in this characteristic portion 079SG is executed is set shorter than the super reach variation pattern.

In addition, in the present characteristic unit 079SG, as described later, the types of the variation patterns are determined first, such as the type of non-reach, the type of normal reach, the type of super reach, and the like. Then, the variation pattern to be executed is not determined from the variation patterns belonging to the determined type, but is determined using only the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern without determining these types. However, the present invention is not limited to this, for example, in addition to the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern, a random number for determining the type of variation pattern is provided, and these random numbers for determining the type of variation pattern After determining the type of the variation pattern from the random number value, the variation pattern to be executed may be determined from the variation patterns belonging to the determined type.

FIG. 40-9 is an explanatory diagram of the determination method of the variation pattern in the characteristic part 079SG. In this characteristic part 079SG, the variation pattern determination table to be selected is varied according to the display result of the variable display to be executed and the number of reserved memories.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 40-9, when the variable display result is a non-probable variable jackpot, the jackpot variation pattern determination table A is selected, and the jackpot variation pattern determination table A is used to determine the variation pattern. PB1-1 (variation pattern of normal reach jackpot), PB1-2 (variation pattern of super reach α1 jackpot), PB1-3 (variation pattern of super reach α3 jackpot) and PB1-4 (variation pattern of super reach β1 jackpot) and PB1-5 (fluctuation pattern of super reach β3 big hit). Also, if the variable display result is the probability variable jackpot A or the probability variable jackpot B, select the jackpot variation pattern determination table B, and use the jackpot variation pattern determination table A to set the variation pattern to PB1-1 (normal reach jackpot) variation pattern) and PB1-2 (super reach jackpot variation pattern).

As shown in FIG. 40-9, the big-hit variation pattern determination table A and the big-hit variation pattern determination table have different allocation numbers of determination values for PB1-2 to PB1-5. Specifically, in the big hit variation pattern determination table A, 45 determination values are assigned to PB1-2, 150 determination values are assigned to PB1-3, 300 determination values are assigned to PB1-4, and 500 determination values are assigned to PB1-5. In the big hit variation pattern determination table B, 30 determination values are assigned to PB1-2, 135 determination values are assigned to PB1-3, 315 determination values are assigned to PB1-4, and 515 determination values are assigned to PB1-5. That is, in the present characteristic portion 079SG, when the variable display result is the probability variable jackpot, the super reach β system variation patterns PB1-3 and PB1-4 are at a higher rate than when the variable display result is the non-probability variable jackpot. , it is possible to draw the player's attention to the variation pattern in the variable display.

Also, if the variable display result is a small hit, select the special hit variation pattern determination table, and use the special hit variation pattern determination table to determine the variation pattern to PC1-1 (special hit variation pattern). do.

Also, when the variable display result is "missing" in the normal game state (low base state) and the number of pending memories of the variation special figure is 2 or less, select the variation pattern determination table A for loss, Using the fluctuation pattern determination table A for loss, the fluctuation pattern is PA1-1 (non-reach fluctuation pattern), PA2-1 (normal reach fluctuation pattern), PA2-2 (super reach α2 fluctuation pattern) and PA2 −3 (fluctuation pattern of loss of super reach α3), PA2-4 (variation pattern of loss of super reach β2) and PA2-5 (variation pattern of loss of super reach β3).

In addition, when the variable display result is "loss" in the normal game state (low base state), and the number of pending memories of the variation special figure is 3, the variation pattern determination table B for loss is selected, and the loss Using the fluctuation pattern determination table B, the fluctuation patterns are PA1-2 (shortened fluctuation pattern of non-reach deviation), PA2-1 (variation pattern of normal reach deviation) and PA2-2 (variation pattern of super reach α2 deviation) and PA2 −3 (fluctuation pattern of loss of super reach α3), PA2-4 (variation pattern of loss of super reach β2) and PA2-5 (variation pattern of loss of super reach β3).

In addition, when the variable display result is "loss" in the normal game state (low base state), and the number of pending memories of the variation special figure is 4, select the variation pattern determination table C for loss, and the loss Using the fluctuation pattern determination table C, the fluctuation patterns are PA1-3 (shortened fluctuation pattern of non-reach deviation), PA2-1 (variation pattern of normal reach deviation) and PA2-2 (variation pattern of super reach α2 deviation) and PA2 −3 (fluctuation pattern of loss of super reach α3), PA2-4 (variation pattern of loss of super reach β2) and PA2-5 (variation pattern of loss of super reach β3).

Also, if the variable display result is "loss" in the time saving state (high base state), select the variation pattern determination table D for deviation, and use the variation pattern determination table D for deviation to determine the variation pattern PA1-4 (Shortening fluctuation pattern for non-reach loss), PA2-1 (variation pattern of normal reach loss), PA2-2 (variation pattern of super reach α2 loss), PA2-3 (variation pattern of super reach α3 loss) and PA2 -4 (fluctuation pattern of missing super reach β2) and PA2-5 (fluctuation pattern of missing super reach β3).

In other words, if the variable display result in this characteristic unit 079SG is "missing", the number of pending storage of the variable special figure is 3 or 4, etc., or based on the time saving state, the special figure Since the variable display time is shorter than the normal non-reach variation pattern (PA1-1), the shortening variation patterns (PA1-2, PA1-3, PA1-4) increase the rate of variable display execution. , it is possible to shorten the period until the next variable display result becomes a big hit while preventing the game from being slowed down.

Incidentally, as shown in FIG. 40-8, the ready-to-reach effect of super reach α1 (the ready-to-reach effect executed by the variable display of the variation pattern PB1-2) is variable after the first half of the first ready-to-reach effect described later is executed. This is a ready-to-win effect in which the display result is a big hit, and the ready-to-win effect of super reach α2 (ready-to-win effect executed by variable display of the fluctuation pattern PA2-2) is executed in the first half and the latter half of the first ready-to-win effect described later. This is a ready-to-reach effect in which the variable display result is lost after the change, and the ready-to-reach effect of super reach α3 (ready-to-reach effect executed by variable display in the fluctuation pattern PA2-3 or PB1-3) is the first reach to be described later. This is a ready-to-win effect in which a second ready-to-win effect, which will be described later, is further executed after the first half and the latter half of the effect are executed, and the variable display result is a big hit or a loss.

And, for the variable display of these fluctuation patterns PA2-2, PA2-3, PB1-2, PB1-3, as shown in FIGS. 40-8 and 40-9, the longer the special figure variable display time, the longer the variable display It is set so that the ratio of the result to be a big hit (big hit expectation) is high. That is, for the variable display of these variation patterns PA2-2, PA2-3, PB1-2, and PB1-3, the ratio of the variable display result to the big hit after being executed up to the second ready-to-win effect is the first ready-to-win effect to be executed. It is set higher than the rate at which the variable display result becomes a big hit.

In addition, the reach effect of super reach β1 (reach effect executed by variable display of the fluctuation pattern PB1-4) is a reach effect in which the variable display result is a big hit after the first half of the third reach effect described later is executed. Yes, the reach effect of super reach β2 (the reach effect executed by the variable display of the fluctuation pattern PA2-4) is changed after the first half and the second half of the third reach effect described later are executed. It is a ready-to-reach production, and the ready-to-reach production of super reach β3 (a ready-to-reach production executed with variable display in the fluctuation pattern PA2-5 or PB1-5) is executed in the first half and the second half of the third ready-to-reach production described later. After that, a fourth ready-to-win effect, which will be described later, is further executed, and the result of the variable display is a big win or a losing effect.

And, for the variable display of these fluctuation patterns PA2-4, PA2-5, PB1-4, PB1-5, as shown in FIGS. 40-8 and 40-9, the longer the special figure variable display time, the longer the variable display It is set so that the ratio of the result to be a big hit (big hit expectation) is high. In other words, for the variable display of these variation patterns PA2-4, PA2-5, PB1-4, and PB1-5, the ratio of the variable display result to the big hit after being executed up to the fourth ready-to-win effect is the third ready-to-win effect. It is set higher than the rate at which the variable display result becomes a big hit.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 079SG, the second ready-to-win effect is always executed after the first ready-to-win effect, and the fourth ready-to-win effect is always executed after the third ready-to-win effect, but the present invention is limited to this. The second ready-to-win effect and the fourth ready-to-win effect may be executed alone.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 079SG, each ready-to-win effect can be executed by combining the first ready-to-win effect and the second ready-to-win effect during the variable display, and by combining the third ready-to-reach effect and the fourth ready-to-win effect. Although the possible forms have been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the ready-to-reach production is a combination other than these combinations (for example, the first ready-to-reach production and the fourth ready-to-reach production, the second ready-to-reach production and the third You may provide a case where it is executed in a combination of ready-to-win effects, etc.).

In addition, in this characteristic portion 069SG, as shown in FIG. The ratio of the variable display result to a big hit (jackpot expectation) is set higher than the fluctuation patterns (variation patterns PA2-2, PA2-3, PB1-2, PB1-3), but the present invention is based on this Not limited, part of the super reach β system variation pattern (variation pattern PA2-4, PA2-5, PB1-4, PB1-5) is super reach α system variation pattern (variation pattern PA2- 2, PA2-3, PB1-2, PB1-3) may be lower than any of the big hit expectations.

In the RAM 102 of the characteristic portion 079SG, there is a game control data holding area 079SG 150 as shown in FIG. is provided. The game control data holding area 079SG150 shown in FIG. 40-10 includes a first special figure reservation storage unit 079SG151A, a second special figure reservation storage unit 079SG151B, a normal figure reservation storage unit 079SG151C, and a game control flag setting unit 079SG152. , a game control timer setting unit 079SG153, a game control counter setting unit 079SG154, and a game control buffer setting unit 079SG155.

The first special figure reservation storage unit 079SG151A is a special feature that has not yet started although the game ball passes (enters) the first start prize opening formed by the prize ball device 6A and the start prize (first start prize) has occurred. The pending data of the figure game (the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A) is stored. As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit 079SG151A is associated with the reservation number in the order of winning to the first start winning opening (the order of detection of the game ball), the first start condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball Retained data such as random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, random number MR2 for jackpot type determination, and random number MR3 for variation pattern determination extracted from random number circuit 104 etc. by CPU 103 based on establishment. , until the number of stored data reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). The suspension data stored in the first special figure suspension storage unit 079SG151A in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is suspended, and the variable display result in this special figure game (special figure display (result), it becomes the reservation information that makes it possible to determine whether it will be a big hit or not.

In the second special figure reservation storage unit 079SG151B, although the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B and the start winning (second starting winning) has occurred, it has not started yet. It stores the pending data of the special symbol game (the special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B). As an example, the second special figure reservation storage unit 079SG151B is associated with the reservation number in the order of winning to the second start winning opening (the order of detection of the game ball), the second start condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball Retained data such as random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, random number MR2 for jackpot type determination, and random number MR3 for variation pattern determination extracted from random number circuit 104 etc. by CPU 103 based on establishment. , the number is stored until it reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). The suspension data stored in the second special figure suspension storage unit 079SG151B in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is suspended, and the variable display result (special figure display (result), it becomes the reservation information that makes it possible to determine whether it will be a big hit or not.

In addition, reservation information (first reservation information) based on the establishment of the first start condition due to the game ball passing (entering) the first start winning opening and the game ball passing (entering) the second start winning opening The suspension information (second suspension information) based on the establishment of the second starting prize by chance may be stored in association with the suspension number in the common suspension storage unit. In this case, starting opening data indicating which of the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening the game ball has passed through (entered) should be included in the holding information and stored in association with the holding number. .

The normal pattern pending storage unit 079SG151C stores the pending information of the normal pattern game which is not yet started by the normal pattern display device 20 even though the game ball passing through the passage gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21 . For example, the general pattern reservation storage unit 079SG151C associates the game ball with the reservation number in the order in which it passed through the passage gate 41, and determines the general pattern display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 etc. by the CPU 103 based on the passage of the game ball. Numerical data indicating the random number MR4 for use is stored as reserved data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4").

The game control flag setting unit 079SG152 is provided with a plurality of types of flags whose states can be updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 or the like. For example, the game control flag setting unit 079SG152 stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the ON state or OFF state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

Various timers used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 are provided in the game control timer setting unit 079SG153. For example, the game control timer setting unit 079SG153 stores data indicating timer values in each of a plurality of types of timers.

The game control counter setting unit 079SG154 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting count values used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 . For example, the game control counter setting unit 079SG154 stores data indicating the count value of each of a plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit 079SG154 may be provided with a random counter for counting part or all of the game random numbers so that the CPU 103 can update it by software.

In the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 079SG154, a random number that is not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data representing the random numbers MR2 to MR4 is stored as a random count value, and according to the execution of the software by the CPU 103, Numerical data indicating each random number is updated regularly or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be software for updating the random count value separately from the numerical data updating operation in the random number circuit 104, or may be software extracted from the random number circuit 104. The random count value may be updated by performing predetermined processing such as scrambling processing or arithmetic processing on all or part of the numerical data.

The game control buffer setting unit 079SG155 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 . For example, the game control buffer setting unit 079SG155 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

In the RAM 122 mounted on the production control board 12 shown in FIG. 33, as an area for holding various data used for controlling the production operation, for example, production control data holding as shown in FIG. 40-11 (A) Area 079SG190 is provided. The production control data holding area 079SG190 shown in FIG. 40-11(A) includes a production control flag setting section 079SG191, a production control timer setting section 079SG192, a production control counter setting section 079SG193, and a production control buffer setting section 079SG194. I have it.

The effect control flag setting unit 079SG191 stores a plurality of types of effect operation states, such as the display state of effect images on the screen of the image display device 5, and states that can be updated according to effect control commands transmitted from the main board 11, for example. is flagged. For example, the effect control flag setting unit 079SG191 stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an ON state or an OFF state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

The effect control timer setting unit 079SG192 is provided with a plurality of types of timers used for controlling the progress of various effect operations such as display operations of effect images on the screen of the image display device 5, for example. For example, the effect control timer setting unit 079SG192 stores data indicating a timer value in each of a plurality of types of timers.

The production control counter setting unit 079SG193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used for controlling the progress of various production operations. For example, the effect control counter setting unit 079SG193 stores data indicating the count value of each of a plurality of types of counters.

The effect control buffer setting unit 079SG194 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control buffer setting unit 079SG194 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

In this characterizing portion 079SG, the data constituting the start winning reception command buffer 079SG194A as shown in FIG. In the start winning command buffer 079SG194A, the storage area (buffer number "1-1" to "1-4") corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved memories of the first special figure reserved memory Corresponding area) and a storage area corresponding to the first special figure being variably displayed (area corresponding to buffer number "1-0") are provided. In addition, in the start winning reception command buffer 079SG194A, the storage area (buffer number "2-1" to "2-4 ”) and a storage area corresponding to the second special figure being variably displayed (area corresponding to the buffer number “2-0”). When there is a start prize to the first start prize mouth or the second start prize mouth, the start mouth prize designation command (first start mouth prize designation command or second start mouth prize designation command) and the pending memory number notification command (second start mouth prize designation command) 1 pending memory number notification command or second pending memory number notification command) is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 as one set. The storage area corresponding to the first special figure reservation storage and the storage area corresponding to the second special figure reservation storage in the start winning reception command buffer 079SG194A are associated with these starting entrance winning designation commands and reservation storage number notification commands. , A storage area (entry) for storing separately in the first special figure reservation storage and the second special figure reservation storage is secured.

The storage contents of these storage areas (entries) will be described later when the start condition is satisfied and variable display of the highest reserved storage (buffer number "1-1" or buffer number "2-1") is started. , and the storage contents of the buffer number "1-0" or buffer number "2-0" storing the contents of the reserved storage for which the start condition is satisfied are displayed in the variable display. It is designed to be cleared in the waiting process per special figure that is executed when ending the.

The effect control CPU 120 stores the command at the time of starting winning to the first starting winning opening from the beginning (the entry with the smallest buffer number) in the empty entry corresponding to the first special figure reservation storage of the receiving command buffer 079SG194A at the time of starting winning. Then, at the time of starting winning to the second starting winning opening, the command is stored from the beginning (the entry with the youngest buffer number) in the free entry corresponding to the second special figure reservation storage of the receiving command buffer 079SG194A at the time of starting winning. go. At the time of starting winning, from the starting mouth winning designation command to the reservation storage number notification command is sequentially transmitted. Therefore, if the command is received, the starting entrance winning designation command , the pending storage number notification command.

The commands stored in the start winning command buffer 079SG194A shown in FIG. 40-11(B) are the entries (buffer Entry number "1-0" or "2-0") is deleted, and the entry (buffer number "1-1" or "2-0") corresponding to the pending storage of the starting variable display is deleted. -1”) and the storage contents of the entries after the pending storage of the starting variable display are shifted. For example, in the storage state shown in FIG. 40-11 (B), when the variable display of the decoration pattern of the first special figure reservation storage is completed, each command stored in the buffer number "0" is deleted, and the buffer number Each command stored in "1" is shifted to buffer number "0", and each command stored in the area corresponding to buffer number "2" is shifted to the area corresponding to buffer number "1". The commands shifted and stored in areas corresponding to buffer numbers "3" and "4" are shifted to areas corresponding to buffer numbers "2" and "3". Therefore, the buffer number "0" becomes an area (entry) for storing each command related to the pending storage that is variably displayed at that time.

Next, the starting winning determination processing of the characteristic portion 079SG executed in step S101 of FIG. 36 will be described with reference to FIG. 40-12. In the starting winning determination process, the CPU 103 first turns on the first starting opening switch 22A based on the detection signal from the first starting opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A. It is determined whether or not it is in the state (step 079SGS101). At this time, if the first starting port switch 22A is in the ON state (step 079SGS101; Y), the first special figure pending memory number, which is the number of reserved memories of the special figure game using the first special figure, is a predetermined upper limit. It is determined whether or not it has a value (for example, "4" as the upper limit storage number) (step 079SGS102). CPU103, for example by reading the 1st reservation memory number count value which is the storage value of the 1st reservation memory number counter provided in game control counter setting section 079SG154, it should be able to identify the number of 1st special figure reservation memory. At step 079SGS102, when the number of first special figure pending storage is not the upper limit value (step 079SGS102; N), for example, the storage value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 079SG155 is set to "1" ( step 079 SGS 103).

When the first starting port switch 22A is off at step 079SGS101 (step 079SGS101; N), when the number of first special figure pending storage has reached the upper limit at step 079SGS102 (step 079SGS102; Y), variable Based on the detection signal from the second starting opening switch 22B provided corresponding to the second starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6B, it is determined whether the second starting opening switch 22B is in the ON state ( step 079 SGS 104). At this time, if the second starting port switch 22B is in the ON state (step 079SGS104; Y), the second special figure pending memory number, which is the number of reserved memories of the special figure game using the second special figure, is a predetermined upper limit. It is determined whether or not it has a value (for example, "4" as the upper limit storage number) (step 079SGS105). CPU103, for example by reading the second reservation memory number count value which is the stored value of the second reservation memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 079SG154, it is sufficient if it can specify the number of second special figure reservation memory. At step 079SGS105, when the second special figure pending memory number is not the upper limit value (step 079SGS105; N), for example, the storage value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 079SG155 is set to "2" ( step 079 SGS 106).

After executing either of the processes of step 079SGS103 and step 079SGS106, the number of special figure pending storage corresponding to the starting opening buffer value, which is the stored value of the starting opening buffer, is updated so as to add 1 (step 079SGS107). For example, when the start buffer value is "1", the first reserved storage number count value is incremented by 1, while when the start buffer value is "2", the second reserve storage number count value is incremented by 1. In this way, the first reserved memory number count value is set to 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the first special figure is established. Updated to increase. In addition, the second reserved memory number count value is 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the second special figure is established. Updated to increase. At this time, the total reserved storage number is also updated by adding 1 (step 079SGS108). For example, the total pending memory number count value, which is the stored value of the total pending memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 079SG154, may be updated so as to add 1.

After executing the process of step 079SGS108, the CPU 103 selects the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination and the jackpot type determination from among the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 079SG154. Numerical data representing the random number MR2 for use and the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern are extracted (step 079SGS109). Numerical data indicating each random number extracted in this way is stored by being set as suspension information at the head of the empty entry in the special figure suspension storage unit corresponding to the starting port buffer value (step 079SGS110). For example, when the start buffer value is "1", numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR3 are stored in the first special figure reservation storage unit 079SG151A, while the start buffer value is "2", Numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR3 are stored in the second special figure reservation storage unit 079SG151B.

The numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for judging the result of the special figure display and the random number MR2 for judging the type of the big hit determine whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is to be a "big hit", and whether or not the variable display result is determined. It is used to determine the jackpot type in the case of "jackpot". The random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is used to determine the variation pattern including the variable display time of the special symbols and decorative symbols. The CPU 103 executes the process of step 079SGS109 to extract numerical data representing all of the random numbers used for determining the variable display mode including the result of variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols and the variable display time.

Following the processing of step 079SGS110, the transmission setting of the starting opening winning designation command according to the starting opening buffer value is performed (step 079SGS111). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is "1", the storage address of the first starting opening winning designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer. 12 for transmitting the first starting entry winning designation command. On the other hand, when the starting opening buffer value is "2", the storage address of the second starting opening winning designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer. Make settings for sending the second start winning designation command. The start opening winning designation command set in this manner is sent from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. transmitted.

Following the processing of step 079 SGS111, for example, by storing the storage address of the pending storage number notification command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, pending storage for the effect control board 12 Settings for sending the number notification command are made (step 079 SGS113). The reserved memory number notification command set in this manner is, for example, after the special symbol process process is completed, by executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. transmitted.

After executing the process of step 079SGS113, it is determined whether or not the starting buffer value is "1" (step 079SGS114). At this time, if the start buffer value is "1" (step 079SGS114; Y), the start buffer is cleared and the stored value is initialized to "0" (step 079SGS115). move on. On the other hand, when the start buffer value is "2" (step 079SGS114; N), after clearing the start buffer and initializing the stored value to "0" (step 079SGS116), End the process. Thus, even when both the first starter switch 22A and the second starter switch 22B simultaneously detect valid starting winnings of game balls, processing based on the detection of both valid starting winnings can be reliably completed.

FIG. 40-13 is part of a flow chart showing the effect control process processing in this feature part 079SG. In the effect control process processing, the effect control CPU 120 executes the prefetching notice setting process (step S161), and then updates the pending display in the first pending memory display area 079SHSG005D and the second pending memory display area 079SG005U, and these first Suspended display operation processing (step 079SG162) for operating (rotated display) the suspended displays displayed in the suspended storage display area 079SHSG005D and the second suspended storage display area 079SG005U, and the operation display of the telop in the telop display area 079SG005T. After executing the telop operation processing (step 079SGS163) and the fourth design display processing (step 079SG164) for executing the variable display of the fourth design 079SG005J, one of steps S170 to S177 according to the value of the effect control process flag process.

FIG. 40-14 is a flow chart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the first variation start command reception flag is ON (step 079SGS271). If the first fluctuation start command reception flag is in the ON state (step 079SGS271; Y), to the buffer number "1-0" to "1-4" of the first special figure reservation storage in the start winning reception command buffer 079SG194A Various command data and various flags stored in correspondence are shifted upward by one buffer number (step 079SGS272). The contents of the buffer number "1-0" are erased because they cannot be shifted because there is no place to shift them.

Specifically, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-1" of the first special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "1-0" Then, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-2" of the first special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "1-1", Various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-3" of the 1 special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-2", the first special figure Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer numbers "1-4" of the reserved storage are shifted so as to be associated with the buffer numbers "1-3" and stored.

Also, if the first fluctuation start command reception flag is off at step 079SGS271 (step 079SGS271; N), it is determined whether or not the second fluctuation start command reception flag is on (step 079SGS273). If the second fluctuation start command reception flag is off (step 079SGS273; N), the variable display start setting process is terminated, and if the second fluctuation start command reception flag is on (step 079SGS273; Y), Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer numbers "2-0" to "2-4" of the second special figure reservation storage in the start winning command buffer 079SG194A, one buffer number each Shift up (step 079 SGS274). The content of the buffer number "2-0" is erased because it cannot be shifted because there is no place to shift.

Specifically, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-1" of the second special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-0" Then, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-2" of the second special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-1", Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-3" of the 2 special figure pending storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-2", and the second special figure Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-4" of the reserved storage are shifted so as to be associated with the buffer number "2-3" and stored.

After executing step 079SGS272 or step 079SGS274, the effect control CPU 120 reads the variation pattern designation command from the variation pattern designation command storage area (step 079SGS275).

Next, the display result (stop design) of the decorative design is determined according to the data stored in the display result designating command storage area (that is, the received display result designating command) (step 079SGS276). In this case, the effect control CPU 120 determines the stop pattern of the decorative pattern according to the display result specified by the display result specifying command, and stores the data indicating the stop pattern of the determined decorative pattern in the decorative pattern display result storage area. do.

In addition, in the present characteristic part 079SG, when the received variable display result designation command is the second variable display result designation command corresponding to the probability variable jackpot A, the effect control CPU 120, for example, determines that the three symbols are "7" as the stop symbols. ”Determines a combination of matching decorative patterns (jackpot pattern). In addition, when the received variable display result designation command is the third variable display result designation command or the fourth variable display result designation command corresponding to the probability variable big hit B or the probability variable big hit C, the stop symbol other than "7" It is determined from a plurality of combinations of odd-numbered symbols (for example, combinations of decorative symbols such as "111", "333", "555", "999"). In addition, when the received variable display result designation command is the fifth variable display result designation command corresponding to the non-probability variable jackpot, the effect control CPU 120, for example, selects a decorative pattern in which three patterns are even-numbered patterns as the stop pattern. Determine the combination (jackpot pattern). Further, when the received variable display result designation command is the sixth variable display result designation command corresponding to a small hit, the stop symbol is determined from "334", "778", etc., which are chances. Further, when the received variable display result designation command is the first variable display result designation command corresponding to the loss, the decorative symbols in which the three symbols are not aligned as the stop symbols are combinations other than the above-described chance symbols. (losing pattern) is determined.

In determining these stop symbols, the effect control CPU 120 extracts, for example, random numbers for determining the stop symbols, and uses a stop symbol determination table in which data indicating combinations of decorative symbols and numerical values are associated with each other. Then, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol may be determined. That is, the stop symbol may be determined by selecting data indicating a combination of decoration symbols corresponding to a numerical value matching the extracted random number.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variation pattern of the variable display is the variation pattern of super reach (step 079SGS277). If the variation pattern of the variable display is a non-reach or normal reach variation pattern (step 079SGS277; N), proceed to step 079SGS283, and if the variation pattern of the variable display is a super reach variation pattern (step 079SGS277; Y). executes a chance-up effect determination process (step 079SGS278), and determines whether or not to execute a chance-up effect in the second half of the first ready-to-win effect or the second half of the third ready-to-win effect.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 40-15, when the variable display result is a failure, the chance-up effect is decided to be executed at a rate of 20%, and the chance-up effect is not executed at a rate of 80%. decide. When the result of the variable display is a big hit, execution of the chance-up performance is determined at a rate of 80%, and non-execution of the chance-up performance is determined at a rate of 20%. That is, in the variable display of the reach of the characteristic portion 079SG, when the chance-up effect is executed, the expectation of big hit is set higher than when the chance-up effect is not executed.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 40-27 and 40-32, in this characteristic portion 079SG, only one production pattern is provided as the production mode of the chance-up production, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, a plurality of performance patterns may be provided as a performance mode of the chance-up performance, and the degree of expectation for a big win may differ depending on which performance pattern the chance-up performance is executed.

Furthermore, in this characteristic part 079SG, as shown in FIGS. A plurality of performance start timings for performance may be provided, and the degree of expectation for a big win may differ depending on which performance start timing the chance-up performance is started.

Further, after determining execution/non-execution of the chance-up effect in step 079SGS278, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the variation pattern of the variable display is the variation pattern of super reach α3 (PA2-3 or PB1-3). (Step 079SGS279). If the variation pattern of the variable display is the variation pattern of super reach α3 (PA2-3 or PB1-3) (step 079 SGS279; Y), the notification effect (big hit notification effect or loss A still image display effect for determining the effect pattern of the still image display effect for displaying the still image displayed at the end of the second ready-to-win effect on the image display device 5 during the period until the notification effect is started. A determination process (step 079SGS280) is executed, and the process proceeds to step 079SGS283.

In the still image display effect determination process, as shown in FIG. 40-16(A), the effect control CPU 120 sets the effect pattern of the still image display effect at a rate of 100% when the variable display result is a failure. If the pattern SG-1 is determined and the variable display result is a big hit, the effect pattern of the still image display effect is determined to be the pattern SG-1 at a rate of 80% and the pattern SG-2 at a rate of 20%. do.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 40-16(B), the pattern SG-1 of the still image display effect is to freeze the image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5 at the end of the second ready-to-win effect. In the pattern SG-2 of the still image display effect, the image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5 is displayed as a still image at the end of the second reach effect. , is an effect pattern for changing the color of the still image.

In particular, the pattern SG-2 is an effect pattern that is executed only when the variable display result is a big hit. It is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not (whether or not the color of the still image changes).

In addition, if it is not the variation pattern of super reach α3 in step 079SGS281 (step 079SGS281; N), it is further determined whether the variation pattern of the variable display is super reach β3 (PA2-5 or PB1-5) ( step S079SGS282). If the variation pattern of the variable display is a variation pattern other than super reach β3 (step 079SGS282; N), proceed to step 079SGS283. ), an operation promotion effect determination process (step 079SGS282) for determining the effect pattern of the operation promotion effect prompting the player to operate the push button 31B during execution of the fourth ready-to-win effect, and the process proceeds to step 079SGS283. .

In the operation promotion effect determination process, as shown in FIG. 40-17(A), the effect control CPU 120 sets the effect pattern of the operation promotion effect to the pattern SS at a rate of 80% when the variable display result is a failure. -1 is determined, and pattern SS-2 is determined at a rate of 20%. Further, when the result of the variable display is a big hit, the pattern SS-1 is determined as the performance pattern of the operation promotion performance at a rate of 20%, and the pattern SS-2 is determined at a rate of 80%.

As shown in FIG. 40-17(B), the pattern SS-1 of the operation prompting effect is a pattern of displaying an image of the push button 31B in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5. The effect pattern SS-2 is a effect pattern in which the image of the push button 31B is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5 in a size larger than that of the pattern SS-1.

In other words, as the operation promotion effect in the present characteristic portion 079SG, when the image of the push button 31B of a large size is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5 (the operation promotion effect is executed in pattern SS-2). ), the ratio is higher than when the image of the normal size push button 31B is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5 (when the operation prompting effect is executed in pattern SS-1). Since there is a high probability that the variable display result is a big win (a big win notification performance is executed), the player is made to pay attention to the size of the image of the push button 31B displayed on the image display device 5 when the operation promotion performance is executed. It is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

At step 079 SGS283, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute each effect such as the chance-up effect, still image display effect, operation promotion effect, etc., and the effect control pattern (process table) corresponding to the effect pattern and variation pattern designation command. select. Then, the process timer in process data 1 of the selected process table is started (step 079SGS284).

The process table contains display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, and data for controlling sounds output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Sound control execution data, operation unit control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and stick controller 31A, etc. are arranged in chronological order in association with each process data n (numbers 1 to N). there is

Next, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect device (image display as a component for effect) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1). The device 5, various lamps as performance parts, speakers 8L and 8R as performance parts, and operation units (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.) are controlled (step 079SGS285). For example, a command is output to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image corresponding to the variation pattern on the image display device 5 . In addition, it outputs a control signal (lamp control execution data) to the lamp control board 14 in order to control lighting/extinguishing of various lamps. Also, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the audio control board 13 in order to output audio from the speakers 8L and 8R.

In addition, in this characteristic part 079SG, the effect control CPU 120 controls so that the decorative pattern is displayed variably according to the variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern designation command one-to-one. A variation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of variation patterns corresponding to the designated command.

Then, a variable display time timer is set to a value corresponding to the variable display time specified by the variation pattern designation command (step 079SGS286). Also, a predetermined time is set in the variable display control timer (step 079SGS287). The predetermined time is, for example, 30 ms, and the effect control CPU 120 writes image data indicating the display state of the left, middle, and right decorative patterns to the VRAM every time the predetermined time elapses. A signal corresponding to the image data obtained is output to the image display device 5, and the image display device 5 displays an image corresponding to the signal, thereby realizing variable display (fluctuation) of the decoration pattern. Next, the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the effect process during variable display (step S172) (step 079SGS288).

In the variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 subtracts (-1) the value of the process timer each time the variable display effect processing is executed, and the process timer after the subtraction times out. determine whether or not Then, when the process timer after subtraction has not timed out, the effect device is controlled according to the contents of the process data corresponding to the process timer, and when the process timer after subtraction has timed out, the process data is processed. As soon as the switching is performed, the next process timer is started, and the performance device is controlled according to the contents of the next process data.

40-18 to 40-35, description will be given of the variable display effects of super reach α1 to α3 and super reach β1 to β3 in the characteristic portion 079SG.

First, regarding the variable display of super reach α1 to α3 shown in FIGS. In the first display area 079SG005F of the device 5, the effect animation such as the variable display of the decoration pattern is started at the normal progress speed V1. At this time, in the second display area 079SG005Sa, the rotation of the hold display and the movement of the telop from left to right (moving image progress speed in the second display area 079SG005Sa) are executed at the normal progress speed of V3. At the same time, from the speakers 8L and 8R, BGM and effect sounds corresponding to the variable display are started at the normal reproduction speed of V4.

In addition, in the third display area 079SG005Sb, the upper pattern 079SG005Ja and the lower pattern 079SG005jb in the fourth pattern 079SG005J start to alternately light up (blink) at a constant cycle, and the game effect lamp 9 starts to blink at a constant cycle. be. Hereinafter, the flashing or lighting of the game effect lamp 9 in the characteristic portion 079SG means that the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d are all synchronized and flashed or lit. The invention is not limited to this, and the blinking and lighting of the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d do not necessarily have to be synchronized.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 40-18, 40-19, 40-26(A) to 40-26(C), when the timing for developing the ready-to-win effect is reached due to the progress of the variable display, the first half of the first ready-to-win effect is reached. The execution period starts, and the battle effect between the ally character A and the enemy character A is started. When the second half of the execution period of the first half of the first ready-to-win effect is reached as the battle effect progresses, display of a moving image in which the friend character A attacks the enemy character A is started in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5. be. When the moving image starts to be displayed, the progress speed of the moving image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F including the moving image switches from V1 to V2, which is slower than V1. Therefore, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, the image of the friend character A attacking the enemy character A is displayed in slow motion.

It should be noted that during the period in which the friendly character A attacking the enemy character A is displayed in slow motion (during the period in which the progress speed of the battle effect animation in the first display area 079SG005F is V2). , the rotation of the hold display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction are executed while maintaining the progress speed V3, and from the speakers 8L and 8R, BGM, production sounds, etc. is output while maintaining the reproduction speed V4. Further, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the period.

When the variable display is the variable display of super reach α1, when the execution period of the first half of the first reach effect ends, as shown in FIGS. Then, in the first display area 079SG005F, as a big win notification effect, after displaying a moving image in which the ally character A succeeds in attacking and the enemy character A falls down, the decorative symbols are stopped in combination with the big win, and the game state is controlled to a big win game state. to be notified. In particular, when the big hit notification effect is started, the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T are hidden, and the first display area 079SG005F and the second display area are hidden. With 079SG005Sa, an image of a big hit notification effect is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 40-26(H), when the variable display is finished, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a big hit, and the display on the image display device 5 is the normal background image before the ready-to-win effect. Switch to display. Furthermore, the display of the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T is resumed. After the end of the variable display, during the design determination period, the stop display with the combination of the decorative design and the small design showing the jackpot, and the lighting display of the fourth design (the lighting display of both the upper design 079SG005Ja and the lower design 079SG005Jb) ) is performed.

It should be noted that during the jackpot notification effect, the display of the moving image of the part where the attack of the ally character A succeeds is executed at the normal progress speed V1 (corresponding to FIG. 40-26 (E)), and then the enemy character The display of the moving image of the falling portion is executed at the advancing speed V2 which is lower than V1 (corresponding to FIG. 40-26(F)). Then, the moving image of the part in which it is announced that the decorative symbols are stopped in the combination of the big wins and is controlled to the big win game state is executed again at the normal progress speed V1 (FIG. 40-26 (G)). applicable).

It should be noted that during the big hit notification effect, the rotation of the hold display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction are executed while maintaining the progress speed V3 without change, and from the speakers 8L and 8R is output while maintaining the reproduction speed V4 without changing the BGM, the effect sound, and the like. Further, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the period.

On the other hand, when the variable display is super reach α2 or super reach α3 variable display, when the first half reach effect execution period ends, as shown in FIGS. 40-19 and 40-26 (D) , the attack of the ally character A is not successful, and the second half of the first ready-to-win effect is executed.

As shown in FIGS. 40-19 and FIGS. 40-27(A) to 40-27(B), when the transition is made to the second half execution period of the first reach effect, the battle effect between the friendly character A and the enemy character A continues. proceed.

At this time, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, the effect animation of the battle effect is executed at the normal progress speed V1. In addition, the rotation of the pending display and the movement of the telop from left to right in the second display area 079SG005Sa are executed while maintaining the progress speed V3, and BGM, production sounds, etc. are output from the speakers 8L and 8R. is output while maintaining the reproduction speed V4. Further, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the period.

It should be noted that during the execution period of the second half of the first ready-to-win effect, when the effect animation of the battle effect is executed at the progress speed V1, the chance-up effect may be executed as shown in FIG. 40-27(B). . The chance-up effect is executed at the progressing speed V1 in the same manner as the effect animation of the battle effect.

When the second half of the execution period of the second half of the first ready-to-reach effect progresses due to the progress of the battle effect, the display of the moving image of the friend character A attacking the enemy character A starts in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5. be. When the display of the moving image is started, the progress speed of the moving image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F including the moving image switches from V1 to V2 which is slower than V1. Therefore, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, the image of the friend character A attacking the enemy character A is displayed in slow motion.

It should be noted that during the period in which the friendly character A attacking the enemy character A is displayed in slow motion (during the period in which the progress speed of the battle effect animation in the first display area 079SG005F is V2). , the rotation of the hold display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction are executed while maintaining the progress speed V3, and from the speakers 8L and 8R, BGM, production sounds, etc. is output while maintaining the reproduction speed V4. Further, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the period.

When the variable display is the variable display of super reach α2, when the execution period of the second half of the first reach effect ends, as shown in FIGS. Secondly, in the first display area 079SG005F, after the friendly character A's attack fails and is defeated by the enemy character A, the variable display result is stopped by the combination of the decorative symbols that are not matched. is reported.

It should be noted that during the failure notification effect, the display of the moving image is executed at V1, which is the normal progress speed, between the part where the friendly character A's attack fails and the part where the variable display result is notified of the failure. be.

In addition, during the deviation notification effect, the rotation of the hold display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction are executed while maintaining the progress speed V3 without change, and from the speakers 8L and 8R is output while maintaining the reproduction speed V4 without changing the BGM, the effect sound, and the like. Further, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the period. Then, as shown in FIG. 40-27(H), when the variable display is finished, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a failure, and the display on the image display device 5 is the normal background image before the ready-to-win effect. Switch to display. After the end of the variable display, during the design determination period, the combination of the decorative design and the small design is displayed as a stop display, and the fourth design is extinguished (the upper design 079SG005Ja and the lower design 079SG005Jb are both extinguished). ) is performed.

On the other hand, when the variable display is the super reach α3 variable display, as shown in FIGS. The attack of the character A succeeds and defeats the enemy character A. Then, it shifts to the execution period of the first half of the second ready-to-win effect.

As shown in FIGS. 40-20, 40-21, and 40-28(A) to 40-28(B), when the transition is made to the first half execution period of the second reach effect, the friend character A and the enemy character B The battle production of progresses.

At this time, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, the effect animation of the battle effect is executed at the normal progress speed V1. In addition, the rotation of the pending display and the movement of the telop from left to right in the second display area 079SG005Sa are executed while maintaining the progress speed V3, and BGM, production sounds, etc. are output from the speakers 8L and 8R. is output while maintaining the reproduction speed V4. Further, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the period.

As the battle effect progresses, when the second half of the second ready-to-reach effect first half execution period is reached, as shown in FIGS. In the first display area 079SG005F of the display device 5, display of concentration lines is started, and in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, display of a moving image in which the friend character A attacks the enemy character B is started. When the display of the moving image is started, the progress speed of the moving image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F including the moving image switches from V1 to V2 which is slower than V1. Therefore, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, the ally character A attacking the enemy character B is displayed in slow motion.

It should be noted that during the period in which the ally character A attacking the enemy character B is displayed in slow motion as described above (during the period in which the progress speed of the battle effect animation in the first display area 079SG005F is V2). , the rotation of the hold display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction are executed while maintaining the progress speed V3, and from the speakers 8L and 8R, BGM, production sounds, etc. is output while maintaining the reproduction speed V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J is executed without changing the alternate blinking cycle of the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb, while the blinking cycle of the game effect lamp 9 is shortened (the blinking cycle is faster). Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 40-28(D), the number of concentrated lines as the above-described effect rendering is gradually increased.

That is, in the second half of the ready-to-win production second half execution period, the progress speed of the battle production moving image is lowered to V2, and the number of concentration lines displayed in the first display area 079SG005F increases, and the game effect lamp 9 flashes violently. Therefore, the increase in the number of concentration lines and the flashing of the game effect lamp 9 can effectively draw the player's attention to the effect result of the battle effect (whether the big win notification effect or the loss notification effect is executed). It is possible.

Then, after the execution period of the second reach effect latter half part execution period ends, as shown in FIGS. The image that was being played (in this characteristic portion 079SG, the image immediately before the attack of the friend character A hits the enemy character B) is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F.

During the execution period of the still image display effect, the progress speed of the moving image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F is switched from V1 to 0, but the rotation of the hold display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the telop from left to right The movement in the direction is executed while maintaining the progress speed V3 without change, and the BGM, effect sound, etc. are output from the speakers 8L and 8R while maintaining the reproduction speed V4 without change. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J is executed without changing the alternate blinking cycle of the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb, while the blinking cycle of the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 is the progress of the animation of the battle production. Return to the period before the speed drops to V2.

Incidentally, when the pattern SG-2 is determined as the effect pattern of the still image display effect, as shown in FIGS. The colors of the last displayed image are reversed. After the end of the still image display effect in which the color is reversed, as a big win notification effect, the attack of the ally character A hits the enemy character B, and after the enemy character B falls down, the game state is controlled to the big win game state. be notified. In particular, when the combination of decorative patterns indicating a big win is stopped as the big win notification effect, the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U and the telop display area 079SG005T are hidden and the first display is made. An image of a big hit notification effect is displayed in the area 079SG005F and the second display area 079SG005Sa. Then, as shown in FIG. 40-29(F), when the variable display is finished, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a big hit, and the display on the image display device 5 is the normal background image before the ready-to-win effect. Switch to display. Furthermore, the display of the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T is resumed. After the end of the variable display, during the design determination period, the stop display with the combination of the decorative design and the small design showing the jackpot, and the lighting display of the fourth design (the lighting display of both the upper design 079SG005Ja and the lower design 079SG005Jb) ) is performed.

As a jackpot notification effect when the static image display effect is executed in pattern SG-2, as shown in FIG. However, the moving image in which the enemy character B falls is displayed at the advancing speed V2. Then, a moving image in which the decoration patterns stop with a winning combination after the enemy character B falls is displayed at the advancing speed V1. In particular, when the combination of decorative patterns indicating a big win is stopped as the big win notification effect, the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U and the telop display area 079SG005T are hidden and the first display is made. An image of a big hit notification effect is displayed in the area 079SG005F and the second display area 079SG005Sa.

It should be noted that during the big hit notification effect, the rotation of the hold display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction are executed while maintaining the progress speed V3 without change, and from the speakers 8L, 8R is output while maintaining the reproduction speed V4 without changing the BGM, the effect sound, and the like. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle.

On the other hand, when the pattern SG-1 is determined as the still image display effect, the color of the image displayed at the end of the battle effect is not reversed as the still image display effect. ) ~ as shown in Figure 40-30 (D), the case where the big hit notification effect is executed as described above, and as shown in Figure 40-30 (F) ~ Figure 40-30 (H), loss notification In some cases, production is executed.

The big hit notification effect when the still image display effect is executed in pattern SG-1 is the same as the big hit notification effect when the still image display effect is executed in pattern SG-2, as shown in FIG. 40-20. In addition, the moving image in which the attack of the ally character A hits the enemy character B is displayed at the advancing speed V1, but the moving image in which the enemy character B falls down is displayed at the advancing speed V2. After the enemy character B has fallen down, it is displayed at the advancing speed V1. It should be noted that during the big hit notification effect, the rotation of the hold display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction are executed while maintaining the progress speed V3 without change, and from the speakers 8L, 8R is output while maintaining the reproduction speed V4 without changing the BGM, the effect sound, and the like. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle. Then, as shown in FIG. 40-30(E), when the variable display is finished, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a big hit, and the display on the image display device 5 is the normal background image before the ready-to-win effect. Switch to display. Furthermore, the display of the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T is resumed. After the end of the variable display, during the design determination period, the stop display with the combination of the decorative design and the small design showing the jackpot, and the lighting display of the fourth design (the lighting display of both the upper design 079SG005Ja and the lower design 079SG005Jb) ) is performed.

In addition, as a failure notification effect when the static image display effect is executed in pattern SG-1, the attack of friendly character A does not hit enemy character B, and conversely, the attack of enemy character B hits friendly character A. After the ally character A hits and falls down, the decorative symbols stop due to a combination of missing symbols, and it is notified that the big win game state is not controlled.

As the failure notification effect, as shown in FIG. 40-21, a moving image is displayed at the progressing speed V1 until the friend character A's attack does not hit and the enemy character B is knocked down. It should be noted that during the deviation notification effect, the rotation of the suspension display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction are executed while maintaining the progress speed V3 without change, and from the speakers 8L and 8R is output while maintaining the reproduction speed V4 without changing the BGM, the effect sound, and the like. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the period. Then, as shown in FIG. 40-30(I), when the variable display is finished, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a failure, and the display on the image display device 5 is the normal background image before the ready-to-win effect. Switch to display. After the end of the variable display, the combination of the decoration pattern and the small pattern is stopped during the design confirmation period, and the fourth pattern is turned off. ) is performed.

40-22, 40-23, and 40-31(A) to 40-31(H), when the variable display is started, the image In the first display area 079SG005F of the display device 5, the effect moving image such as the variable display of the decoration pattern is started at the normal progressing speed V1. At this time, in the second display area 079SG005Sa, the rotation of the pending display and the movement of the telop from left to right (moving image progress speed in the second display area 079SG005Sa) are executed at the normal progress speed of V3. At the same time, from the speakers 8L and 8R, BGM and effect sounds corresponding to the variable display are started at the normal reproduction speed of V4.

Further, in the third display area 079SG005Sb, the upper pattern 079SG005Ja and the lower pattern 079SG005jb in the fourth pattern 079SG005J start to alternately light up (blink) at a constant cycle, and the game effect lamp 9 starts to blink at a constant cycle. be.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 40-22, 40-23, and 40-31(A) to 40-31(C), when the timing for developing the ready-to-win effect is reached due to the progress of the variable display, the first half of the third ready-to-win effect is reached. The execution period starts, and the battle effect between the ally character B and the enemy character A is started. When the second half of the execution period of the first half of the third ready-to-win effect progresses as the battle effect progresses, display of a moving image in which the friend character B attacks the enemy character A starts in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5. be. When the display of the moving image is started, the progress speed of the moving image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F including the moving image is switched from V1 to V2 which is slower than V1. Therefore, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, the appearance of the friendly character B attacking the enemy character A is displayed in slow motion.

It should be noted that during the period in which the friendly character B attacking the enemy character A is displayed in slow motion (during the period in which the progress speed of the battle effect animation in the first display area 079SG005F is V2). , the rotation of the hold display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction are executed while maintaining the progress speed V3, and from the speakers 8L and 8R, BGM, production sounds, etc. is output while maintaining the reproduction speed V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the period.

When the variable display is super reach β1 variable display, when the execution period of the first half of the third reach effect ends, as shown in FIGS. Then, in the first display area 079SG005F, as a big win notification effect, after a moving image of a successful attack by the ally character B and the enemy character A falling down is displayed, it is reported that the game will be controlled to the big win game state. In particular, when the big hit notification effect is started, the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T are hidden, and the first display area 079SG005F and the second display area are hidden. With 079SG005Sa, an image of a big hit notification effect is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 40-31 (H), when the variable display is finished, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a big win, and the display on the image display device 5 is the normal background image before the ready-to-win effect. Switch to display. Furthermore, the display of the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T is resumed. After the end of the variable display, during the design determination period, the stop display with the combination of the decorative design and the small design showing the jackpot, and the lighting display of the fourth design (the lighting display of both the upper design 079SG005Ja and the lower design 079SG005Jb) ) is performed.

It should be noted that during the big hit notification effect, the display of the moving image of the part where the attack of the friend character B succeeds is executed at the normal progress speed V1 (corresponding to FIG. 40-30 (E)), and the enemy character after that The moving image of the falling portion is displayed at the advancing speed V2, which is lower than V1 (corresponding to FIG. 40-30(F)). Then, the moving image of the portion in which it is announced that the decorative symbols are stopped in the combination of the big wins and is controlled to the big win game state is executed again at the normal progress speed V1 (FIG. 40-30 (G)). applicable).

It should be noted that during the big hit notification effect, the rotation of the hold display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction are executed while maintaining the progress speed V3 without change, and from the speakers 8L, 8R is output while maintaining the reproduction speed V4 without changing the BGM, the effect sound, and the like. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle.

On the other hand, when the variable display is super reach β2 or super reach β3 variable display, when the third reach effect first half execution period ends, as shown in FIGS. 40-23 and 40-31 (D) , the attack of the ally character B is not successful, and the second half of the third ready-to-win effect is executed.

As shown in FIGS. 40-23 and FIGS. 40-32(A) to 40-32(B), when the second half of the third reach effect is executed, the battle effect between friendly character B and enemy character A continues. proceed.

At this time, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, the effect animation of the battle effect is executed at the normal progress speed V1. In addition, the rotation of the pending display and the movement of the telop from left to right in the second display area 079SG005Sa are executed while maintaining the progress speed V3, and the BGM, production sound, etc. are output from the speakers 8L and 8R. is output while maintaining the reproduction speed V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the period.

In addition, during the execution period of the second half of the third ready-to-win effect, when the effect animation of the battle effect is executed at the progress speed V1, as shown in FIG. . The chance-up effect is executed at the progressing speed V1 in the same manner as the effect animation of the battle effect.

In particular, in the image display device 5, while the small patterns are displayed with priority over the chance-up production effect animation, the chance-up production production animation is displayed in the decorative pattern (the image shown in FIG. 40-32 (B) It is displayed with priority over "7" displayed on the left and right upper portions of the display device 5). Therefore, in this characteristic part 079SG, during the execution period of the chance-up effect, the player can recognize that the variable display is being performed by visually recognizing the small symbols, and the effect animation of the chance-up effect is displayed. By giving priority to display over the pattern, it is possible to reliably secure an area for displaying the effect moving image of the chang-up effect on the image display device 5.例文帳に追加

In addition, in this characteristic portion 079SG, the animation of the chance-up production is displayed with priority over the decoration pattern, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the decoration pattern is displayed rather than the production animation of the chance-up production. may also be displayed with priority. By doing so, the player can easily recognize which combination of decorative symbols the ready-to-win effect in execution has developed from, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

When the second half of the execution period of the second half of the first ready-to-reach effect progresses as the battle effect progresses, display of a moving image of the friend character B attacking the enemy character A starts in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5. be. When the moving image starts to be displayed, the progress speed of the moving image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F including the moving image switches from V1 to V2, which is slower than V1. Therefore, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, the appearance of the friendly character B attacking the enemy character A is displayed in slow motion.

It should be noted that during the period in which the friendly character B attacking the enemy character A is displayed in slow motion (during the period in which the progress speed of the battle effect animation in the first display area 079SG005F is V2). , the rotation of the hold display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction are executed while maintaining the progress speed V3, and from the speakers 8L and 8R, BGM, production sounds, etc. is output while maintaining the reproduction speed V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the period.

When the variable display is the super reach β2 variable display, when the execution period of the second half of the third reach effect ends, as shown in FIGS. Then, in the first display area 079SG005F, after the ally character B's attack fails and the enemy character A defeats him, it is notified that the variable display result is a miss as a miss notification effect.

It should be noted that during the failure notification effect, the display of the moving image is executed at V1, which is the normal progress speed, between the part where the friendly character B's attack fails and the part where the variable display result is notified of the failure. be.

Further, during the deviation notification effect, the rotation of the hold display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the telop from left to right are executed while maintaining the progress speed V3 without change, and from the speakers 8L and 8R is output while maintaining the reproduction speed V4 without changing the BGM, the effect sound, and the like. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle. Then, as shown in FIG. 40-32(H), when the variable display is finished, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a failure, and the display on the image display device 5 is the normal background image before the ready-to-win effect. Switch to display. After the end of the variable display, the combination of the decoration pattern and the small pattern is stopped during the design confirmation period, and the fourth pattern is turned off. ) is performed.

On the other hand, when the variable display is the super reach β3 variable display, as shown in FIGS. The attack of the character B succeeds and defeats the enemy character A. Then, it shifts to the first half execution period of the fourth ready-to-win effect.

As shown in FIGS. 40-24, 40-25, and 40-33(A) to 40-33(B), when the transition is made to the first half execution period of the fourth reach effect, the friend character AB and the enemy character B Battle production progresses.

At this time, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, the effect animation of the battle effect is executed at the normal progress speed V1. In addition, the rotation of the pending display and the movement of the telop from left to right in the second display area 079SG005Sa are executed while maintaining the progress speed V3, and the BGM, production sound, etc. are output from the speakers 8L and 8R. is output while maintaining the reproduction speed V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle.

When the second half of the fourth ready-to-win effect first half execution period is approached due to the progress of the battle effect, the image display device 5 is displayed as shown in FIGS. Display of a moving image of friendly character B attacking enemy character B is started in the first display area 079SG005F. When the moving image starts to be displayed, the progress speed of the moving image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F including the moving image switches from V1 to V2, which is slower than V1. Therefore, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, the image of the friendly character B attacking the enemy character B is displayed in slow motion.

It should be noted that during the period in which the friendly character B attacking the enemy character B is displayed in slow motion as described above (during the period in which the progress speed of the animation of the battle effect in the first display area 079SG005F is V2). , the rotation of the hold display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction are executed while maintaining the progress speed V3, and from the speakers 8L and 8R, BGM, production sounds, etc. is output while maintaining the reproduction speed V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J is executed without changing the alternate blinking cycle of the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb, while the blinking cycle of the game effect lamp 9 is shortened (the blinking cycle is faster).

That is, in the second half execution period of the fourth ready-to-win effect, the progress speed of the animation of the battle effect decreases to V2, and the flashing of the game effect lamp 9 becomes more intense. It is possible to effectively draw the player's attention to the effect result (whether the big hit notification effect or the loss notification effect is executed).

Then, when the second half of the fourth ready-to-win effect progresses, the operation promoting effect is executed. When the pattern SS-1 is determined as the effect pattern of the operation promotion effect, the push button 31B is displayed in the center of the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5 along with the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba imitating the shape of the push button 31B. display of the meter 079SG005M and the effect image 079SG005E suggesting the operation acceptance period of , and the update display of the meter 079SG005M and the enlarged update display of the effect image 079SG005E toward the peripheral portion of the image display device 5 are started. In addition, as described above, since the images of these operation promoting effects are displayed in the first display area 079SG005F as images based on the image data 2 (see FIG. 40-3), the constant It is displayed as a movie of the progress speed.

As shown in FIG. 40-33(D), during the execution period of the operation prompting effect, the player can be notified of the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B by updating the display of the meter 079SG005M, while the effect image 079SG005E is enlarged. Update display progresses. Since the effect image 079SG005E has a predetermined transmittance (for example, 10% to 50%), the player can visually recognize the battle effect through the effect image 079SG005E. The visibility of the battle production is lower than that. Since the execution period of the operation-promoting output is included in the second half of the fourth ready-to-win effect, the battle effect continues at the progress speed V2 even during the execution of the operation-promoting effect.

Incidentally, as shown in FIGS. 40-33 (D) and 40-33 (E), during the execution period of the operation promoting effect, the battle effect continues at the progress speed V2, but the end timing of the operation promoting effect (push At the point of time when the operation reception end timing of the button 31B), the scene does not proceed until it is known whether or not the attack of the ally character B will hit the enemy character B, that is, the big hit notification effect or the losing notification effect is not started. It has become.

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 40-34(A) to 40-34(E), when pattern SS-2 is determined as the effect pattern of the operation promotion effect, the first display of image display device 5 is displayed. In the center of the area 079SG005F, display of an operation prompting image 079SG005Bb larger in size than the operation prompting image 079SG005Ba as an operation prompting image imitating the shape of the push button 31B and a meter 079SG005M indicating the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B start. and the update display of the meter 079SG005M is started. In addition, as described above, since the images of these operation promoting effects are displayed in the first display area 079SG005F as images based on the image data 2 (see FIG. 40-3), the constant It is displayed as a movie of the progress speed.

As shown in FIG. 40-34(D), during the execution period of the operation prompting effect, the player can be notified of the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B by updating display of the meter 079SG005M, while the operation prompting image 079SG005Bb Most of the images in the battle production are hidden. As described above, the operation prompting image 079SG005Bb is an image having a size larger than that of the operation prompting image 079SG005Ba and having a transmittance of 0%. Therefore, when the operation promotion effect is executed in pattern SS-2, the visibility of the battle effect is lower than in the case where the operation promotion effect is executed in pattern SS-1. Since the execution period of the operation-promoting output is included in the second half of the fourth ready-to-win effect, the battle effect continues at the progress speed V2 even during the execution of the operation-promoting effect.

Incidentally, as shown in FIGS. 40-34 (D) and 40-34 (E), during the execution period of the operation promotion effect, the battle effect continues at the progress speed V2, but the end timing of the operation promotion effect (push At the point of time when the operation reception end timing of the button 31B), the scene does not proceed until it is known whether or not the attack of the ally character B will hit the enemy character B, that is, the big hit notification effect or the losing notification effect is not started. It has become.

Then, when the player operates the push button 31B during the execution period of the operation promotion effect, or when the operation promotion effect ends without the player operating the push button 31B (the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B is When finished), the big hit notification effect or loss notification effect is executed from the timing when the player operates the push button 31B or the timing when the operation promotion effect ends.

As the big hit notification effect after the operation promotion effect, as shown in FIGS. 40-24 and FIGS. Although the moving image is displayed at the advancing speed V1, the moving image in which the enemy character B falls is displayed at the advancing speed V2. Then, the moving image after the enemy character B falls is displayed at the advancing speed V1. It should be noted that during the big hit notification effect, the rotation of the hold display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction are executed while maintaining the progress speed V3 without change, and from the speakers 8L, 8R is output while maintaining the reproduction speed V4 without changing the BGM, the effect sound, and the like. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the period. Then, as shown in FIG. 40-35(D), when the variable display is completed, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a big win, and the display on the image display device 5 is the normal background image before the ready-to-win effect. Switch to display. Furthermore, the display of the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T is resumed. After the end of the variable display, during the design determination period, the stop display with the combination of the decorative design and the small design showing the jackpot, and the lighting display of the fourth design (the lighting display of both the upper design 079SG005Ja and the lower design 079SG005Jb) ) is performed.

In addition, as the failure notification effect after the operation promoting effect, as shown in FIGS. On the contrary, after the attack of the enemy character B hits the ally character B and the ally character B falls down, it is informed that the big winning game state is not controlled. In particular, when the failure notification effect is executed, the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T are hidden, and the first display area 079SG005F and the second display area are hidden. With 079SG005Sa, an image of a big hit notification effect is displayed.

Incidentally, as the failure notification effect, as shown in FIG. 40-25, a moving image is displayed at the progressing speed V1 until the combination of the decoration symbols is stopped without the attack of the ally character B being hit. It should be noted that during the deviation notification effect, the rotation of the suspension display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction are executed while maintaining the progress speed V3 without change, and from the speakers 8L and 8R is output while maintaining the reproduction speed V4 without changing the BGM, the effect sound, and the like. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle. Then, as shown in FIG. 40-35(H), when the variable display is finished, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a failure, and the display on the image display device 5 is the normal background image before the ready-to-win effect. Switch to display. After the end of the variable display, the combination of the decoration pattern and the small pattern is stopped during the design confirmation period, and the fourth pattern is turned off. ) is performed.

40-26 (H), 40-27 (H), 40-29 (F), 40-30 (E), 40-30 (I), 40-31 (H), As shown in FIGS. 40-32(H), 40-35(D), and 40-35(H), in this characteristic portion 079SG, at the end timing of the variable display, a telop (message) is displayed on the image display device 5. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display of the telop display area 079SG005T itself is displayed on the image display device 5 at the end timing of the variable display. is performed, the display of the telop (message) itself in the telop display area 079SG005T may not be performed.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 079SG, in the variable display of super reach α3 and super reach β3, the game effect lamp 9 However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the flashing cycle of the game effect lamp 9 may be shortened during the slow motion period other than immediately before the notification effect. Also, the flashing cycle of the game effect lamp 9 may be shortened in a part of the period (non-slow motion period) during which the display of the effect animation of the ready-to-win effect is executed at the progress speed V1.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the present characteristic portion 079SG, as shown in FIGS. During the execution period of the first half part, the animation of each ready-to-win effect is displayed on the image display device 5 at the progress speed V1, and the second half of each of the first ready-to-win effect, the second ready-to-win effect, the third ready-to-win effect, and the fourth ready-to-win effect. During the partial execution period, the animation of each ready-to-win effect is displayed on the image display device 5 at the progress speed V2. Therefore, while the animation of each ready-to-win effect is displayed on the image display device 5 at the progressing speed V2, the degree of empathy of the player for the teammate character displayed during the ready-to-win effect is enhanced, and a big win is announced. Since it is possible to heighten the sense of expectation for the execution of the performance, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game. On the other hand, during the execution period of the first half of the first reach effect, the second reach effect, the third reach effect, and the fourth reach effect, and during the execution period of the latter half of each, the BGM, effect sound, etc. from the speakers 8L and 8R are played. Since the output is unchanged at V4, which is the normal reproduction speed, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

In addition, since the sound output hand in this characteristic part 079SG includes the voice synthesizing IC 079SG132, the amplifier circuit 079SG134, and the speakers 8L and 8R, reproducibility in variable display including the execution of the ready-to-win effect and the execution of the jackpot game, etc. It is possible to output high-quality background music (music) and sound effects such as sound effects at an appropriate volume from the speakers 8L and 8R, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 40-20, 40-21, 40-24, and 40-25, during the execution period of the second reach production second half and during the execution period of the fourth reach production latter half, the game effect Since the lamp 9 blinks at a cycle shorter than usual, the effect can be improved by blinking the game effect lamp 9 at a short cycle during the period when the progress speed of the effect moving image is V2.

In addition, in this characterizing part 079SG, a form in which the flashing period of the game effect lamp 9 is shortened during the execution period of the second half of the reach effect or during the period of the second half of the fourth reach effect is illustrated, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, the flashing cycle of the game effect lamp 9 may be gradually shortened according to the progress of the second ready-to-win effect and the fourth ready-to-win effect. By doing so, the player can recognize from the blinking period of the game effect lamp 9 that the notification effect will be executed soon, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in this characterizing portion 079SG, an example is given in which the blinking period of the game effect lamp 9 is shortened during the execution period of the second half of the reach effect or during the period of the second half of the fourth reach effect, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, the blinking cycle of the game effect lamp 9 may be executed at any timing of the first ready-to-win effect to the fourth ready-to-win effect.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 40-19 to 40-25, during the execution period of each of the first ready-to-reach effect, the second ready-to-reach effect, the third ready-to-reach effect, and the fourth ready-to-reach effect, the effect animation of the ready-to-reach effect progresses. While the speed changes between V1 and V2, both the rotation speed of the pending display and the movement speed of the telop are constant at V3, and the reproduction speed of the effect sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R is constant at V4. Therefore, it is possible to further prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 079SG, an example is given in which both the rotation speed of the suspension display displayed in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement display speed of the telop are set to V3, but the present invention is not limited to this. , the rotation speed of the pending display and the moving display speed of the telop may be different speeds as long as they are constant regardless of the progress of each ready-to-win effect.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 40-2(A), the area of the first display area 079SG005F is larger than the total area of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb. During execution, the player can more easily recognize the ready-to-win effect displayed in the first display area 079SG005F than the hold display and telop displayed in the second display area 079SG005Sa, thereby improving the game interest.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 40-18 to 40-25, in the period other than during the reach effect, the rotating display of the suspended display is rotated at the rotation speed V3 in the first suspended memory display area 079SG005D and the second suspended memory display area 079SG005U. In the telop display area 079SG005T, the moving display of the telop is performed at the moving speed V3. It is possible to prevent these pending displays and telops from becoming difficult to recognize.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 40-2(C), the characters included in the telop (message) in the telop display area 079SG005T reach the right end of the telop display area 079SG005T, and at the same time when the display ends, the characters appear in the telop display area 079SG005T. Since it is displayed again at the left end of 079SG005T and moved again from left to right, the entire telop (message) is always displayed in the telop display area 079SG005T. Therefore, the player can always recognize the entire moving display of the telop in the telop display area 079SG005T.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 079SG, the form in which the entire telop is always displayed moving in the telop display area 079SG005T is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the telop is moved in the telop display area 079SG005T. A portion of the displayed telop may be invisible to the player at some point.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 40-20, 40-21, and 40-28, in the second half of the reach effect execution period, the display of the effect moving image of the reach effect is executed at the progress speed V2 and the image By executing the effect performance of displaying the concentration line on the display device 5, the effect performance can be enhanced during the execution period of the latter half of the second ready-to-win performance, so that the amusement of the game can be improved. In particular, in this characteristic portion 079SG, as shown in FIGS. 40-28(C) and 40-28(D), the number of concentration lines displayed increases as the battle effect progresses. The increase in the number makes it easier for the player to recognize that the second ready-to-win performance ends and the big hit notification performance or the loss notification performance is executed.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 079SG, an example of a form in which the effect production in the present invention is displayed as a concentrated line is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. The output of a specific sound effect from 8R, the vibration of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B, the image displayed on the image display device 5 or the vibration of the image display device 5 itself, etc. are executed as effect effects, and the second reach effect ( As the battle production progresses, the degree of effect of the effect production is gradually increased (for example, the range of movement of the movable body 32 is widened, the volume of the specific sound effect from the speakers 8L and 8R is increased, the stick Alternatively, the vibration of the controller 31A or the push button 31B may be increased, or the vibration of the image displayed on the image display device 5 or the image display device 5 itself may be increased.

Also, as shown in FIGS. 40-26 (G), 40-29 (E), 40-30 (D), 40-31 (G), and 40-35 (C), as a jackpot notification effect When the decorative symbols are stopped by a combination of a big hit, the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U and the telop display area 079SG005T in the second display area 079SG005Sa are hidden to display the first display area 079SG005F. Since the image of the big win notification effect is displayed in the second display area 079SG005Sa, the visibility of the big win notification effect in the second display area 079SG005Sa is further enhanced, and the player is made to recognize that it is controlled to the big win game state. It can be done easily.

In addition, in this characteristic part 079SG, when the big hit notification effect is executed, the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U and the telop display area 079SG005T displayed in the second display area 079SG005Sa are hidden. Although the image of the jackpot notification effect is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F and the second display area 079SG005Sa, the present invention is not limited to this, and the second display area 079SG005Sa In the state where the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U and the telop display area 079SG005T are displayed, the image of the big hit notification effect is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F and the second display area 079SG005Sa (the second In the second display area 079SG005Sa, the image of the big hit notification effect may be displayed overlapping the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U and the telop display area 079SG005T.

At this time, the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T are displayed transparently or reduced, or the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D and the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U are displayed. The visibility of the big hit notification image may be improved by hiding only one of the reserved displays displayed in the reserved display area.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 40-28 and 40-29, in the second reach effect latter half execution period, the still image display effect can be executed in the first display area 079SG005F, while FIGS. As shown in 40-21, during the still image display effect execution period, the second display area 079SG005Sa rotates the suspended display in the first suspended storage display area 079SG005D and the second suspended storage display area 079SG005U, and Since the movement display of the telop in the telop display area 079SG005T shown in (C) continues without stopping, it is possible that the suspension display is being displayed or the telop movement is being displayed during the execution period of the still image display effect. can be easily recognized by the player, and it is possible to prevent the player from becoming difficult to recognize the display of the pending display and the display of the telop due to the stop of the rotating display of the pending display and the moving display of the telop. .

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 40-16 and 40-29(A) to 40-29(B), when the still image display effect is executed in pattern SG-2, the color of the still image is inverted. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the still image display effect is being executed by reversing the color of the still image.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 079SG, as a form of changing the color of the still image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F as the still image display effect, the form of reversing the color of the still image is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. It is not limited to this, but the forms of changing the color of the still image include changing the color of the still image to black and white, changing only part of the color of the still image, and adding new colors to the still image. It may be added.

Further, as shown in FIG. 40-29(B), when the color of the still image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F is reversed by executing the still image display effect in pattern SG-2, Since the color of the pending display and telop displayed in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the color of the fourth pattern displayed in the third display area 079SG005Sb are not reversed, the player can easily see the colors displayed in the second display area 079SG005Sa. By comparing the pending display, telop, fourth pattern, etc. with the still image, it is possible to easily recognize that the color of the still image has changed.

Also, in each variable display of super reach in this characteristic part 079SG, a pattern of shifting to a second reach effect and a fourth reach effect after execution of a first reach effect and a third reach effect, and a pattern of shifting to a first reach effect and a third reach effect Since there is a pattern in which the variable display is terminated by shifting to the second ready-to-win effect and the fourth ready-to-win effect after the performance is executed, the display of the ready-to-win effect animation progresses during the first ready-to-reach effect and the third ready-to-reach effect. Whether or not to shift to the second ready-to-win effect or the fourth ready-to-win effect after being executed at the speed V2, and display of the effect animation of the ready-to-reach effect during the second ready-to-reach effect or the third ready-to-win effect are executed at the progress speed V2. Since the player can be made to pay attention to whether or not it is reported that the game state is controlled to the jackpot game state after the game is played, the amusement of the game can be improved.

Also, as shown in FIGS. 40-19, 40-20, 40-21, 40-23, 40-24, and 40-25, during the first reach production and during the third reach production, the During the execution period of the second half of the first reach production and the second half of the execution period of the second half of the third reach production, the production in which the friendly character is defeated by the enemy character and the second half execution period of the first reach production or the latter half of the third reach production are carried out at the same time. Since it is executed at the speed V1, the progress speed when shifting from the execution period of the first half of the first ready-to-win performance to the second half of the first half of the ready-to-win performance or from the first half of the execution period of the third ready-to-win performance to the second half of the third ready-to-win performance. is different from the progress speed of the performance in which the friend character is defeated by the enemy character in the second half execution period of the first reach performance and the second half execution period of the third reach performance. You can prevent it from getting lost. 40-18, 40-20, 40-22, 40-24, 40-25 and 40-26 (E) to 40-26 (G), 40-29 (C) ~ Figure 40-29 (E), Figure 40-30 (B) ~ Figure 40-30 (D), Figure 40-31 (E) ~ Figure 40-31 (G), Figure 40-35 (A) ~ Figure As shown in 40-35(C), in the big hit notification effect of this characteristic part 079SG, while the animation when the enemy character falls down due to the attack of the friend character being hit is displayed at the progress speed V2, 40-19, 40-21, 40-23, 40-25 and 40-27 (E) to 40-27 (G), 40-30 (F) to 40-30 (H) ), FIGS. 40-32(E) to 40-32(G), and FIGS. 40-35(D) to 40-35(F), in the failure notification effect, a moving image when the ally character falls down is executed at the progress speed V1, when the loss notification performance is executed, the display of the performance moving image of the loss notification performance is not executed at the progress speed V2, so that the player is dissatisfied. can be prevented from becoming excessively high, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 079SG, when the result of the variable display of super reach is executed and the loss notification effect is executed, the display of the effect animation of the loss notification effect is executed at the progress speed V1. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in part of the variable display of super reach, the display of the effect animation of the loss notification effect may be executed at a progress speed V2 slower than V1. By doing so, it is possible to produce variations in the production of the failure notification production, and to improve the game interest.

In addition, in this characteristic part 079SG, the third speed in the present invention is set as the progressing speed V1 of the effect moving image during the big hit notification effect, and the progress speed V2 of the effect moving image during the big hit notification effect is set as the fourth speed in the present invention. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the third speed in the present invention may be a speed different from the traveling speed V1. Furthermore, the fourth speed in the present invention may be a speed different from the traveling speed V2 as long as it is slower than the third speed.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 40-24 and 40-25, during the execution period of the second half of the fourth ready-to-win effect, the operation promoting effect is executed when the animation of the ready-to-win effect is being displayed at the progress speed V2. Therefore, the effect of the fourth ready-to-win effect can be enhanced by the operation promoting effect.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 079SG, while the operation promoting effect is being executed, the display of the effect moving image of the fourth ready-to-reach effect is displayed at the progress speed V2, but the present invention is not limited to this. During execution of the operation promoting effect, the display of the effect moving image of the fourth ready-to-win effect may be performed at the progress speed V1. Further, a suggestive performance suggesting that the operation promoting performance is executed can be executed before the operation prompting performance is executed, and during the execution period of the suggestive performance, the display of the performance animation of the fourth ready-to-reach performance is displayed at the progress speed V2. may be executed.

In addition to the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba or the operation promotion image 079SG005Bb, a meter 079SG005M for notifying the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F as the operation promotion effect of the characteristic portion 079SG. While the operation prompting image 079SG005Ba or the operation prompting image 079SG005Bb and the meter 079SG005M are being displayed, the display of the effect animation of the fourth ready-to-win effect is continuously executed at the progress speed V2, but does not proceed until the notification effect. . Furthermore, when the player operates the push button 31B during the operation reception period of the push button 31B, and when the operation promotion effect ends without the player operating the push button 31B during the operation reception period of the push button 31B. , the same jackpot notification effect or loss notification effect is executed. Therefore, since the notification effect is not executed at a timing before the end of the operation accepting period of the push button 31B (until the end of the operation promotion effect), the push button is not operated by the player. It is possible to prevent the player from recognizing whether or not the jackpot game state is controlled during the operation reception period of the push button 31B.

In addition, in the present characteristic portion 079SG, a configuration in which the push button 31B is used as the detection means in the present invention is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the detection means is a stick controller 31A or the like other than the push button 31B. In addition to the operating means, sensors capable of detecting the actions of the player, such as motion sensors and touch sensors, may be used.

40-18, 40-20, 40-22, 40-24 and 40-26 (E) to 40-26 (G), 40-29 (C) to 40-29 (E), Figures 40-30 (B) to Figures 40-30 (D), Figures 40-31 (E) to Figures 40-31 (G), Figures 40-35 (A) to Figures 40-35 (C) ), in the big hit notification effect in this characteristic portion 079SG, the moving image of the part where the attack of the ally character hits the enemy character is displayed at the progress speed V1, while the moving image of the part where the enemy character falls down progresses. Displayed at speed V2. 40-19, 40-21, 40-23, 40-25 and 40-27 (E) to 40-27 (G), 40-30 (E) to 40- 30 (G), Figures 40-32 (E) to Figure 40-32 (G), Figures 40-35 (D) to Figure 40-35 (F), as shown in Figure 40-35 (D) to Figure 40-35 (F), the off notification effect A moving image is displayed at the progress speed V1 and is never displayed at the progress speed V2. In other words, when the big win notification effect is executed, a part of the effect animation of the big win notification effect is displayed at the progress speed V2, thereby impressing the player that it is controlled to the big win game state. can.

In addition, in this characteristic part 079SG, as a special effect that can be executed only when the variable display result is a big hit in the present invention, the still image display effect can be executed in pattern SG-2 (still image display effect in which colors are reversed). As a still image display effect, the player can be made to pay attention to whether or not the color of the still image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F is reversed, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

In this characteristic portion 079SG, the still image display effect of pattern SG-2 is exemplified as a special effect in the present invention, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the special effect in the present invention is , an effect other than the static image display effect of the pattern SG-2 (for example, an effect in which a specific character is displayed, an effect in which the color of the effect is gold or rainbow, etc.) may be executed.

In addition, the operation promotion effect of the characteristic portion 079SG includes a pattern SS-1 in which an operation promotion image 079SG005Ba imitating a push button 31B is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F, and a push button 31B in the first display area 079SG005F. It can be executed in any of the pattern SS-2 in which the operation prompting image 079SG005Bb larger than the operation prompting image 079SG005Ba is displayed as the operation prompting image. When the operation promotion effect is executed in pattern SS-1, the battle effect of the fourth reach effect can be visually recognized through the effect image 079SG005E displayed in the first display area 079SG005F, while in pattern SS-2 When the operation promotion effect is executed, most of the battle effect of the fourth reach effect is hidden by the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba. The visibility of the battle production of 4 reach production is low. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 40-17, the ratio of the variable display results to be a big hit when the operation prompting effect is executed in pattern SS-2 is Since the variable display result is lower than the ratio of the big hit, the player can be made to pay attention to which pattern SS-1 or SS-2 the operation promoting performance is executed, and the interest in the game can be improved. Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 40-24, 40-25, and 40-33(C) to 40-33(E), when an operation prompting image 079SG005Ba is displayed as an operation prompting effect, the operation prompting image During the display of 079SG005Ba, the display of the effect animation of the battle effect is executed at the progress speed V2, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 079SG, when the operation prompting effect is executed in pattern SS-2, the operation prompting image 079SG005Bb is displayed on the image display device 5, and the operation prompting image 079SG005Bb shows the progress speed V2 (slow motion ) has been exemplified in which the visibility of the fourth reach effect animation (battle effect) being displayed is reduced, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the operation promotion effect is pattern SS -2, in addition to the display of the operation prompting image 079SG005Bb, by displaying a dedicated background image over the entire display area of the image display device 5, the effect animation of the fourth reach effect (battle production) may be completely invisible. In addition, during the period in which the effect video (battle effect) of the fourth reach effect is completely invisible due to the background image dedicated to pattern SS-2 of the operation promotion effect, the effect video of the fourth reach effect The display may be performed at the progress speed V1 (non-slow motion).

Further, in this characterizing portion 079SG, as the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win, the second ready-to-win effect can be executed after the first ready-to-win effect, and the fourth ready-to-win effect can be executed after the third ready-to-win effect. Furthermore, as the variable display of super reach, the variable display of super reach α1 for announcing a big win after the first half of the first reach performance execution period and the variable display of super reach β1 for notifying a big win after the first half of the third reach performance execution period. Display, variable display of super reach α2 that executes the first half of the first reach performance execution period after the first half of the first reach performance execution period and notifies of a failure, and second half of the third reach performance after the first half of the third reach performance execution period. Variable display of super ready-to-reach β2 for executing partial execution period and informing loss, variable display of super ready-to-win α3 to shift to second ready-to-win performance after first ready-to-reach performance exchange partial execution period, third ready-to-reach performance exchange partial execution period After that, it is possible to execute variable display of super reach α3 that shifts to the fourth reach production, and as shown in FIGS. When shifting to the execution period, when shifting from the first half of the ready-to-win production second half execution period to the first half of the second ready-to-win production execution period, when shifting from the third half of the ready-to-win production first half execution period to the second half of the third ready-to-win production execution period. , When shifting from the third ready-to-win performance second half execution period to the fourth ready-to-win performance first half execution period, the performance animation of each ready-to-win performance is executed at the progress speed V2, and from the first ready-to-win performance first half execution period to the first When shifting to the second half execution period of the ready-to-win performance, when shifting from the first half of the first ready-to-win performance to the first half of the second half of the ready-to-win performance, when shifting from the first half of the third ready-to-win performance to the second half of the third ready-to-win performance. , BGM and sound effects are output from the speakers 8L and 8R at the reproduction speed V4 without changing from the other periods when shifting from the execution period of the second half of the third reach performance to the first half of the execution period of the fourth reach performance. Therefore, when shifting from the execution period of the first half of the first reach performance to the second half of the execution period of the first ready-reach performance, when shifting from the second half of the execution period of the first reach performance to the first half of the execution period of the second ready-reach performance, the third reach. To give a player a sense of incongruity when shifting from the performance first half execution period to the third ready-to-win performance second half execution period, and when shifting from the third ready-to-win performance second half execution period to the fourth ready-to-win performance first half execution period. You can prevent it from slipping. Furthermore, the display of the effect animation of each ready-to-win effect is executed at the progress speed V2, so that the branch of the ready-to-win effect drawn by the player can be easily recognized.

In addition, in the variable display of super reach of this characteristic part 079SG, a form in which two reach effects can be executed was exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and in the variable display of super reach, three or more A ready-to-win effect may be executable, or only one ready-to-win effect may be executable.

Although the characteristic part 079SG of the present invention has been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these characteristic parts, and even if there are changes and additions within the scope of the present invention, the present invention can be applied. included.

For example, in the characteristic part 079SG, the first reach effect, the second reach effect, the third reach effect, and the fourth reach effect are provided as the reach effect of the super reach. Although the display of is executed at the progress speed V2 (slow motion), the present invention is not limited to this, and a pattern ( A pattern in which the effect moving image is always displayed at the progress speed V1) and a pattern in which a part of the effect motion image is displayed at the progress speed V2 may be provided. Further, the content of the effect may be different between the ready-to-win effect in which a part of the effect moving image is displayed at the progress speed V2 and the ready-to-reach effect in which the effect moving image is not displayed at the progress speed V2. By doing so, it is possible to create variations in the ready-to-win performance of the super ready-to-win, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.

Further, in the characteristic portion 079SG, the effect sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R is always played at a constant playback speed (playback speed V4) regardless of whether or not the display of the effect moving image is executed at the progress speed V2. Although the form to be output is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, for example, as a modification 079SG-1, the first reach effect, the second reach effect, the third reach effect, the fourth reach In the first half of each ready-to-reach effect second half execution period of the performance, the playback speed is V4 from the speakers 8L and 8R in the same manner as the first-reach effect, second ready-to-reach effect, third reach effect, and fourth ready-to-reach effect first half execution period. While outputting the effect sound at, in the second half (slow motion period) of each reach effect second half execution period of the first reach effect, the second reach effect, the third reach effect, and the fourth reach effect What is V4? The effect sound may be output at a different reproduction speed (for example, V5, which is slower than the reproduction speed V4). In this manner, the performance effect of the performance sound for the ready-to-win performance can be improved by varying the reproduction speed of the performance sound while the display of the performance animation of the ready-to-win performance is being executed at the progress speed V2. You can improve your interest.

Further, in the characteristic portion 079SG, as shown in FIGS. 40-33 and 40-34, the first display area 079SG005F is visually recognized during the execution period of the ready-to-win effect by displaying an effect image 079SG005E, displaying an operation promotion image 079SG005Bb, or the like. While it is possible to reduce the visibility, the visibility of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, As a modification 079SG-2, it may be possible to reduce the visibility of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb.

Furthermore, in the case where it is possible to reduce the visibility of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb in this way, as shown in FIGS. , the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F may be reduced as part of the notification effect.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 40-36(A) to 40-36(D), when the second ready-to-win effect is being executed, when the second ready-to-win effect ends along with the still image display effect, A circular effect image 079SG005Ea is displayed in the center of the first display area as a part of the big hit notification effect or the losing notification effect, and the effect image 079SG005Ea is enlarged and displayed toward the second display area 079SG005Sa or the third display area 079SG005Sb. To go. Then, when the effect image 079SG005Ea spreads over the entire first display area 079SG005F (when the entire first display area 079SG005F is hidden by the effect image 079SG005Ea), as shown in FIGS. In this way, it is necessary to notify that it is controlled to the big hit game state as the big hit notification effect, or that it is not controlled to the big win game state as the loss notification effect.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 40-37(A) to 40-37(D), when the fourth ready-to-win effect is executed, the player operates the push button 31B, or the player pushes When the operation promoting effect is finished without operating the button 31B, as a part of the big hit notification effect or loss notification effect, a circular effect image 079SG005Ea is displayed in the center of the first display area, and the effect image 079SG005Ea is displayed secondly. Enlarged display is performed toward the area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb. Then, when the effect image 079SG005Ea spreads over the entire first display area 079SG005F (when the entire first display area 079SG005F is hidden by the effect image 079SG005Ea), as shown in FIGS. As described above, it is necessary to notify that it is controlled to the big hit game state as the big hit notification effect, or that it is not controlled to the big win game state as the loss notification effect.

The effect image 079SG005Ea shown in FIGS. 40-36 and 40-37 is an image based on the image data 2 shown in FIG. Thus, it is possible to reduce the visibility of only the first display area 079SG005F and not to reduce the visibility of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb.

As described above, in this modification 079SG-2, while the visibility of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb can be changed, as shown in FIGS. After the end of the ready-to-win effect or after the end of the fourth ready-to-win effect, the effect image 079SG005Ea reduces the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F as part of the notification effect, but the visibility of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb is reduced. does not change, the change in the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F makes it easier for the player to recognize the timing at which the notification effect is to be performed, and the visibility of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb increases. By not changing, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming difficult to recognize the pending display, the telop display, the variable display of the fourth symbol, and the like.

The effect image 079SG005Ea that reduces the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F is an image drawn as the image of the second image data shown in FIG. Since the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F is changed by drawing so as to enlarge the display toward the display area 079SG005Sb, the visibility of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb is not changed, and the first display area 079SG005Sb is displayed. Only the visibility of the display area 079SG005F can be appropriately reduced, and the drawing of the enlarged display of the effect image 079SG005Ea as the second image data can be performed from the center of the first display area 079SG005F to the second display area 079SG005Sa or the third display area. Since the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F is lowered by being executed toward the area 079SG005Sb, the visibility of the areas corresponding to the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb can be made difficult to change.

In addition, in the present modification 079SG-2, the mode of executing the operation promotion effect during the fourth ready-to-win effect is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the operation promotion effect is one of the notification effects. Can be run as part.

In addition, when the operation promotion effect is executed as part of the notification effect, as shown in FIGS. In addition, the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F is reduced by enlarging and displaying the effect image 079SG005Ea. Then, when the effect image 079SG005Ea spreads over the entire first display area 079SG005F, as shown in FIG. 40-38(D), an operation prompting image 079SG005Ba and a meter 079SG005M are displayed in the center of the first display area 079SG005F as an operation prompting presentation. do.

By displaying the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba and the meter 079SG005M as images based on the first image data shown in FIG.

After that, the player operates the push button 31B, or based on the end of the operation promotion performance without the player operating the push button 31B, the game is controlled to the big win game state, or the big win game state. is notified that it is not controlled by

As described above, in this modification 079SG-3, the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F is reduced by the enlarged display of the effect image 079SG005Ea, but the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba and the meter 079SG005M displayed as the image of the first image data are reduced. Since the visibility of is not lowered, the operation promoting effect can be emphasized with respect to the fourth ready-to-win effect, so that the player can be effectively encouraged to operate the push button 31B.

Further, in the characteristic portion 079SG, when the static image display effect is executed in the pattern SS-2 during the execution period of the second ready-to-win effect, the variable display result always becomes a big hit. It is not limited to this, and as a modification 079SG-4, when the still image display effect is executed in pattern SS-2 during the execution period of the second reach effect, the jackpot type of the jackpot is always The variable probability big win (furthermore, the variable probability big win A that is most advantageous to the player) may be achieved. Furthermore, as an effect pattern when the still image display effect is executed in the pattern SS-2 during the execution period of the second ready-to-win effect, control is performed again to the jackpot game state after the failure notification effect is executed. It may be possible to execute a resurrection effect that notifies of. In addition, in the case where the resurrection effect is executed after the still image display effect is executed in pattern SS-2 in this way, the case where the jackpot type is a probability variation jackpot and a non-probability variation jackpot (non-probability variation jackpot) A case where it is controlled to the big hit game state and a case where it is controlled to the big hit game state of probability variable big hit) may be provided. By doing so, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the big win notification performance is executed after the still image display performance is executed in the pattern SS-2, so that the game interest can be improved. .

In addition, in the characterizing section 079SG, as an example of a mode in which a message indicating the gaming state is displayed as a telop displayed in the telop display area 079SG005T, the present invention is not limited to this, and the telop display area 079SG005T As the displayed telop, it is possible to display a message suggesting whether or not the variable display being executed or the variable display that has not yet started will be controlled to the jackpot game state, the title of the ready-to-win effect being executed, etc. good.

In addition, in the characterizing section 079SG, the form in which a telop can be displayed in the telop display area 079SG005T according to the state of the effect being executed has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the telop display area 079SG005T. The telops displayed in , are those that can specify the game state, the expectation that the variable display result will be a big hit in the variable display during execution (jackpot expectation), the explanation of the production during execution (especially the reach production), the reach production It may be an announcement effect or the like that can be executed from the timing before.

40-33 and 40-34, in the characteristic portion 079SG, during the period in which the animation of the ready-to-win effect is displayed at the progress speed V2, the operation promotion effect (the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba or the operation promotion display of the image 079SG005Bb) is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. good too.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 079SG, as shown in FIGS. 40-33 and 40-34, the image display device 5 displays an operation prompting image 079SG005Ba or an operation prompting image 079SG005Bb as an operation prompting effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the operation promotion effect is not limited to simply displaying the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba or the operation promotion image 079SG005Bb. As an effect before displaying, the images of the plurality of push buttons 31B are moved toward the center of the image display device 5, and finally the images of the push buttons 31B are overlapped and displayed to form an operation prompting image. An effect in which 079SG005Ba and an operation prompting image 079SG005Bb are displayed may be executed.

In addition, when the effect in which the images of the plurality of push buttons 31B move toward the central portion of the image display device 5 is executed as an indication effect of the operation promotion effect, for example, the images of the plurality of push buttons 31B The movement display speed may decrease as the image approaches the center of the image display device 5 . By doing so, the player can accurately recognize that the operation prompting effect will be executed, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

Further, in the characterizing portion 079SG, as shown in FIGS. Although the flashing cycle of the game effect lamps (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d) may be shortened, the present invention is not limited to this. When the animation of the ready-to-win effect is displayed at the progress speed V2, the number of colors (light emitting colors) of the game effect lamps 9 differs from that when the animation of the ready-to-win effect is displayed at the progress speed V1. may For example, when the animation of the ready-to-win effect is displayed at the progress speed V1, the game effect lamp 9 can emit light in a plurality of colors, while the animation of the ready-to-win effect is displayed at the progress speed V2. In this case, the game effect lamp 9 may emit light in a single color (for example, only white). By doing so, when the moving image display of the ready-to-win effect is executed at the progress speed V2, it is possible to prevent the deterioration of the game interest due to the emission color of the game effect lamp 9.例文帳に追加

Further, in the characterizing portion 079SG, as shown in FIGS. Although the flashing cycle of the game effect lamps (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d) may be shortened, the present invention is not limited to this. When the animation of the ready-to-win effect is displayed at the progress speed V2, the flashing cycle of the game effect lamp 9 may be lengthened. By doing so, it is possible to give a sense of unity between the display of the moving image of the ready-to-win effect and the flashing of the game effect lamp 9, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

Further, in the characteristic portion 079SG, as shown in FIGS. Later, an example is given in which the decorative patterns are displayed while swinging in a combination indicating a big win, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the decorative patterns are displayed while swinging in a combination indicating a big win. The timing may be during the ready-to-win effect.

In addition, the present invention is a gaming machine in which a player can select at least a part of effect sounds such as BGM output from the speakers 8L and 8R during a game by operating an operation means that the player can operate. may be applied to By doing so, when the player has set the output of the effect sound that suits his/her preference, the speaker 8L is displayed when the moving image of each reach effect is displayed at the progress speed V1. , 8R is reproduced at the reproduction speed V4 without change, the effect sound is faster than the reproduction speed V4 even though the player himself/herself selects the effect sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Also, it is possible to prevent the decrease in the interest in the game due to the low speed reproduction.

Further, in the characteristic portion 079SG, as the end suggestion effect in the present invention, it is possible to execute the effect in which the friend character is defeated by the enemy character during the execution period of the second half of the first reach effect and the second half of the third reach effect. is executed, the variable display result is always lost, but the present invention is not limited to this, and in the second half of the first reach effect execution period and the second half of the third reach effect, After the effect of defeating the ally character by the enemy character is executed, the display on the image display device 5 is temporarily switched to the display of the normal background image before the ready-to-win effect, and then the variable display result shows the big win. (For example, a case of executing a resurrection effect) may be provided.

When executing the resurrection effect in this manner, the game effect lamp 9 is lit and blinked prior to the display of the moving image of the resurrection effect on the image display device 5, so that the resurrection effect is given to the player. may be made to recognize that is executed. Furthermore, as a production mode of the resurrection production, for example, a production in which the ally character attacks the enemy character again and defeats the enemy character may be used. In particular, when the resurrection effect is executed, a part of the moving image of the resurrection effect (for example, the moving image of the scene in which the enemy character falls down) is displayed at the progress speed V2 so as to enhance the effect of the resurrection effect. good too.

In addition, although a plurality of characteristic portions and modifications are disclosed in the present specification, the game machine of the present invention is implemented by combining two or more characteristic portions and modifications from these plurality of characteristic portions and modifications. You may

For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the characteristic part 079SG may be a pachinko gaming machine capable of changing the jackpot probability by changing the set values as shown in FIGS. In such a case, for example, in the variable display of super reach α1 and super reach β1, a pattern is provided in which the variable display results are not displayed, and the pachinko game machine 1 is set to a high setting value (eg, 6) that is advantageous for the player. is set, even if the variable display results of super reach α1 and super reach β1 are out of range at a higher rate than when other setting values are set in the pachinko game machine 1 good. By doing so, it is possible to use the fact that the variable display result is wrong in the variable display of super reach α1 and super reach β1 as a suggestion that a high setting value is set in the pachinko game machine 1. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the fact that the variable display result is wrong while suppressing the player's interest in the fact that the variable display result is wrong in the variable display of super reach α1 and super reach β1. It becomes possible.

Further, in the characterizing portion 079SG, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is illustrated as a gaming machine that performs a predetermined game, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the gaming machine that performs a predetermined game is at least a predetermined game. In addition to the pachinko game machine 1, a slot machine or a general game machine may be used as long as it performs

1 pachinko game machine 2 game board 3 game machine frame 4A first special symbol display device 4B second special symbol display device 5 image display device 11 main board 12 effect control board 103 CPU
120 Production control CPU
200 dispensing device 202 first guide passage forming portion 201 ball tank forming portion 203 first passage forming body 210 terminal board 220 cover bodies 271A to 271H holes 314, 324, 334 cover portion 340 ball stop members N1 to 6, 11 to 16 Screw member

Claims (1)

A game machine capable of playing,
a starting region;
a sound output means capable of outputting a production sound;
a display means capable of displaying a production moving image;
an effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined effect using the effect moving image and the effect sound;
a storage section capable of storing game media;
a payout unit capable of paying out game media;
a guide passage forming portion having an open upper surface and forming a guide passage for guiding the game media in the storage portion to the payout portion;
a screw drop limiting portion provided to cover the upper side of the guide passage forming portion;
with
The screw drop-limiting portion prevents game media that have fallen on the screw drop-limiting portion from accumulating and the screw member that has dropped on the screw drop-limiting portion to fall to the guide passage forming portion. configured to be able to stay on the restriction part ,
The production executing means is
A game can be played using the game medium paid out from the payout unit, and an effect using the effect sound and the effect animation can be executed based on the entry of the game medium into the start area,
In the first period of the predetermined effect, a effect moving image whose progress speed of the effect is the first speed can be displayed on the display means,
In a second period of the predetermined effect after the first period, the display means can display a effect moving image in which the progress speed of the effect is a second speed slower than the first speed, and
The effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect can be output by the sound output means at the same speed in both the first period and the second period.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images